Accor Hotel Group’s Strategy In Travel And Tourism: An Analysis Term Paper Essay Help Free

Executive summary Accor is a market leader in the hotel, hospitality and tourism industries, at Europe and internationally. The company’s operations are spread across more than 100 countries, and the company employs a labor force of 150,000 employees. The company has 15 complementary brands, including Sofitel and MGallery among others.

The strategic programs and processes of the company that have worked effectively include its efforts to become the market leader in Europe. The company has also employed the strategy of investing in emerging markets, which has worked well in different markets including Asia Pacific and the Middle East. The financial strategy of the company has been effectively deployed. The strategy entailed the asset-light approach, shifting investment towards budget and mid-scale service provision and targeting high potential markets.

The company has employed a strategy of cultivating its major areas of strengths, including its wide brand portfolio, the pipeline development model, and its relatively high market presence. The global market positioning of the company was another effective strategy. This led to an increase in the company’s presence at different markets.

Accor has employed a strategy of selective investing in emerging markets, placing focus on high potential markets in the Middle East and Asia Pacific. The strategy has worked effectively for the company, indicating the need for further expansion. These markets include India, China, and Indonesia. Accor has also benefited from the strategy of investing in environmentally-friendly operation models at its hotels, which has worked during a pilot testing program in 10 hotels. The program is expected to increase market presence.

Introduction and company background Accor is a the leading hotel company in Europe and is claimed to be the third-largest hotel services company. For over forty years, the company has reinvented its major areas of competency, towards keeping pace with the competition (Ramboll management, 2002). With the company’s established brands, it emphasizes on the development of interpersonal relations and unique ways of service delivery to their customers.

The company operates in about 100 countries and employs labor force of 150,000 (Accor, 2010a). The company operates about 15 complementary brands, ranging from budget to luxury centers, which are famed for their delivery of high quality services and products, across the globe.

The group offers services to business and leisure travelers (Accor, 2010a). The Groups’ major brands include Pullman, Sofitel, Novotel, MGallery, Suitehotel, Mercure, All Seasons, Ibis, Formulae 1, Etap Hotel, Motel 6 and HotelF1 (Ramboll management, 2002). As of June 2010, the Group had more than 4100 hotels across the 100 countries covered, and a room capacity of more than 500,000 rooms.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The strategic planning and the processes of accor group The company’s aspirations to become a market leader in Europe

The demerger of the company’s voucher service business in 2010 was among the strategic actions that opened the way for the company to concentrate on its hospitality sector. Through the demerger, the company shifted its attention to cash flow generation and deleveraging. The demerger was strategically planned, so it could pave the way for the company’s involvement in asset development and consolidating its corporate leadership.

By the end of the year 2009, the company had 814 hotels under its ownership structure (Higgins, 2010). However, during its deleveraging phase of between 2010 and 2013, the company strategized on disposing 450 of the hotels under its control, for cash returns of $ 1.97 billion, at an attuned debt impact of $ 2.5 million.

By April of 2010, the company had already realized above half of the target amount of the 2010 program, at $ 552.6 million. According to Olivier Poirot, the CEO of Accor NA, the Company anticipated that, by the year 2011-2012, it will have cleared its debts. The company will still have many properties in its portfolio (Higgins, 2010).

Through the strategy, the company expected to invest approximately $ 245.6 million towards the development of between 35,000 and 40,000 new rooms-openings annually. For instance, the strategy streamlines on Ibid and Etap brands, which will form the core of expansion in Europe. In line with the strategic projections, the company anticipates having 20 percent of its holdings of fixed-leased or owned properties.

The remainder will fall under management, franchising, and variable lease plans (Higgins, 2010). About 58 percent of the company’s guestrooms should fall under budget and the economy classes. The company expects to control 700,000 rooms globally; 48% of the room portfolio being in Europe, 20% in the Asia/Pacific market and 19% of the North American territory (Higgins, 2010).

Accor’s interest in emerging markets

This strategic market positioning was started through the aggressive development by investing in China, Brazil, UK and India, throughout 2010. Accor has successfully developed characteristic brands, all of which are differentiated from one another, and from a competitor’s brand.

Through the strategy, the company has increased its presence internationally (Viladon, 2013). In ensuring that the strategic improvement of its market presence is realized, the company has developed a department dedicated towards increasing the visibility of the company’s brands, and making the brands easily noticeable. Accor does that through the strengthening of customer loyalty programs. It also enhances the knowledge of customers about their services (Viladon, 2013).

We will write a custom Term Paper on Accor Hotel Group’s Strategy in Travel and Tourism: An analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The expansion into emerging markets has entailed increasing the company’s budget and mid-range accommodation, which offers the company a platform, from which to present more options for customers (Hill and Jones, 2010). The strategy is aimed to serve leisure tourists from the different markets and focal destinations, changing their market positioning from a company dominated by 5-star services, to a wider market player, serving mid-range customer groups (Viladon, 2013).

In the emerging markets, Accor is increasing its presence, focusing on high potential markets, including China, Brazil and India. According to the strategic projections of the company, as of 2015, it anticipates enhanced coverage of its market network (Accor, 2011). The company plans to engage in selective investing, where the focus is channeled towards high-margin projects. These projects cover the prime locations of the market, particularly at the European segment of the emerging markets.

The strategy of the company entails expanding business in the development of franchising deals (Accor, 2011). In pursuit of the 2015 strategic goals, the company plans to embrace external growth opportunities through entering into strategic acquisitions and partnerships.

The strategic expansion modules are expected to strengthen the company’s leadership in the target markets, particularly at attractive, emerging markets (Hill and Jones, 2010). The focus of this strategy is channeling a larger part of the company’s business into the asset-light structure of the business (Accor, 2011).

Towards the pursuit of the strategy, Accor exceeded the set target for openings in 2011. It increased its room offering by 37,800 bedrooms (Accor, 2011). The company planned to acquire 40,000 bedrooms annually, for the years 2012 and 2013. The larger aspect of increasing the company’s room holding will be done through expanding their franchises and management contracts (Accor, 2011).

Table 1: Accor Group’s Brand Portfolio in 2010

Price platform Brand Luxury Sofitel Up-scale Pullman, MGallery Mid-scale Mercure, Novotel, Suithotel, Adagio Economy All Seasons, Ibis Budget Etap, Formule 1, HotelF1, Motel 6, Studio 6 Source: (Viladon, 2013)

The financial strategy of accor The financial returns for the year ended 31 December in 2010 depicted that the company was improving financially. The hotel revenues stood at EUR 5,693 million, which marked a 10 percent increase from the same financial period for the previous year (Accor, 2010a). The strategic changes that caused the 10 percent increment included the expansion of development programs, which increased the company’s revenues by EUR 75 million, the focus on mid-priced and budget customer-bases, and the company’s focus on the asset-light outlook.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Accor Hotel Group’s Strategy in Travel and Tourism: An analysis by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The asset-light outlook reduced the company’s corporate debt significantly (Accor, 2010a). The mid-scale and upscale segments were among the major performers of the company, leading to financial progress in the European territory, particularly in Germany, France, and the UK. The three markets saw increases in occupancy rates, leading to an increase in the standard room rates (Accor, 2010a).

The French market was characterized by a principally strong performance, which resulted from an increase in the flow of inbound tourism, and business-related tours in the country (Accor, 2010a). Hotel sales were also expected to increase, at a level of more than 3.6 percent between the years 2010 and 2015.

The financial strategy of Accor, also benefited from the cost-saving model introduced in 2009, as well as the continued increase in the economy class hotels in markets outside the US, which added to the operational financial results (Accor, 2010a).

Table 2: Accor Group’s key financial Indicators for year 2009/2010

EUR Million 2009 2010 Revenue 5,490 5,948 Operating Margin (%) 2.91 -2.48 Net Margin (%) -2.25 -5.37 Source: (Accor, 2010a) Revenue consolidated and restated, accounting for disposals and demerger.

The Strategic Strengths cultivated by Accor

The company presents a wide brand portfolio, operating in varied market segments. This strategy offers the company a competitive advantage. Thus, it can attract a wider customer-base, and expand its product and services offering. The company uses the pipeline development model, which focuses on the available growth opportunities in the Middle East and Asia Pacific (Accor, 2010a). This has contributed to the company’s high-profile market presence and service offering in the emerging markets.

Through its strategy of expanding market presence in emerging markets, the company has realized 70 recent development contracts, at the Asia Pacific in 2010 (Accor, 2010b). The new developments added to the initial hotel rooms holding by 16,000 rooms, in the company’s offering portfolio. The company has the potential to expand its growth in these markets, particularly in Asia-Pacific. This is due to its increased market presence in these emerging markets (Higgins, 2010).

The global market positioning of accor The company maintained a strong brand portfolio, despite the deteriorating economic conditions experienced during the crisis and conditions of increasing operational costs. The strategy was realized through the market positioning of many of the company’s brands as mid-scale and budget (Accor, 2010b).

Through the market conditions-guided approach, the company was able to minimize the effect of the downturn on its market performance. The high performance of the company was also fostered by the company’s brand awareness and the strong occupancy rates, especially in the European market. The increasing market demand helped maintain the performance of the company, regardless of the wavering market conditions (See Appendix 3: Accor’s Global ranking).

Regionally, the company focused on Western Europe, throughout 2010. Western Europe is the market from which it sources a larger component of its hotel services revenues. However, the company expanded into the Latin America and Asia Pacific, where it anticipates drawing major value growth.

As a result, the company kept increasing its hotel coverage in these target market regions (Accor, 2013). The company took advantage of the increasing consumer spending at some of the emerging markets, particularly Latin America.

The target population for this market was the emerging middle class in countries like Brazil, whose economy proved resilient to the impacts of the global recession. The company anticipates the benefits it expects to gain from the high financial flexibility of the market, as well as the improvements of commodity pricing, which left tourism and travel industries unaffected.

Accor’s strategic investment patterns across asia pacific and middle east The company is investing its resources in emerging markets in a selective manner, based on a strategy aimed at committing resources in areas that present the best opportunity for revenue generation. The target markets in the Asia Pacific include India, China, and other Asia Pacific markets, including Padang, Kuta, and Bangka. The company plans to invest in the Middle East after it identified the region as an emerging market with a high potential for expansion (Accor, 2013).

China

Towards taking advantage of the Indian and Chinese markets, Accor entered into 25 new contracts in the mid-scale and luxury segments of the market in 2010. The company entered into these new deals through a few of its brands, including Mercure, Novotel, Sofitel, and Pullman (Accor, 2013).

The new company outlets are based at the following locations: Zhuhai, Guiyang, Huizhou, and Changsha. The new deals increased the company’s presence in the country, where it had 100 hotels and about 26,500 rooms spread across the 42 cities. The market portfolio of the company comprises of 15 upscale, 23 luxury, 44 economy hotels and 18 mid-scale hotels (Accor, 2013).

India

In India, the company projected investing $ 130 million, which were expected to cover 50 hotels, by the end of 2012. In India, the company is using three of its major brands, including Ibis, Novotel and Mercure. During early 2010, the company communicated its plans to develop 90 hotels in India, between the years 2010 and 2015 (Accor, 2013). As of Dec 2010, the company had entered into contracts, for the construction of the 90 hotels.

The company planned to introduce more of its established brands in the Indian market, including Pullman, Softel and Formulae 1, during the financial year 2011-2012. The strategy paid off in India as the market was barely affected by the economic crisis. The impacts of the crisis were not felt by the Indian economy. In this case, the large, dynamic economy characterized by a high number of middle class consumers presents a major opportunity for business development (Accor, 2013).

Other Asia Pacific areas

The Accor company strategized on the opening of eight new hotels in Indonesia, by the end of 2012. The locations for the new hotels include, Padang, Manado, Surabatya, Kuta, Balikpapan, Jakarta, Denpasar, and Bangka (Accor, 2013).

The strategic expansion in the region was expected to increase the value share of the company, as well as to outweigh the business of the competition in the hospitality industry. The company strategized on expanding its coverage, by opening 12 other hotels in Vietnam, which will increase its room holding by 2000 rooms during the year 2013 (Accor, 2013).

Middle East

The company strategized on capturing the potential of the emerging market, through starting five Ibis hotels in the region. The company expects to reach 54 hotels, and coverage of more than 12,497 rooms by the end of 2014. As of 2011, the company had nine hotels opened in the region.

During 2012, the company had strategized on expansion by opening four hotels. Among the hotels, 2 were located in Bahrain, 2 in Saudi Arabia, 2 and 3 in Syria, which were to create about 1,500 jobs (Accor, 2010b). Further expansion was to be done through franchising locally, at locations like Damman, Jeddah, and Makkah. In Saudi Arabia, the company has strategized on the opening of nine hotels, with a longer-term plan to increase the number by 15 property investments, within 5 years (Accor, 2013).

The new category focus on sustainable tourism and development The company has identified that, in a world with an increasing demand for authentic business experiences and greener means, new opportunities for expansion will be created. This will increase the sustainability of its eco-tourism and development (Accor, 2010b, p. 60-63).

Among the strategic positioning programs that have worked for the company include the Green Key eco-rating project. After pilot-testing the program, the Green Key Eco-rating model will be spread across the company’s studio 6 properties and Motel 6 centers. The program on green performance inspects the resorts and hotels, certifying them on the basis of carrying out their everyday operations in ways that depict commitment to sustainable practices (Accor, 2010ba, p. 63-65).

The areas checked before the hotels are certified include levels of operational costs, mainly in the areas of water, waste levels and energy consumption. Through the green operations platform project, the company will enhance its competitive advantage. In this case, it will earn the support and the strategic endorsement of green-operating players internationally (Accor, 2010b; Kaplan and Norton, 1996).

Conclusion Accor is a leading hotel company in Europe, and a major industry player globally. The company has been in operation for more than forty years, employing strategic processes in its major areas of competency towards meeting the challenge of competition. The company employs its strategies towards the improvement of the quality of its services, positioning its products and services and maintaining an environment-friendly performance.

The strategies that work for Accor Company include positioning itself as a market leader within the European market, which entailed the demerger with Voucher Services to focus on the provision of hospitality and tourism services. The second effective strategic model was the company’s focus on emerging markets, and focusing its deployment on the provision of mid-scale and budget services.

The financial strategy of the company has been a highly successful one as it has increased the company’s revenues. The strategy entails expanding the company’s provision of budget and mid-scale services, adopting the asset-light approach and the expansion of development programs. The cultivation of strategic strengths has worked effectively for the company, which touched on different areas including increasing the company’s presence in the Middle East and Asia Pacific.

The global positioning of the company is another strategy that has worked effectively. It has focused on highly potent markets including Asia Pacific and the Middle East. Accor’s strategic development has focused on investing in sustainable development and tourism, where the company is streamlining its operations to eco-friendly standards, which will improve its competitive edge in the short and the long term.

References Accor. (2010a). Accor: 2010 Annual Report. Web.

Accor. (2010b). Investor day 2010: Paris. Accor Group, 4-35. Web.

Accor. (2011). Accor: 2010 Annual Report: New frontiers in Hospitality. Web.

Accor. (2013). Accor’s strategic vision. Web.

Higgins, S. (2010). Accor demerger paves way for new strategy. Hotel News Now. Web.

Hill, C.,

[supanova_question]

Art Transformation Since the Middle Ages to the Current Times Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Art and Politics: Part 1 Introduction

Art is constantly changing to accommodate the occurrences of the modern worlds. Even though art is often understood as an apolitical issue, the events of the 1960s compelled artists to take up political concerns in their works.1

Source 1: Art and communism in Romania

Preda, C 2012, ‘Art and politics in post-communist Romania: changes and continuities’, The Journal of Arts Management, Law, and Society, vol. 42 no. 1, pp. 116–127.

In this article, Preda posits that the end of the Cold War and the collapse of the Soviet Union was not the end of communism in Europe.2 Artists and their works of art expressed their support or condemnation of this form of leadership throughout the struggle.

One nation that underwent democratic reconstruction is Romania and its journey through communism was expressed in several works of art.3 Preda looks at the post-communist Romania coupled with how art was expressed and it is still being expressed in this part of the world.

In the works of art in Romania during this period, the author expresses tension that existed between nostalgia and legacies. The country was going through democratisation after the end of communism and the use of art was prominent in support and critique of the process and its leaders.

The state of Romania played a central role in politics and art and art discourses of the time questioned the role of the state and art in the years after 1990. Before this period, the country was under dictatorial rule and art was suppressed, and thus it was only being used for its aesthetic value.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The state has continued to fund art in this country and Preda states that politicians fund art to ensure that they facilitate movement from the painful past to a more democratic future.

The artists in Romania demonstrated continued dependence from political leaders in the 90s after the collapse of communism, and Preda states that this assisted mentality made the artists subjective to the political will.

Source 2: Art and politics in New Zealand

Grierson, E 2007, ‘Difference: A critical investigation of the creative arts with attention to art as a site of knowledge’, Educational Philosophy and Theory, vol. 39 no. 5, pp. 533-542.

Elisabeth Grierson is another author who looks at the relationship between art and politics in her article. She uses New Zealand to investigate the contribution of art to knowledge and political change. In the article, Grierson examines the contemporary use of art in New Zealand to correct the political elite and increase the knowledge of society on its rights.4

New Zealand has experienced several transformations since its independence and authors together with artists were instrumental in driving the masses to ensure that they realise self-governance5. In the article, Grierson explains how the contemporary artists use images, drawings, and music to criticise the authorities and their actions.

The article focuses on the politics of difference in the work of art and it is stated that the project grew since colonialism and gained popularity during the post-colonial era.6 Grierson gives the example of Griselda Pollock’s works, which happened in the years between 1988 and 1999.

We will write a custom Essay on Art Transformation Since the Middle Ages to the Current Times specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Grierson states that the ‘way Pollock situates art history into a broad field of social, cultural, and political enquiry is pertinent when a postmodern context is sought in art as an educational procedure’7. The article displays how works of art can be politically influential in the post-modern era.

Source3: Art and Politics in general

Sartwell, C 2010, ‘Art and Politics’, American Society for aesthetics An Association for Aesthetics, Criticism and Theory of the Arts, vol. 30 no.3, pp. 1-4.

Artistic works and politics coupled with their interactions have been the subject of many studies such as those discussed above. Crispin Sartwell is one of the writers who investigate the use of art in politics and how this usage has transformed over the last few decades.

Sartwell states that in the period before 1991, most works of arts and especially dance performances had incorporated the politics of racism or the global HIV/AIDs pandemic.8 This aspect led many researchers to think that all works of art were meant to take political paths and bear political messages.

The use of art for propaganda reasons has been largely applied in many parts of the world. According to Sartwell, this move is a means of shaping the consciousness of the populace.9 Sartwell cites the Shepard Fairey’s Obama-Hope poster as being used to shape people’s consciousness as work of art.

The article focuses on the role of art in the determination of political outcomes in his article, After the Gold Rush. Politics and art have become inseparable for a long period and the contemporary artists are increasingly having politics as the main agenda in the works of art.10

The publicity of works of art that have political meanings is also stated to be greater than other forms of art and this assertion means that artists are becoming attracted to the idea of political expressionism.11

Not sure if you can write a paper on Art Transformation Since the Middle Ages to the Current Times by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The religious works of art are also important to consider and the politics of religion has been a crucial aspect for artists with many of them expressing themselves in ways that have drawn both criticism and praise.

Comparison of main sources

The sources discussed above illustrate the relationship between art and politics over the last few decades. The authors show the different areas in the world where works of art have been used to make political statements and influence the masses.

The first article shows how the use of art can be used for positive change politically in a nation that previously experienced poor leadership. In the article, the author shows the changes that art has been in a position to achieve in Romania after the fall of communism.12

However, one shortcoming for this move is the dependence that art has developed on sate support in the country. In contrast to this article, the second article by Grierson shows how art could be used to criticise the political class and ensure that the masses have their say in the political system.

Grierson’s article displays the use or art to criticise the ruling class and some of the policies that are in place in New Zealand and changes have taken place due to the same. The third article by Sartwell shows how art could be used to influence the masses to vote for particular individuals into political office.

This article contrasts the previous two pieces as the author expresses both sides of the use of art in politics. Art has both positive and negative influence on political stability in a country and the article shows how the modern use of art is to deceive the public into believing the political classes and their strategies.13

Art and Politics: Part 2 Works of art have attracted attention over the centuries due to their aesthetic value. However, art has been used to express a variety of emotions including anger and love.

For a long period, artists managed to stay out of political expressionism, but with the 19th and 20th century wars and major political events, art largely became associated with politics and some works of art were banned in the process. The authorities apprehended and charged artists in courts for incitement.

These events led to a change in understanding of art as being an apolitical issue. The events of the 1960s saw artists take up political concerns in their works. This part is a research on the interaction between art and politics, specifically in the last half of a decade.

The study of the relationship between art and politics shows that artists in the contemporary age are increasingly using their works of art to influence politics or populations into the desired political pathways. Art is an important aspect of any society and pre and post colonisation periods were marked with interactions between politics and art.14

Initially thought as being non-political, art has undergone a transformation over the last century with the political era after the 60s seeing more use of art in expressionism.15

After the end of the Second World War, a number of wars were fought between the many ideologies that developed with the mainstream ones being capitalism and communism. According to Bolognani, both sides of the political divide used art as one of the avenues of outdoing each other and marketing their system as ideal.16

In the communist nations, the use of art was mainly by the state and its operatives to brainwash the people and ensure that they were obedient to the authorities.17

Art was also used to portray the rulers at the time as being more powerful than life.18 The artists at the time were required to immortalise the political figures in leadership at the time and they utilised statues and other monuments that would be hard to demolish or erase from the minds of the people.19

During the period after 1960, the galleries in the most perceived oppressed parts of the world were full of materials that were viewed as being in support of the ruling regimes.20

The materials were symbolic of the current rule and most of them portrayed the dictators and authoritarians as being the people’s saviours.21 Works of art that were perceived as being against the established rule of law were highly censured in countries with political instability and authoritarian leadership with most of them being burnt or destroyed.

Art was also used to criticise the leadership of the time and in response to this move, the authorities would arrest, deport, torture, or murder artists that were perceived to be resistant to the government and its rule of law.22 With the fall of communism in the early 90s, the works of art that represented symbols of the communist regime were among the propaganda tools that were destroyed.

The citizens brought down the monuments erected in honour of the leaders as they protested the decades of oppressive rule and many of the images available showing these revolutions show the monuments being brought down.23

The use of art in politics was not restricted to the communist nations and in the Cold War. In the capitalist nations that had been decisive in the war against the German oppression of Europe, art was still used as a political tool.24

The difference was that the artists were in a position to express themselves more freely and museums were full or works of art in praise and criticism of the political class.25 Some of the art works were also censured in these nations to prevent any revolutions from taking place in the region.

The artists used the film industry as one of the avenues of expressing criticism and praise for the ruling class. The industry was turned into a multibillion-dollar propaganda machine, which was used to influence the decisions and the outcomes of any political activities.

The contemporary political environment is marked by a strong desire to influence the ill of people since power is mainly centred on them. Most nations around the world have embraced democracy where the will of the people is respected.

For individuals to attain political office, the people must first accept them and these politicians have devised a variety of ways of winning people’s hearts and minds26. Art on the other hand is a strong tool that can be used to express oneself and politicians have realised this aspect.

Most artists have engaged in the production of art to earn a living and politicians pay very well for works of art that are working in their favour.27 Therefore, art is currently inseparable from politics and it is a big influence in politics.

According to Sartwell, politics and art are two inseparable arenas of human endeavour and have since shown important intersections.28 Some cited works of art played a critical role in the influence of political outcomes such as the American elections and Sartwell cites the Obama campaign and the Shepard Fairey’s Obama-Hope poster that played a part in the campaigns.29

Every political regime after the 1960s has used or misused art determination of political survival and authors coupled with artists have been in support and opposition to the use of art in politics. However, artists are divided on the issue of use of art in politics and many have been in support of the use of art to champion the rights and representation of special interest groups in politics.

Over the last fifty years, opposition to political rule in many countries has marked the revolutionary changes in the political fields across the world.30 War has pushed some countries to the brink of collapse with rebels fighting the authorities for political representation.

A befitting example is the Arab Spring, which started in Africa before spreading to the Middle East and Syria is still under ruins courtesy of war. The opposing sides in any war have usually resorted to the use of art as their propaganda machine and in achieving their interests.

In most instances, the government side has been out of favour with people during such instances and the resistance movement has always capitalised on this aspect.31

Artists have been approached by both sides of the political divide and according to Sartwell, the resistance movements have often used art more effectively as compared to their oppressors in the government and he describes the use of art by the government as being ‘often gigantical yet excruciatingly dull’32.

According to Robiglio and Margagliotta, politics has not only been shaped by art, but the reverse can be considered as true.33 One way in which politics has been a major influence on art is through the permission of expression through art.

The political authorities have significantly been responsible for any works of art present in any political system and by allowing some works of art that survived the great wars, the government has controlled what is available for the public to see and hear.

According to Sartwell, “the art that survives from eras past is whatever the authorities permitted to persist. The history of art is, hence, by and large the history of monuments and of artworks compatible with capitulation”34.

Works of art have not only been used to critique, question, resist, or approve the political systems, but they have been of significant influence on politics thus leading even to the development of special political systems.

Many of the special political systems that have attracted attention over the last half a decade have had works of art central to their establishment.35 Some of the political documents that could be cited as being special works of art include the Communist Manifesto by Karl Marx and Common Sense of Republic by Plato.

The Declaration of Independence is also considered as a special work of art and has it shaped the political system in the United States. Some regimes have openly been against art and especially those that have their basis on Marxism.

Political leaderships that have engaged art to sell their policies or they that have been elected to power have promoted and popularised the art that they used. Therefore, politics has contributed significantly to spread and international acclaim of works of art.36

Many nations around the world have a special part symbols that are works of art in themselves. Association with the symbols has been a great influence on the popularity of works of art. In New Zealand, the political system borrows form the English system and the ideologies on art have been similar, in a way.

Like any other contemporary democracy, the will of the people is a great influence on the leaders that are elected into office. Legislators have adopted the use of art in their political campaigns, manifestos, and other political machinery to polarise their agendas.37

Politics have also influenced art through the development of special institutions sponsoring art on the political front. In major political parties around the world, there are large departments that are charged with the duty of propaganda and popularity of a party.38

These special departments contract artists who advise them on the appropriate design messages and methods of art that they can use to gain political advantage over their rivals through stronger influence of the people.

The high demand for the works of art to be used in on the political arena has led to the development of special institutions that are dedicated to the teaching art. Universities around the world have also adopted the teaching of art in their institutions and a large number of students are currently undertaking these art related courses.39

The large market for works of art that has resulted from the political exposure has led to the transformation of the art industry as one of the financial sectors in many economies. Currently, artists can use their skills to earn a living and support their families as opposed to other periods in history when art was less financially attractive and productive.40

However, this political-led financial transformation of the art industry has led to the attraction of artists who are more concerned about making money, as opposed to producing masterpieces with deeper meaning, which in most cases may not be popular.

The result of this trend is the development of poor works of art in the place of traditionally rich art works. However, the output has increased over the past century with millions of works of art being produced every single year due to the growth.41

The current trend where technological innovations have contributed to the field of art has also ensured that politicians are ahead of the people via art.

Online campaigns are a present day reality and the creation of masterpieces has shifted from the traditional hardcopy materials to the softcopies that are cheaper to produce and market. Additionally, online campaigns can reach out to many people, and this it is an effective way of promoting art.

Politics exposed art to some of the factors that were not traditionally part of the industry. An example of such assertion is the wide criticism that the industry is associated with in several parts across the world.

Due to the political messages inherent in some artworks, the general population has opted to shun the works of art and even destroy them. Some critics even associate the act of destroying the works of art with freedom, which was traditionally abominable.

Some people also associate works of art with favoured political interests, and in some cases, the acquisition of an artwork is for political reasons as opposed to its aesthetic value.

This aspect undervalues art, as the realised function is inferior to the intended one of representing beauty and ingenuity. The other effect of politics on art in the contemporary times is the application of art in indoctrination of different groups around the world.

Art has been associated with special powers that people use to control some individuals in society. This aspect forms the basis of the association between some forms of art and certain movements associated with Satanism. Therefore, politicians use the perceived special powers of art to influence the thinking of their supporters.

Conclusion Art is a central part of any culture and it has undergone a transformation since the Middle Ages to the current times. This essay looked into some of the articles showing the relationship between art and politics. It showed the use of art to criticise, support, and to bring down political ideologies in the past half century.

The end of the Second World War and the onset of other wars such as the Cold War led to the high use of art mainly to criticise political systems and authorities with these authorities using art to influence the masses and win their trust.

Politics have also played a role in the shaping of political ideologies as seen in the essay. Art has developed significantly over this period and most efforts can be attributed to the political systems. Therefore, this essay shows that there is a strong relationship between politics and art.

Reference List Alessi, V 2012, ‘The grey space between art and politics’, Artlink, vol.32 no.3, pp. 32-33.

Bolognani, M 2011, ‘Communities, audiences, and multi-functions: British cultural politics and the showcasing of South Asian art’, South Asian Popular Culture, vol.9 no.1, pp. 71-80.

Christopoulou, M 2013, ‘Exploring the Socio-Politics of the Greek Debt Crisis in a Primary Art Classroom: A Political Cartooning Project’, International Journal of Art

[supanova_question]

Silent Spring Essay (Book Review) cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Why I Agree with the Argument

Why the Environmental Issues are Relevant Today

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Silent Spring is a 1962 book that highlighted the environmental and health impacts of pesticides. Particularly, the book highlighted the environmental destruction caused by the pesticide, DDT (Carson 21). Some of the public uproar against the use of DDT that occurred in the 1950s and 1960s stemmed from the book.

The book also drew the world’s attention to the harmful properties of DDT by reporting its many harmful effects on wildlife, the environment, and human health. The main narrative of the book pictured a silent life where there were no birds, because they were killed by DDT (hence the title, Silent Spring).

Silent Spring caused a lot of controversy among scientists, environmentalists, and scholars for its political and scientific implications (Murphy 101; Carson 76). On one hand, politicians criticized the book for its lack of balance between the scientific and environmental effects of DDT (Murphy 94).

For example, some politicians said the book “whitewashed” the contributions of DDT in reducing malaria and other diseases (Murphy 94). They claimed that the human health benefits of the pesticide were more than the negative environmental effects of the same.

On the other side of the debate, environmentalists claimed that Silent Spring created a lot of environmental consciousness regarding the negative environmental and health effects of the pesticide (Murphy 1).

In America, the findings of the book contributed to the strengthening of environmental regulations for chemical and pesticide companies (Murphy 98).

Despite the credibility (or lack of it) for both sides of the argument, this paper agrees with the message of Silent Spring by arguing that although the use of DDT has declined in modern times, the environmental destruction of similar pesticides on the environment, wildlife, and human health exists today.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, although Silent Spring mainly focused on highlighting the negative effects of DDT, the environmental issues discussed in the book are still relevant today.

Why I Agree with the Argument This paper agrees with the arguments of Silent Spring because DDT has many environmental and health hazards to human and wildlife. Naturally, the environment is a resilient system that thrives on natural ecosystems.

However, the powerful effects of DDT on this ecosystem could destabilize the entire system (Carson 6). Such concerns have not emerged recently because scientists expressed their concerns about the use of DDT, as early as the 1940s.

Such concerns highlighted the persistence of DDT’s harmful effects in the environment, after contaminating soils and other natural resources (Carson 6). As such, Silent Spring highlights many effects of the pesticide, including the contamination of water bodies, wildlife deaths, egg thinning, and similar effects (Carson 6).

The book also highlights the carcinogenic effects of DDT on human health because it increases people’s chances of developing cancer. Similarly, through its toxic effects, DDT also increases people’s chances of developing diabetes and respiratory diseases.

To understand the core message of Silent Spring, it is important to understand why the book mainly focused on the pesticide and ignored the effects of other environmental pollutants. Scientifically, DDT is a fat-soluble pesticide that can dissolve into animal tissue and remain there for a long time (Carson 6).

For example, grasshoppers (and other animals that are in the low food chain) may ingest harmful components of DDT and it dissolves in their fat tissues. Later, animals that eat the grasshoppers ingest the chemical in a similar fashion and suffer the same damage to their tissues, as the grasshoppers do.

We will write a custom Book Review on Silent Spring specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Eventually, people eat the same animals and continue the chain of contamination. Consequently, people suffer from damaged genes, birth defects, and impotence (as a few examples of the effects of DDT) (Murphy 102).

An important part of this argument (that explains why the core message of Silent Spring is crucial to the understanding of the environmental challenges that face us today) is the powerful nature of the pesticide. In other words, as opposed to other types of pesticides, DDT is a non-discriminate “killer” because it eliminates different types of pests and insects (this ability stems from its powerful nature).

The same property makes it potentially dangerous to wildlife and human beings. Based on this analogy, the detrimental effects of the pesticide on human and wildlife explain why I concur with the core message of Silent Spring that no country should use DDT because it is harmful.

Why the Environmental Issues are Relevant Today Although some countries have banned DDT, others still use it for agricultural purposes. For example, certain part of Asia, Africa, and South America still use the pesticide for agricultural purposes (Carson 270). However, most western governments have banned the pesticide for its negative environmental effects.

Since its use has been limited to some parts of the world and narrowed to specific purposes, some people may argue that the core message of Silent Spring is irrelevant today because the book speaks of a pesticide that seldom used today.

However, a deeper insight of the book’s message reveals that its contents apply to several environmental challenges experienced today. For example, DDT is not the only pesticide that causes human and wildlife destruction today. Indeed, several pesticides account for widespread environmental destruction.

For example, persistent organic pollutants cause environmental destruction, as DDT does. Here, it is pertinent to mention that DDT already falls in this category (persistent organic pollutants), but other contaminants such as Aldrin, and Chlordane still have the same properties as DDT (Carson 23).

Some of these contaminants can stay in the soil/environment for long periods, thereby affecting the natural ecosystem. Most of them also affect non-target species and contaminate vital components of the natural ecosystem, such as water and air. Therefore, today’s global environment does not only suffer from DDT, but also similar pesticides that cause the same effect on the environment (Carson 25).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Silent Spring by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Therefore, the argument that Silent Spring is irrelevant today is narrow because DDT is not the only pesticide that causes environmental destruction. Moreover, the same concerns that characterized its use still apply to other pesticides with similar or close environmental characteristics.

Besides the above insights, it is crucial to mention that Silent Spring also informs many environmental challenges we face today because it addresses the need for finding sustainable solutions to our pressing human development needs.

The book addressed this issue by striving to find a balance between the environmental needs and human health concerns. In detail, by investigating the use of DDT to address the prevalence of malaria and other communicable diseases, the book sought to address the health challenges faced by human populations.

More specifically, the book addressed the challenges faced by science in solving this problem because it emphasized on the importance of following the best (sustainable) approaches for achieving this purpose.

For example, Silent Spring supported the need to prevent malaria by findings sustainable scientific solutions for killing mosquitoes, as opposed to the use of environmentally destructive methods for doing so.

Certainly, many people understand the purpose of solving perennial human problems through scientific means, but few people understand the implications of these methods on the environment and human health. Particularly, people do not understand the scope or magnitude of the effects of these methods on their health, or the environment.

In fact, a broader understanding of this argument reveals that many people may easily “defeat” the methods for solving these problems because we create new problems by introducing unsustainable solutions.

One argument that supports the core message of Silent Spring (against the use of DDT) is the fact that most people did not stop using the pesticide because of the contents of the book, but because of its developed ineffectiveness in serving its purpose (Carson 269).

For example, mosquitoes developed a resistance to DDT, thereby rendering it ineffective in preventing malaria (Carson 269). This analysis shows the importance of striking a balance between environmental and human development needs.

This balance is especially relevant in today’s fast-paced global society where nations compete among one another, based on their economic developments. For example, emerging economies are expanding their economic activities at the expense of the environment.

Illustratively, global environmental reports show that China accounts for a significant percentage of the global carbon footprint. Developed nations, like the US, also contribute to the high volumes of greenhouse gas emissions in the globe.

The effects of the rapid industrial growth reflect the same concerns raised by Silent Spring (concerning environmental destruction). For example, the emission of harmful pollutants from different industries contaminates water bodies, upsets the natural ecosystem, and causes serious human health problems (as DDT does).

Based on this analogy, the concerns raised by Carson in Silent Spring therefore apply to modern environmental problems. At the center of this argument is the concept of sustainable development because many human activities in the 19th and 20th centuries ignored the environmental impact of economic activities.

Silent Spring appeals to the need to have sustainable development because it supports the introduction of environmentally friendly interventions for solving human development needs. This support blends with the need to have sustainable solutions for human development needs. Overall, the core message of Silent Spring is still relevant today.

Conclusion After taking into account the core message of Silent Spring, it is pertinent to say most of the issues discussed in the book are relevant today, as they were in the 19th and 20th centuries.

Particularly, this paper agrees with the core environmental issues discussed in the book because scientific evidence shows that DDT and other pesticides (discussed in the book) have a detrimental effect on wildlife and human health. Unlike people who say the contents of the book are highly political, I believe the contents of Silent Spring are important today.

Based on the dilemma created by highlighting the negative use of pesticides and the persistent diseases caused by the failure to use them, someone may ask, what is the solution to this problem? The best solution for this problem is achieving the intended purpose of pesticide use by using non-chemical methods.

For example, the manual elimination of weeds is an effective way of reducing the negative effects of weeds on crops. Applying heat and covering unwanted plants with plastic are also other effective methods of achieving the same purpose. This framework should guide future scientific research.

Works Cited Carson, Rachel. Silent Springs, New York, NY: Houghton Mifflin, 2002. Print.

Murphy, Priscilla. What a Book Can Do: The Publication and Reception of Silent Spring, Boston, MA: Univ of Massachusetts Press, 2007. Print.

[supanova_question]

Process Performance and Quality at Starwood Hotels college application essay help: college application essay help

Quality management Dimensions of Customer Satisfaction

Starwood Hotels and Resorts employed the Six Sigma model to measure its performance and offer quality services to its clients. It had all the necessary inputs to ensure customers got what they wanted.

However, it was unable to define or classify them and this means that customers were sometimes unable to get what they wanted yet the company had the potential of providing all the customer requirements.

Therefore, the first stage involved defining or identifying the problem that customers were experiencing. This company managed to do this by introducing phones that contained the information about the services that clients wanted (Goldratt and Cox 2010).

Guests were required to dial the numbers stored on the phones and hotel attendants would be on their doorsteps to serve them. The numbers were coded to represent various services. Secondly, the introduction of call logs enabled the company to track the efficiency of employees that handled specific tasks.

The third stage involved the use of Pareto charts to analyze what employees could do within 15 minutes after receiving calls from clients. The fourth stage involved the introduction of improvement strategies that ensured clients got quality services from the company.

This included improving how telephone operators handled requests from customers. In addition, it involved procedures that were used to determine the person to call when a client requests the services of this hotel (Krajewski, Ritzman and Malhotra 2012).

Moreover, this organization faced serious challenges like engineering workloads, but it ensured that qualified people were assigned different roles in the control room to check technical issues that may affect communication between clients and employees.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Lastly, it was necessary to establish effective ways of controlling and measuring the performance of the telephone system. This ensured that this service produced the expected results within the specified time.

The services were monitored for 12-18 months and the managers were supposed to be given monthly reports to ensure the Sheraton Service Promise program improved the quality of services offered by this company.

Costs of Process Performance and Quality

The costs included service delivery, time, quality and products. There was the need for the new program to facilitate coordination among these aspects to help the company to achieve its targets.

This was important in helping the company to offer its services properly and eliminate the chances of being unable to supply products that were available due to poor communication systems (Krajewski et al., 2012). Secondly, the company saved time because clients were introduced to mobile phones and how to use them to request for room services.

The use of phones ensured that clients got what they wanted because these gadgets offered a list of the services and products offered by the company. Customers did not waste time deciding where to get what they wanted. They were very happy that they could get the services of this company without struggling to ask or wait for long before being assisted.

The Six Sigma Model

The Six Sigma model is an efficient tool of measuring performance in an organization. However, it has various disadvantages that make it unsuitable in the hospitality industry. First, this model requires a company to define key factors that are necessary for problem resolution (Krajewski et al., 2012).

This creates ambiguity and does not place the company in a good position to know its problems. Therefore, it becomes difficult for a hotel to know its challenges because this process does not limit a manager’s scope of defining the speed and efficiency of employees and services offered (Sherwood and Barnsteiner 2012).

We will write a custom Case Study on Process Performance and Quality at Starwood Hotels

[supanova_question]

Zeitgeist spirit Essay essay help

The digital age has brought several conveniences and inconveniencies to the modern life. The sweeping changes that have been brought about by the digital age have affected almost all aspects of life. The ease of access to information has also enabled people to question their choices in life and contemplate how their careers will be affected by the digital age.

This happens to two salesmen whose careers become irrelevant due to the digital age. These two men are the subject of the movie “The Internship” which premiered in 2013. The movies portrays several shocks that have been brought about by the digital age including diminishing careers, changing work environments, changes in employer-employee relations, among other shocks.

The dynamics of the business world are also shifting from a profit oriented business culture towards a more people oriented corporate culture. Over the last ten years, several movies have addressed various angles of these changes in the employer-employee relations through several movies such as “The Horrible Bosses” and “The Heist”.

These movies depict the souring relationships between employers and employees. The recent revolution in the corporate world involves bridging this gap and making employees feel more like part of the corporate world and less like ‘tools’ to be used by corporate world.

This revolution has brought about workplace day-care programs, extended paternity leaves, recreational facilities in the workplace, additional employee freedom, and giving employees access to free stuff.

“The Internship” is able to capture the Zeitgeist spirit of the changes occasioned by the digital age and the quest to bridge the employee-employer gap in today’s corporate environment.

“The Internship” is a movie about two men, Billy and Nick who find themselves jobless after their line of business becomes obsolete. This is after their employer goes out of business due to the diminishing demand for watches. Billy then applies for the internship positions at the giant tech company, Google.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The two friends are consequently accepted for the summer internship in spite of their advanced ages. At Google, Nick and Billy find themselves as the odd interns when they are pitted against the other ivy-league schooled interns. The terms of the internship specify that interns “form teams that compete against each other and the members of the winning team get jobs at Google” (The Internship).

Billy and Nick team up with three other odd-placed interns and their group is led by an equally odd character, Stuart. The movie depicts among other things the work environment at Google, the interrelationships between top-level employees and lower-level employees, and the type of employees that are found at Google.

Google is a company with a global outlook and it represents the most advanced level of digital culture. Right from the time Billy and Nick arrive at Google headquarters, they are bombarded with shocking levels of advanced digital technology.

For instance, at the company’s entrance the two interns encounter a car that is ‘driving itself’ (The Internship). This advancement in digital technology is a reality in the modern world. The leading players in digital technology are always trying to outdo each other by fronting what is thought to be the most advanced level of digital technology (Kosfeld and Siemens 25).

The remotely driven car is an example of displays of advanced digital technology. Due to the changing nature of the digital technology, today’s society is always on the lookout for the ‘newest’ form of technology. This need has prompted tech companies to dedicate a vast amount of their resources to finding the next big thing in technology.

This movie represents the spirit of the fast changing digital age in a number of ways. In another instance, the interns’ teams are given the challenge of coming up with a phone app that is most likely to appeal to the public. Therefore, the winning app must represent the newest levels of digital technology.

Corporations are going to great lengths to ensure that their employees are representative of the diversity of the modern world. Globalization has made it possible for anyone to work anywhere in the planet irrespective of the accompanying differences in cultures.

We will write a custom Essay on Zeitgeist spirit specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The corporations are also working hard to bridge the cultural gap between different ethnicities around the world. For example, today there are various technological applications that are aimed at bridging this cultural gap. “The Internship” represents the spirit of diversity through the movie’s cast.

The interns in Billy and Nick’s group consist of Neha who is of Indian descent, Yo-Yo who is Chinese, among other diverse groups and mentalities. For example Neha, Stuart, Graham, and Yo-Yo all exhibit several deficiencies in their social behaviors. The spirit of diversity in the modern world is not restricted to racial diversity.

However, diversity today calls for the inclusion of people who exhibit differing social behaviors. For example, the popular American comedy “The Big Bang Theory” portrays diversity among people of different intellectual abilities. “The Internship” seeks to capture the same spirit by portraying interns of different age groups, races, social orientations, and intellectual abilities (The Internship).

The issues of misunderstandings among diverse groups are not synonymous with the digital age. For instance, the race issue does not come up in “The Internship” but other forms of diversity such as age and intellectual diversity are referred to in the movie. This spirit of the changing nature in diversity is well captured in the movie.

From the 1900s, the relationship between employees and employers has been strained. First, there were the repressive working conditions during the industrial revolution (Bernstein 67). Then there were the employee inequality issues in the 1950s.

More recently, the disparities between top-level and low-level employees that were highlighted during the recession have been the subject of rebuke within the modern society. This movie is able is able to capture the spirit of the changing nature of corporate culture. For example, the issue of employee rank is not emphasized in the movie.

It is not until the end of the movie when the identity of the silent employee commonly known as “Headphones” is revealed. ‘Headphones’ holds the esteemed position of the head of Google search. Previously, he could only be found around the premises blending with the rest of employees including interns.

Moreover, most employees in the movie are given titles in accordance with the departments they work for as opposed to having titles that reflect on their rank. The movie is able to capture the spirit of change in the employer-employee relations.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Zeitgeist spirit by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More “The Internship” is a movie that details the work environment in one of the most respected corporations in the world. The movie is able to depict how the digital age is changing people’s lives as well as the corporate environment.

The movie represents the Zeitgeist spirit in matters of the digital age and the corporate environment. In future, the movie will be used to investigate the digital age at its prime.

Works Cited Bernstein, Irving. Turbulent Years: A History of the American Worker 1933-1941, New York, NY: Haymarket Books, 2010. Print.

Kosfeld, Michael and Ferdinand Siemens. “Competition, Cooperation, and Corporate Culture.” The RAND Journal of Economics 42.1 (2011): 23-43. Print.

The Internship. Dir. Shawn Levy. Perf. Vince Vaughn and Owen Wilson. Wild West Picture Show Productions, 2013. Film.

[supanova_question]

Planning and Monitoring Work Essay college application essay help

AC 1.1 Identify an organisational policy that can have an effect on the planning and allocation of work A model organisational policy for work planning and allocation should consist of five phases, namely assessment, value prioritisation, work allocation, implementation and measurement.

Such a policy is relevant to work planning as it entails first identifying the scope of work that needs to be performed through an assessment process, before prioritising each work based on risk management and how the type of work is aligned with the competitive advantage and mission of the company.

Consequently, the model affects the planning and allocation of work in organisational contexts as it provides the framework through which management can effectively and efficiently determine the personnel that should be used to convey the services based on their value priority.

In using such a policy, work must be allocated based on individual assessments done on employees, particularly in terms of their capacity to perform in specific areas.

It should be illuminated that value prioritisation is basically done to identify the employees’ competencies in certain critical areas of the organisation’s operations, and also to locate these employees in areas that will see the organisation remain profitable and competitive.

In this light, metrics are used in the model to assess if the employees are performing according to expectations.

AC 1.2 Give an example of a target or objective that a team is working to achieve

As an example, a sales team in an organisational setting may be targeting to raise the sales revenues of petroleum products by 30 percent by the end of 2014 to sustain the company’s competitiveness and ensure that it is aligned with its mission statement of becoming a global leader in the sale of petroleum products.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this light, clear metrics should be developed to measure the performance of the sales team on a month-by-month basis based on the value-based work allocation paradigm.

Consequently, the measurement will be able to demonstrate the contribution of team members towards the achievement of the targeted 30 percent increment in sales revenues by the end of 2014.

The SMART (specific, measurable, attainable, relevant and time-bound) criteria can be used to set the objectives for the sales team to raise the sales revenue of the targeted products and, in the process, sustain organisational competitiveness. The team is specific that it wants to be aggressive in marketing petroleum products.

The targeted increment (30 percent) is measurable by any standards, not mentioning that it is an achievable endeavour if the sales team prioritises its activities and work corroboratively based on value prioritisation.

Moving on, it is clear that the undertaking to raise the sales of petroleum products by 30 percent is relevant for the company’s competitiveness as well as direction. Finally, according to the SMART criteria, the undertaking is time-bound as the team expects to achieve a 30 percent sales increase in petroleum products by the end of 2014.

AC 2.1 List the key stages when planning and allocating work In teamwork contexts, the key stages include (1) confirming the type and scope of work required, with the view to understanding the requirements and requesting for clarification on any unclear issues,

(2) undertaking comprehensive plans on how the team will undertake its work, identifying and dealing with priorities or critical activities, and making sure that available resources are planned for,

We will write a custom Essay on Planning and Monitoring Work specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More (3) allocating work to team members based on a multiplicity of value prioritisations, including skills, prior experience, and prospect for personal and professional development,

(4) briefing team members on the nature and scope of work assigned to them, level of expected performance, as well as facilitating members to seek clarification on unclear issues and contribute in making suggestions,

(5) checking the progress and quality of work generated by team members against the expected performance and other metrics designed by relevant parties not only to assist in ensuring that the right direction is being followed, but also in providing prompt and constructive feedback,

(6) motivating members and availing the right kind of support and resources to assist in successful completion,

(7) monitoring the team for conflict, delineating the root causes of conflict when it occurs so as to deal with it effectively, identifying unacceptable performance, and agreeing on ways to improve performance,

(8) recognising successful completion of important pieces of work or work activities by team members according to the initial plan and expected performance, and

(9) using the information collected on team members’ performance to undertake a formal appraisal of performance.

AC 2.2 Describe how work is allocated to meet team objectives

Work can be allocated to team members using a methodology known as Responsibility Charting, which involves identifying the team member who is best suited to dealing with a condition or issue in a particular area using four roles that individuals assume when taking a decision, namely information provider, consultant, decision-maker and knowledge recipient or beneficiary.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Planning and Monitoring Work by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More To meet the team objectives, therefore, one team member may be allocated the task of identifying and providing relevant information about a particular issue or problem, while another is allocated the role of consulting on the right options based on his or her competency and prior experience.

Moving on, the team head may assume the position of the decision-maker and choose the most effective option provided by the consultant for onward communication and discussion with senior management and other team members, thus making the latter to become the recipients of the knowledge.

The Responsibility Charting process assists members to meet the set team objectives not only by encouraging them to adopt the roles they feel most comfortable with due to the ongoing consultation, hence ensuring that individuals are encouraged to assume responsibility for their roles, but also by ensuring that conflicts are successfully settled in a corroborative approach.

AC 2.3 Describe how to check that team members understand their allocated work

Team leaders not only need to allocate work to team members, but also ensure that that they have the appropriate processes and strategies to ensure that members understand their allocated work.

One way for team leaders to do this is by ensuring that members in the team (1) identify with their roles and expectations, (2) recognize the role of their teammates, with the view to ensuring that they focus on their own responsibilities and that their actions do not encroach on their teammates work-related functions, (3) comprehend how the roles interconnect in the realization of the team’s set objectives, and (4) exhibit adequate authority to harmonize activities with teammates.

AC3.1 Outline a method to monitor the team’s performance against the plan In the context of a team in a production domain, key performance indicators (KPIs) can be employed to assess the team’s performance and success in relation to the set goals and objectives. Although these performance measurements vary from one team to the other, a list of seven common productions KPIs include

(1) count – typically refers to production sum for the entire shift or week by comparing individual worker and shift output to invoke a competitive spirit among employees,

(2) reject ratio – minimising scrap generated in production processes assists teams to meet their profitability objectives,

(3) rate – slow rates characteristically results in incapacity to meet initial plan while faster speeds may affect quality control, hence the need for operating speeds to remain consistent,

(4) target – KPIs assist to motivate team members to meet specific performance targets as indicated in the displayed target values or initial plan for output, rate and quality,

(5) takt time – entails monitoring the cycle time taken for the completion of a task to determine constraints hindering the realization of initial plan,

(6) overall personnel and equipment utilization, and

(7) downtime – reducing downtime is an easy way to increase profitability and ensure the achievement of initial performance levels according to plan.

AC 3.2 Describe an action the team leader could take to rectify underachievement against the plan

Owing to the fact that in most cases underachievement against the plan is brought about by a lack of motivation on the part of team players, the team leader should engage in motivating members. This should be done by first researching the issues surrounding the underachievement, before inviting members for a discussion on the same.

During the contact meeting, it should be the function of the leader to set clear expectations and underline the goals and objectives for performance as provided for in the initial plan.

The leader should also focus on knowing if there are any perceived challenges contributing to the underachievement so as to address them, establish an action plan and checkpoints for reviewing the action plan, provide any incentives for improvement as necessary, and also discuss with members the ramifications for continued underachievement.

Afterwards, the team leader should routinely evaluate the checkpoints to note progress and assess performance against the plan.

[supanova_question]

I am currently awaiting for my Professor to approve my topic from TASK 1 that was submitted. I do not best college essay help: best college essay help

I am currently awaiting for my Professor to approve my topic from TASK 1 that was submitted. I do not have a due date. Once i give you the ok the bidder and I can choose how much time is needed to complete work. NO PLAGIRISM. ALL WORK MUST GET SUBMITTED TO MY SCHOOLS PLAGIRISM CHECK AND WILL GET CHECKED PRIOR TO PAYMENT RELEASE TY HAPPY BIDDING

[supanova_question]

Group Communication in Modern Society Report essay help site:edu

Communication in a group or in mass of people depends on the means of communication or in short model of communication used. Group is smaller than mass of people and communicating will be easier than in mass. Hence there will be a great need of networking to relay the information faster and more effectively. Mostly interpersonal communication is most reliable for quality communication.

Interpersonal communication is generally between two people achieved by creating a relationship that could either be long-term or short-term. At times it’s also referred to as dyad communication. This type of communication can be explained using schramm’s model of communication whereby communication is a two way process. There is an encoder through an interpreter to a decoder who relay message to a decoder through an interpreter’s help to an encoder. Both the sender and the receiver play the role of communicator and receiver.

Encoding is the process by which the sender puts an idea that is relevant and understandable, which is sent through a medium for instance a telephone. Interpreting involves understanding the message being conveyed and also being able to reply the relevant answer to the communicator.

For easier interpretation the sender must use a code that is standard and recognized by everyone, most especially, the receiver of the message. Decoding is the process of receiving, interpreting and understanding the message, in this case both the sender and receiver.

Group communication, on the other hand, involves a few people who share information, solve problems and create relationships. It involves group norms, non-formal groups and informal groups. This type of communication could also be said to be a two-way communication process using schramm’s model of communication.

Group norms are believes or cultural practices by a particular group who associate themselves with the facts that enable them to communicate and solve problems together. The other form of group is termed as a formal group. This kind of group maybe described as people who work together hence have a common problem they share and are able to associate with.

Lastly, there is an informal group of people who meet for the first time and may have a common problem or course that brings them together, thus they look forward to forming a relationship. This kind of group may grow to form grouping over a period of time.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The most important thing to consider when forming a group is to identify a problem. The group then moves to the next step to formulate means of solving the problem through consultation and finally making a common decision. The group must have a leader who will direct the discussion and avoid time wasting.

When choosing a leader in a group, there are certain factors to consider. This is either an authoritarian person or a democratic person. An authoritarian does not consult whatsoever. He believes he/she always right and no one can be smarter than him/her. On the other hand, a democrat participates in the group discussion and encourages everyone to contribute. He offers guidance to the group, throughout its sitting. Therefore, a good leader should be a democratic one. (Tuckman 44)

A good leader will take control from the storming, norming, and performing stages. These maybe termed as group dynamics including forming stage as well. The most effective stage of the group is the performing stage. It is at this stage that the group reaches maturity to perform its task.

Most importantly, consensus must be built which enables eradicate waste of time through arguing and settling for a weak idea to avoid conflict, among other reasons. However, differing in opinions in a group is very crucial as much as initial agreements are detrimental to the quality of the decisions made. Therefore, there should be an instance of voting, bargaining and more so revisiting the initial agreements.

There are two major problems to look out for in a group. These are group-minds and group-think. Group-think pressurizes the member to conformity, which in my own opinion is wrong. Other setbacks in group setup are absenteeism, lateness, non-contributing members, pessimism, domineering members who do not give others a chance to contribute, unwise individuals whose contribution is out of topic or weak academically, interrupting individuals who keep chatting when someone is talking, or members who are simply not interested.

Otherwise, these setbacks should not be allowed to drag the group’s work behind. Therefore, when forming a group, look for members who are academically equipped and individuals who are professional in developing consensus in the topic of discussion. Other than choosing the academicians and professionals, the individual member can make a decision to fit in the group.

This will help the group to achieve its success effectively. In additional, the issue of feeling guilt when a member goes against certain behavior or ideas of other people forcefully should be handled with a lot of caution. This is because I believe that feeling of guilt does not qualify a member’s point as wrong or irrelevant. However that does not mean that the member should agree to every idea put across. They should have a mind of their own and object when needed in wisely

We will write a custom Report on Group Communication in Modern Society specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More There are different ways in which a group can conduct. One is going out into the field gather information and coming back to the table and discuss every members finding.

The other avenue is watching a video, a presentation, journal which relates to the issue at hand. This should be followed by discussion and coming up with conclusions. Lastly, the group members can just come up with a topic and discuss it from their individual point of view as per their understanding. (McLuhan 23)

Group communication has been eased by the modern technologies like phones, video cameras, recorders and computers. The establishment of television and radios has also greatly contributed to effective group communication.

For example, when different members of a group are located at different locations, the members can choose a suitable means of media to involve each member at the current location without travelling. In my own experience, I have seen my group members discuss the conduct of a member through Skype video and each member contributed their views effectively.

Group communication has also been credited for good and bad political situation a given society. I therefore believe a well organized group communication using media is the most effective and the most reliable mode of communication. The speed of information transfer to the target group is supper good.

Works Cited McLuhan Marshall. Understanding Media. Global Village Thesis, 1964

Tuckman Bruce. Group Communication, 1965.

[supanova_question]

International Accounting Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are the set principles on how different types of financial transaction should be reflected in financial terms. The set IFRS standard ensures that business and other financial activities are carried out in the fairest way in the global business. It is a basis of financial reporting for the publicly held companies. Its adoption means that there is a fundamental change in the world of accounting.

The IFRS is adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board. This essay assesses and analyzes the value of international Financial Reporting Standards in enhancing international comparability of financial performance and risk of multinational companies.

This paper is organized in different parts that are as follows; the introduction, framework and background, conceptual framework, value and limitations of the international financial reporting standards, financial reports of the given companies, and qualitative characteristics of the conceptual framework and finally the relationship of financial reporting quality with the limitation of international financial reporting standards (Andrews, 2005).

The international financial reporting standards originated from the International Accounting Standards (IAS), which was issued between 1973 and 2001 by International Accounting Standards committee (IASC).

In April 2001, international accounting standards body was replaced by International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) which was charged with the responsibility setting international standards for accounting. During the first meeting, of the board they adopted international accounting standards and Standing Interpretations Committee standards (SIC’s). The board has continued to develop other international accounting standards calling them the IFRS (Nobes

[supanova_question]

Attitude Analysis and the book “The Fantabulous Fens” Essay essay help free: essay help free

Attitude analysis in a piece of writing helps in defining the intention of an author towards specific characters and themes in the text. The book “The Fantabulous Fens” will be used in this paper to analyze the way attitude is presented by the author. Authors always use diction to portray a given attitude towards someone or something.

The following quote was taken from this book. The decision of choosing specific words or phrases over the others is always meant to create some form of emphasis on what is being described. The quote below was taken from the book mentioned above.

“Daku and Bhoku were experts at doing nothing, and they were doing nothing at the time. They were neither sleeping nor eating nor working nor playing nor watching television: they were simply doing nothing, like they often did.” (Sen 34).

It is important to understand how attitude is created from the above statement. The above quote reflects some form of contempt, especially given the manner in which the author emphasizes on the word nothing. The author creates this attitude by using the word nothing to describe their behavior.

The two are portrayed as lazy individuals who are not able to do anything constructive. They prefer idle sitting, neither playing nor engaging in any active work. This contempt that the author has towards the two individuals is demonstrated in the manner at which their character is defined.

The author gives the perception that Daku and Bhoku would almost sit lifelessly in their house waiting for an opportunity to cause mayhem to active members of the society. This attitude serves to give an overall impression of what the author seeks to achieve in the entire text.

It would be necessary to understand why the author is using this particular attitude. The author is trying to discourage laziness in the society, and the two are used to demonstrate the effect of idleness among active members of the society.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Daku and Bhoku have been used to achieve the goal of the author through their unfortunate eventualities because of being lazy, cunning, and criminal minded. The quote below is a further demonstration of the attitude of the author towards people who shun hard work.

“The ‘little bloke’ had spiky hair. He was the first street urchin in the world to have spiky hair… You good-for-nothing… You son of a bum…” (Sen 34).

In this quote, the author uses some form of irony to depict the attitude he has towards laziness in the society. The irony is presented in the fact that Daku, an individual who has been described as being very lazy, rebukes the street urchin for his laziness and the fact that he contributes nothing to the society.

Even this lazy man appreciates that laziness is a vice that is unacceptable in the society. The way the author uses diction in this sentence helps in demonstrating his feelings towards the street children. The author uses the words little and bloke to describe the street boy.

It would be important to understand how attitude of the author is presented in this second quote. Although the word bloke has a general meaning of a guy, it has a negative connotation and it is mostly used when one is referring to something one has negative attitude towards.

The author finds no difference between the street children and the two lazy individuals named Daku and Bhoku. These two groups represent a lazy crop of people who are living by begging or stealing from other hard working members of the society. Instead of using the term ‘street boy’ or ‘street child’, the author uses the word ‘street urchin’ to describe these street children.

This is a sign of hatred that the author has towards this group of people. The word urchin gives the connotation that this is a group of individuals who causes some form of anarchy within the society. Daku is quick to point out that the street urchin is good for nothing, not realizing that their value to the society is the same.

We will write a custom Essay on Attitude Analysis and the book “The Fantabulous Fens” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Daku further refers to the urchin as son of a bum. This is to emphasize on the fact that this street urchin, and his entire family, is of little or no value to the society. Even in the eyes of a lazy man, laziness if a vice that cannot be tolerated if the society is to achieve the desired development..

It would be necessary to analyze why the author decides to portray this attitude toward the lazy individuals. A bum is a person who lives on begging, and is generally considered a burden to other members of the society.

Referring to the boy as a son of a bum is an indication that both the street urchin and his parents have been leading a parasitic life in the society for a long time. They have been of no value to the society as they wait to attack others and rob them of their hard-earned properties.

This hatred is used to discourage this nature of parasitic lifestyle in the society. The author is trying to demonstrate that it is wrong to lazy about, only depending on unscrupulous activities to earn a living.

This is demonstrated throughout the text where this lazy group of people is poised as villains to other morally upright members of the society. Through this, the author seeks to encourage every member of the society to shun laziness.

Works Cited Sen, Gautam. The Fantabulous Fens. Sydney: ireadiwrite Publishing, 2010. Print.

[supanova_question]

A Critique of Tourism Policy and Planning in Vietnam Report custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Overview of Tourism in Vietnam

Historical overview of tourism planning and policy in Vietnam

Critiquing the policy objectives of tourism in Vietnam

Challenges in tourism policy and planning in Vietnam

Reference List

Introduction Tourism is one of the critical sectors in the global economy, thus there is a need to develop comprehensive policies and plans to enhance sustainable tourism. From the economic perspective, it can be noted that tourism is one of the sectors that earn foreign exchange for most national economies.

What has been observed in the survey of global tourism is that a substantial number of countries in the world are working on modalities of developing efficient plans to come up with structures that can promote tourism and economic growth.

Vietnam is one of the countries in the world that have continuously worked on the means of developing plans to enhance tourism (Chon

[supanova_question]

Tourism Policy and Planning In Luxembourg Report college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Luxembourg

Policy and Planning

Critique

Conclusion

References

Introduction The existence of a strong economy in any nation is associated with the policy environment that the administration has put in place. Tourism policy determines the performance of this industry.

Hall (2008) states that the study of policy within a specific area of economy enables researchers and planners to understand the policy decisions and their impacts, provide possible solutions, and help readers to understand the interests and values that were incorporated in the policy formulation.

The study of tourism policy is an impotent field because it allows researchers to understand the determinants of performance in tourism in a given area and the factors that influence this performance.

The tourism industry is under tight government control in most nations. Thus, the study of tourism policy is a simple means of studying the administrative structures in a given nation. The development of a working policy can be done at the national, local, and provincial levels.

According to Kerr (2003), these three levels should all be involved for an effective policy. An example of a nation with a tourism policy in place is Luxembourg. This report takes a brief look at the country and tourism and planning policies that exist in this nation. The report also provides a critique of tourism and planning policies in Luxembourg.

Luxembourg Luxembourg is a small nation in Europe that has a significant diversity in culture. It has undergone a series of changes in the past few decades. The country is landlocked, with its location being in the midst of three countries, namely Belgium, France, and Germany.

Therefore, Luxembourg does not have access to the sea. Hence, it has no beaches or coastal hotels for tourists. However, this does not mean that the nation does not have its fair share of local and international tourism. With a population of just over 500,000 people, the country is one of the least populated in Europe (Blanke

[supanova_question]

Ellen Goodman’s “In Praise of a Snail’s Pace” Essay online essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Analysis

Response

Works Cited

Introduction Ellen Goodman’s article ‘In praise of a Snail’s Pace’ appeared on the Washington Post on 13 August 2005. The author is a frequent contributor to the newspaper, which has earned her a reputation as a columnist.

In this article, Goodman (24) attempts to show how hyperactive technology in such areas as communication has captivated the modern people to leave behind the slowness that allows individuals to appreciate several aspects of life.

Using several examples backed by personal experience, Goodman describes how lack of attention has caused conflict in human lives. In addition, she uses her experience to show how technology has become a barrier. Goodman compares how life and society was some 50 or more years ago with the modern life.

She provides some examples to show how technology has created less meaningful impacts on human lives. To her, handwritten letters are effective in creating meaning in human lives when compared to modern methods of mailing.

Analysis In her opening paragraphs, the author uses the framing device as an anecdote setting, which helps her to outline and set the mood for the entire argument. Goodman believes that handwritten letters are authentic and sentimental compared to emails.

Communication than handwritten letter, the author attempts to show that the same technology tears people apart because individuals do not mean what they say when communicating through these technologies.

From her experience, Goodman says that lack of meaning and truthfulness in communication through technologies is common because people tend to do things fast without giving much thought to what they are doing. She argues that this is due to human inability to giver partial attention to a given task.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More She believes that an individual can either give full attention to a task or stop taking it because giving it partial attention does not make meaning. To prove her argument, Goodman uses the example of a five-year-old child with too much sugar in his body yet he is taking more than one task, thanks to technology.

In this case, the child crashes and falls into a deep sleep due to exhaustion, which displays the negative impact of technology. This example presents the idea that the ability to slow things down and focus on a given task at a time is a human virtue that should be emulated.

In addition, Goodman expresses her disappointment in her letter, which results from her observation that modern people are caught up with little devices and computers such that they forget their personalities and emotions.

She is disappointed because most people in the modern society have allowed technology to take control of their lives, while snail mail and its meanings are quickly fading away. Due to lack of authenticity in communication, the world is quickly falling apart.

Response It is evident that Goodman’s argument is correct because it is based on observations in the modern world. For instance, it is true that “letters are more sentimental than electronic mails”. For instance, if someone takes enough time to write a letter on paper, it is possible to give it full attention and enough time, which is likely to insert meaning and truthfulness in the content.

On the other hand, writing an email is a quick task, but someone does it half-heartedly (Casey 12). Therefore, I tend to agree with Goodman on this issue. Nevertheless, it is unfortunate that handwritten letters are fading, which means that people like Goodman need to appreciate change and technological revolution.

Works Cited Casey, Matthew. “Has technology ruined handwriting?” CNN 28 July 2013: 12. Print

We will write a custom Essay on Ellen Goodman’s “In Praise of a Snail’s Pace” specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Goodman, Ellen. “In praise of a snail’s pace”. The Washington Post 13 August 2005: 24. Print.

[supanova_question]

Financial Business Plan Case Study online essay help

Introduction In this case example we are presented with Dave Valdon, a local of Maple Ridge within British Columbia, who is planning to set up his own painting business to service the local neighborhood of Maple Ridge, Pitt Meadows, Port Coquitlam and Coquitlam.

Dave has a considerable amount of experience in the home painting industry due to his previous job as a part time painter during his summers while attending college at the same time.

However, Dave has to contend with 100 local painting companies that also service the areas he is attempting to penetrate and at the present, he is uncertain regarding the competitor ratio per area, and the actual amount of homes that are going to request his services.

As such, this case study report will attempt to analyze perceived issues with the business that Dave is attempting to set up. This will encompass issues related to market saturation, estimated yearly income, and the possible amount of consumers per area.

It will also include an analysis of target markets and finally the development of recommendations in order for Dave to meet and exceed his target goals.

Through this paper a better understanding of the issues of the case will be developed resulting in a proper evaluation of the problems and issues related to the establishment and development of Dave’s painting business.

Analysis – Identify Issues and Discuss Current Saturation of Competitors within the Service Area

One main issue that has been identified by this report is the current level of saturation of rival painting companies within the same area that Dave wants to operate in.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Based on the case estimate of 1/3rd of local residents initiating painting projects within a given year, this results in the following case estimate regarding the number of customers per area within a given year:

Maple Ridge: 6621

Pitt Meadows: 1165

Port Coquitlam: 9044

Coquitlam: 5276

The total number of customers within a given year is thus estimated at 22,106. Taking into consideration the number of estimated painting companies within the area (100) as well as Dave’s own company (1) this results in an allocation of 218 homes per company within the neighborhoods that have been stated with the case.

Since Dave estimates the average cost of a painting job is $1,700 per home, this results in an allocated amount of $370,600 per company within a given year.

We will write a custom Case Study on Financial Business Plan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Other Issues

While such an amount is considerably above Dave’s 1 year cost estimate for his business, the following factors need to be taken into account as well:

Consumer patronage of existing painting companies within the area

– As seen in the study of Blankertz (1951), consumer patronage of existing brands and services needs to be taken into consideration when attempting to penetrate new markets (Blankertz, 1951). Pandit

[supanova_question]

Diet food centre Report college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Executive summary This report is about establishment of a diet food centre within the institution of higher learning. Several complications and shortcomings are associated with provision of foodstuff within various market segments. Most institutions have raised the alarm on such unhealthy kinds of foodstuff being supplied within their territories.

The same concern has been raised by a majority of consumers who happen to be students studying within these localities. This research begins with introduction which addresses the issues by providing an elaborate plan through which such instances can be avoided.

The research was done based on students’ conditions at the University of California where much attention was paid to unhealthy food stuff sold that contributed to overweight and obesity. Further, there is a methodology process based on the decision making which is one of the most important tools used in determining necessities within any Institution.

The findings of the research are then underlined before making analysis and conclusion. The article agrees with the literature researched and analyzed by asserting that health of an institution comprises of individual food products and product lines, as well as channels through which they are supplied.

At the same time, it points to the importance of institution’s prior determination of its food suppliers based on the price and health issues. According to the article, the resources should be utilized with the highest level of efficiency in order to satisfy buyer needs, as well as cater for the current demand in the market and, at the same time, provide appropriate satisfaction. All these explanations emphasize the importance of having well managed product mix.

Introduction The University of California is one of the most recognized institutions of higher education in the world. Within the university campus, there are various sources through which students get access to their food. First of all, it is the university’s small cafeteria that provides a limited choices of sandwiches, croissants, cakes, hot and cold beverages most of which appear to be unhealthy for student fraternity and University staff.

Another source of food is slightly larger cafeteria which is considered to provide a wide choice of meals in most cases full of carbohydrates and fats such as French fries, fried chicken, greasy barbequed meat, and burgers that are also very unhealthy.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Then there are several vending machines scattered all over the university campus providing students with variety of chocolate bars, potato chips, nuts, and juices considered to be extremely unhealthy, especially when consumed on a daily basis. Such sources of food limit students and, at the same time, force them to consume unhealthy foodstuff based on availability (Dalton, 2004).

Objective This justification report provides evidence on the justification of the idea of starting a diet food center at the University of California. This is done through showcasing the feasibility of the project and the benefits that the project, if implemented, would have to students’ health, and in financial terms including.

Benefits Implementation of such a project provides numerous benefits to students. For example, those students who spend a lot of time studying in the library or participating in other activities would not have to travel long distances outside the university to find nutritious healthy food.

This time can be spent on the e academic activities during the semesters. Additionally, provision of several kinds of healthy delicious food encourages students to change their life styles hence providing them with the opportunity to enjoy healthy food.

At the same time, such a project would be beneficial to students already struggling with overweight and obesity cases since it gives them chance to continue with their dietary plans (Society for Nutrition Education, 2002).

Qualification of Personnel Upon the project acceptance, the owner will be a senior finance student from the college of business studies. The project owner should be more than qualified to run the business since he must be a former student of the university where the project will be implemented.

The manager will be capable of keeping good financials of the shop, as well as identifying and satisfying any future needs of the students.

We will write a custom Report on Diet food centre specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The manager will be assisted by qualified individual who took many business courses from the university, such as entrepreneurship and strategic management hence capable of assessing market needs as well as gaps, recognizing opportunities and, at the same time, attracting customers through marketing strategies and quality assurance.

There will also be provision for good leadership skills from the operators of the business.

Scope This report is created with the purposes of shedding light on the benefits of establishing diet food center within the University, the need for such a project, literature supporting the idea, and provision of a complete plan to be used for the implementation of the business idea.

The report discusses various methods of the approach applied, preliminary financial projection requirements capable of sustaining the center, various facilities required, anticipated cost of the whole project, and at the same time, feasibility of the business idea and anticipated results. From the business point of view, the application of this project will generate significant financial success capable of satisfying students’ needs.

Review of the Literature Collins et al., (2000), performed a study for the purposes of testing the effects of students’ eating habits and physical activities on their general health. The findings of the study concluded that in the main, the types of food offered in school cafeteria have a direct impact on students’ dietary habits hence encouraging project initiatives geared to healthy food provision.

However, some Universities like Seattle University have different experiences with having diet food shops within the campus, and from student’s personal experiences; diet food shop within university campuses provides a successful business idea.

Consequently, food offered at diet shops is usually delicious and healthy, and most students would buy their lunches there.

The demand for the diet shops is usually very high hence it is usually not available already early in the day considering that such food is expensive in comparison to other venders within the university campus and yet students prefer consuming it because of good taste and health reasons.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Diet food centre by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Limitations and Contingencies In the first instance, the approval from the university’s administration is required based on vast experience. However, the owner of the project may have limited experience creating rare chances of obtaining full permission from university administration guaranteeing operation.

On the other hand, the university is currently has contract with other foods suppliers holding the right to be sole food providers of the university. This means that applying this idea would have to wait until the contract with other suppliers ends and a new contract is drafted.

Problem statement Various reports indicate that students from the University of California require such a project since the majority has busy schedules hence leading them to consume unhealthy foodstuff offered in the university. The issue has led to rampant increase of obesity cases amongst students.

This can be proved based on the fact that most students come to the university in healthy physiques which suddenly changes with time.

After a semester of consuming available foodstuff within the university campus, there is notable increase in the number of those gaining weight attributed to lack of healthy and tasty food choices offered within the university campus (Connecticut State Dept. of Education, 2006).

Method used This study utilized a number of sources which include journal articles revealing the effect of healthy food on cognitive abilities of students. Such revelation from journal articles confirms the need of establishing a diet shop within the University. At the same time, a survey attached in the appendix, proves this fact of the high acceptance of this idea amongst students.

Findings The survey results were recorded as shown below, however, students who participated in this survey have been to the university for at least two years.

71% of surveyed students reported that they have gained weight since they joined the University campus.

64% of surveyed students reported on the fact that one of the major reasons for gaining weight was partly attributed to the food offered within the university.

85% of surveyed students expressed their interest in purchasing their food from the diet food shop including even students who did not gain extra weight.

42.9% of those interested asserted on their desire to purchase food from the diet shop on a daily basis while 28% gave assurance of buying food from the diet shop at least three days a week.

85% of surveyed students responded positively on the question concerning whether they are ready to pay more for healthier meals that will be offered in the shop, responses were; 50% for one to three USD, 14.3% for four to six USD and 35.7% for seven to ten USD. Such conclusive result when combined with the previous research reveals the kind of desire for quality food from students hence the potential for financial success from the shop (Dalton, 2004).

Analysis Analysis of food costs and level of health standards provides required basis for planning and financial sources. This is necessary since it assists in allocation of required finances capable of sustaining such a project.

Then there is determination of various costs such as overhead, variable and fixed costs which are ultimately compared to industry’s benchmark. This helps in the adjustment of operational costs based on activity-based costing which is employed in the process of allocating costs to different food stuff.

As it has been discussed, the article provides for various processes used in the analysis of diet food shops. This is a responsibility of top management since they have capability of analyzing areas of opportunity within the entire market.

Such activities require detailed analysis based on business attractiveness, as well as nature of growth trend within food industry. Activity-based costing (ABC) system has been used in the process of overhauling costing procedures as well as further organization of operating processes. However, ABC system ignores some very important aspects such as resource based constraints.

The other concern involves the business ability to exploit opportunities based on organization’s potential and market positioning (Dalton, 2004). High opportunity levels and potential to exploit food and beverage market ensures introduction of new business ventures, as well as existence of future growth.

Strong market position, on the other hand, enables maintenance of high positions for profitability purposes. At the same time, weak positioning of the project should be avoided in the process of making decisions on food varieties to be provided. Such processes and concepts are necessary since they enable adequate evaluation on the potential for new project within learning institutions.

Conclusion There exist a variety of choices of product-mix majorly based on certain setup cost formulations. Such concepts as explained in the article demonstrate available potential for incorrect business decision based on Theory of Constraint.

The process involves identification of product mix as optimal choice and eventually incorporating activity-based costing within the decision making process hence assisting in setting up of variable total setup costs.

However, the article reveals that at times establishing diet food shop on activity-based costing may be incorrect based on the nature of assumptions made, especially on proportionality of overall activity costs.

The article enables clear understanding on the actual process undertaken within businesses in the process of decision making on products and pricing. It unveils the fact that proper mix of products may lead towards increase in sales through provision of products capable of meeting consumer needs and demands.

On the other hand, the example given in the article shows a possibility of such business competing favorably within the food and beverage market. At the same time, the act of optimal mix of products enables provision and advertisement of single product to bigger percentage of the market share.

At the same time, it brings the aspect that top management is endowed with responsibility of determining mix of product and pricing. However, activity-based costing majorly depends on assumptions made on proportional cost structures without involvement of resource constraints.

Owing to such limitations, activity-based costing is not considered a serious management decision tool. This can be improvised by integrating activity based costing with Theory of Constraints as well as method of mixed-integer programming. In the same context, ABC is considered to provide only short-term solutions hence not appropriate for strategic decision-making.

References Collins, J., Devereaux, R.S., Davis, M,

[supanova_question]

Cross-culture Communication Report best essay help

Introduction Various reasons explain why people from diverse countries have different modes of communication. In fact, the manners in which people communicate have greater influence on their daily activities.

Essentially, the mode of communication also determines the conduct, perceptions as well as activities undertaken in everyday life (Gudykunst

[supanova_question]

Organizations and Organizational Changes Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

Ways to make change happen Citation

Ditkoff, Mitch. Asking for permission to facilitate. Web.

Annotation

This picture discusses intrinsic business ethics as the backbone of acceptable change through proactive permission. The change agent must get the green light in a continuous network of different change implementation strategies.

Specifically, the picture identifies the organization hierarchal aspects of interaction processes in the change management environment.

Among the elements suggested for successful participatory change presentation include communication channels, inter and intra personal relationships represented by the arrows from the computer and arrows to other parties in the picture.

The propelling factor for the increasing interconnectivity and independence is indicated in the central bulb that appears to have brighter light than the background of the picture.

This means that the aspect of foresight is introduced as a very crucial element in participatory change introduction since it gives a company rough perspective and overview of the future concerning the expected and unexpected changes and challenges as perceived by the audience.

The numerous elements supporting change in the form of people, technology, and department are presented as entailing those patterns that revolutionize and changes over time since the success of communicating a change is related to the positioning of these elements.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In relation to personal foresight, change patterns to visualize future changes are presented as part of personal culture as indicated by the change agent appealing for acceptance.

From the interpretation of the above picture, it is apparent that when decisions are made on universal appropriate management culture, the outcome will be pleasing and convenient for operation in short and long term (Ditkoff, par. 8).

If these principles are internalized in the management and the workforce, they will appreciate the need to uphold the social interactions standards based on what is universally ‘right’.

Leading change Citation

Ditkoff, Mitch. Asking for permission to facilitate. Web.

Annotation

This picture depicts significance of choosing the right strategies or key to successfully open a change gate. Despite the fact that a proposed change may be good, its acceptability or rejection is dependent on the implementation strategy and chasing the right mix of change elements.

In precision, for these decisions to hold and be positively assimilated into the work environment, a series of tests are carried out by gathering facts and incorporating them in defined issues surrounding the change implementation strategy.

The author has designed a utilitarian view in understanding the significance of being thoughtful and strategic towards change implementation approach (Ditkoff, par. 1). Among the key issues that may be included as part of the right key are the need for being subjective, quantification of underlying problems, and utility distribution.

We will write a custom Essay on Organizations and Organizational Changes specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It necessary to factor in internal influences as personal feelings and thought that includes self-concept, motivation, attitudes, emotions and perceptions before deciding on the change key to use.

These factors generally influence perception, decision patterns, and attitude employees develop towards an organization. Besides, these factors are directly linked to internal and external interacting social aspects that control the pattern of though and expressed feelings.

Conclusion The above pictures suggest that the target group is easily swayed by what they perceive whenever confronted with the need for change. It is clear that a proposed change may only be successful when implemented through a participatory approach. However, choosing the right approach for implementing the proposed change will determine it acceptance or rejection.

Works Cited Ditkoff, Mitch. Asking for permission to facilitate. Web.

[supanova_question]

Comparison of well-being of countries Case Study essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Human development index (HDI) is used by organizations to estimate and rank economic status of countries based on certain criteria. The key components of life expectancy are income, education and life expectancy (Nagel 2). In this paper, the HDI for three countries, these are, India, Pakistan, and Bangladesh will be compared.

Based on the first criterion, that is, life expectancy at birth, Bangladesh had the highest value at 68.9 years while India and Pakistan had a tie at 65.4 years. The values indicate that Bangladesh has a better health care system than the other two countries.

Based on the second criterion, Pakistan had the highest mean years of schooling at 4.9 years, followed by Bangladesh at 4.8 years and India at 4.4 years. The values show that the citizens of Pakistan spend more years in school than the other two countries. The third criterion is the expected years of schooling.

Based on this measure, India reported the highest value at 10.3 years, followed by Bangladesh at 8.1 years and Pakistan with 6.9 years. Thus, when analyzing the first three components of the HDI, it can be observed that there is a small margin between the three countries.

The final component is the GNI (gross national income) per capita. India had the highest GNI per capita estimated at $3,468, followed by Pakistan at $2,550 while Bangladesh had $1,529. The ratio shows that the citizens of India have a higher standard of living than the other countries.

When all the four components are put together, India had the highest HDI at 0.547, followed by Pakistan at 0.504 while Bangladesh had 0.500 (The United Nations Development Programme 23). Thus, based on HDI India has a better well-being than the other countries.

Trend of HDI between 1980 and 2011 The graph presented below shows the trend of HDI of the three countries between 1980 and 2011.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In the graph, it can be observed that Pakistan had the highest HDI in 1980. Over time, the HDI of India grew and surpassed that of Pakistan.

Bangladesh had the least HDI in 1980. Over the years, the HDI of Bangladesh increased and it is closing in on the HDI for Pakistan. Thus, it can be noted that India and Bangladesh have reported a tremendous increase in HDI since 1980.

Other social indicators There are a number of other social indicators that can be used to compare the well-being of these countries. The first indicator is the percentage of population living with less than $1.25 a day. Pakistan had the least percentage of population at 22.6%, followed by India at 41.6% and Bangladesh at 49.6%.

Thus, the poverty level is low in Pakistan and high in Bangladesh. Secondly, the adult literacy rate is high in India at 62.8%, followed by Bangladesh at 55.9% and Pakistan at 55.5%. Thus, the level of education is high in India and low in Pakistan.

Thirdly, the under-five mortality rate is low in Bangladesh at 52 per 1000 live births, followed by India at 66 while Pakistan had 87. The values indicate that Bangladesh provides better health care for infants than the other countries.

Finally, the public expenditure on education and total expenditure on health measured as a percentage of GDP were high in India followed by Bangladesh and Pakistan.

In summary, the above indicators show that India would rank first based on the overall well-being followed by Pakistan and Bangladesh. This ranking is based on the knowledge that India has the highest HDI while Bangladesh has the least HDI.

We will write a custom Case Study on Comparison of well-being of countries specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Nagel, Robert. Human Development Index – An Elaborate Means of Evaluating a Country’s HD, Munich, Germany: GRIN Verlag, 2007. Print.

The United Nations Development Programme 2011, Human Development Report 2011. PDF file. 21 Jan. 2014. .

[supanova_question]

On-job training Essay college essay help

Research questions The aim of this study is to find out whether offering on-job training leads to increased productivity of casual workers within the University. Essentially, the study will explore the impact of offering on-job training on casual workers’ performances within the learning institution.

In other words, the intention of this study is to examine empirically the impacts of on-job training on the performance of casual employees within the University.

Though the literature point out the importance of the relationship between the on-job training and employees’ performances, empirical studies have not been conducted to ascertain the premise on casual workers.

The study is distinct and original since the study focuses on the casual employees. In addition, the effects of on-job training on the casual employees’ performances will be tested empirically to determine the validity of the variables.

Further, the study is undertaken to add more knowledge on the literature that have been written in this subject area. The study will be looking into two variables, the impact of on-job training as an independent variable and the casual employees performances measured in terms of job outcome as the dependent variable

The study will tend to answer the following questions Is on-job training among the university casual workers lead to increased productivity?

What are the effects of on-job training on the casual workers’ job outcomes?

University casual workers lag behind when it comes to the improvements of skills through on-job training. In fact, on-job training is considered among the best methods through which workers improve their skills, which translated into improved productivity.

Among the college employees, casual laborers are given little attention. In most instances, programs that enable improvement of their skills are limited. Currently, some of the departmental managers have realized the relevance of on-job training plans to casual employees, but they are yet to experience the benefits of adopting such strategies fully.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, most of the departmental managers are still looking at such programmes as a short-term strategy. Conversely, the university is yet to emphasise on the on-job training programme for casual workers as a major human resources management component that could lead to long-terms benefits.

Both the casual employees as well as the organisations do not understand the relevance of attaining the required skills through on-job training strategies. As such, only a fraction of them is tapping its full potential.

A need for increased performance on the casual workers necessitates more research into the area. Furthermore, there is need to motivate the casual employees towards their job performances.

Therefore, understand relationship between on-job training and the productivity of casual employees will be critical in enhancing the general performance of the organisation. In essence, the study will determine whether offering on-job training programmes leads to increased productivity among the casual workers.

Whether the premise is true or otherwise remains a matter of approval. Therefore, there is need for studies to examine the impact of offering on-job training on casual workers’ performances. The study will be undertaken according to the plan outline in the proposed time schedule.

Thinking ahead In order to attain the required outcome, careful planning in terms of resources needs to be undertaken. The plan forecasts various activities depending on allocated time (Trochim and Dodley 67).

Planning is critical in ensuring that activities are completed within the schedule. In addition, coming up with the plan is significant in identifying the required resources necessary for the completion of the study.

We will write a custom Essay on On-job training specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The study procedures are divided into various activities that are allocated certain duration in which they are supposed to be completed. The study is divided into four main parts including preparation, data collection and analysis as well as writing the research paper.

However, the consultations with the supervisor are integrated within the stages. In other words, appropriate consultation with the supervisor will be undertaken before the final activities are undertaken in every stage.

In preparation, sequential activities begin with the consultation of the supervisor to provide guidelines on selecting the research topic, designing the study, creating the study questionnaire as well as acquiring the study literature (Bhattacherjee 23). All preparation activities are apportioned approximately six weeks.

In data collection, the prelude to the data acquisition, distribution of questionnaires, conducting interviews, data collection and literature review should take eleven weeks distributed as shown in the table below. Data collection is followed by data analysis.

In fact, data analysis activities include the introduction to data analysis and conducting the actual data analysis. In the prelude of data analysis, the information is composed in various categories to ease the analysis process. During the analysis, the obtained data are simplified and interpreted to be understood easily by the stakeholders (Trochim and Dodley 67).

The writing of the research paper and the final presentation follows data analysis. In writing the final research paper, all the activities are put down according to the required format.

In addition, the final research paper specifies all the activities that have been undertaken. The final paper is then presented to the stakeholders. All the activities require resources as well as time as indicated in the table.

Proposed Time Schedule Activity Number (WKS) Set up date Ending date Status Selecting a research topic 1 Presenting the research topic to the supervisor 1 Writing the introduction 1 Designing the study questionnaire 2 Presenting questionnaire to the supervisor 1 Acquiring the study literature 3 Research literature review 5 Writing the research proposal 3 Designing the research 3 Presenting research proposal to the supervisor 1 Conducting interviews 2 Research data collection 2 The prelude of data analysis 1 Concluding data analysis 3 Writing the research paper 3 Final presentation and submission of the research paper 2 Total proposed research time in weeks 34 weeks Locating the literature Literature review is one of the critical areas that provide qualitative information on the study topic. Literature review is often conducted on articles that are related to the study topic. However, in this particular study the literature review will be conducted on articles related to the impact of employees’ training on the success of the organisation

Not sure if you can write a paper on On-job training by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Punia and Saharan studies indicated that training of employees is critical in enhancing workers’ understanding, capabilities, efficiency as well as effectiveness in the operations of the organisation 242.

The results of their study also indicated that training is an important aspect of employees’ personal development since it offers increased benefits in terms of proficiency and performance.

However, conventional paradigms utilised in evaluating the models only focused on the effects of general employees’ training without concentrating on the impact of on-job training on improved employees outcome (Punia and Saharan 245).

Generally, efficient on-job training of employees is significant in enhancing overall performance and success of an organisation. In principle, firms must appraise the consequences and proceeds from employee training.

Actually, employee training can allow an organisation to categorise sectors that require enhancement of personnel development. Essentially, the exploitation of performance evaluation systems that identify weaknesses and strengths of different employees is critical in organisational success. Punia and Saharan study was too general and broad.

Truitt’s study postulates that current business executive should undertake the design and appraisal of employee training and development to reduce the disputes affecting employee performance 447. In addition, Truitts findings indicated that there is a direct connection between on-job training and job proficiency 447.

Further, the need of high performance employees in organisations has initiated training for personnel. The study revealed that training of employees is invaluable in assessing the employees’ inputs as well as enabling the personnel to come up with objectives and goals that augment the success of an organisation.

Actually, the adoption of competency-based training techniques enhances employees’ proficiencies, capabilities as well as knowledge. The study indicated that the exploitation of apprenticeship, coaching, job shadowing and organisational learning techniques are capable of increasing the success of firms (Truitt 448).

In other words, well-made training systems enhance employees’ capabilities and skills needed to ensure the competitiveness of an organisation. However, Truitt’s study lacked credibility in terms of methodology applied.

Another study conducted by Hassan in the same area contends that organisations invest on training employees to achieved increased performance and success 540. In fact, according to Hassan, training is critical in enhancing employees’ job output 540.

Actually, the exploitation of change-driven training models is significant in increasing the performance of personnel thereby augmenting the general output of the firms (Hassan 541). Organisations should invest funds in employee development in training employees to augment general firm performance.

Additionally, with increased expertise and competition in businesses, training and development of employees is significant. Hassan’s study is comprehensive since the current data is used to draw conclusion.

In addition, the study encompasses most of the organisations and the sample was large enough to come up with reliable conclusion and recommendations. Moreover, the author used reliable and current secondary sources of data to draw conclusions. However, there was lack of consistency in the results due to the large set of data involved in the analysis.

Qualitative and quantitative research methods Advantages and disadvantages of using questionnaires

One of the advantages of using questionnaires is that the research tools are the easiest to administer compared to other methods of data collection including interviews and observations. In addition, questionnaires are less costly particularly where large quantities of data are required.

In the case where the respondent considers information required confidential, questionnaires prove to be the most appropriate particularly the self-administered or postal/email questionnaires. In other words, the respondents can easily provide information that cannot be revealed face-to-face.

In addition, under the circumstances where anonymity of the information is required, the respondents have to be assured of the confidentiality.

Besides, questionnaires can be used to remove the possible effects of bias that can easily be found in interviews where the presence of the interviewer influences the responses being provided.

The major disadvantage of questionnaires is that respondents can misunderstand ambiguous questions particularly in the absence of the interviewer. However, misinterpretations of ambiguous questions are unlikely particularly with questionnaires delivered face-to-face.

Under the situations of closed questionnaires, respondents are confined to the listed questions. The interviewers have no opportunity to probe the respondents for additional information particularly in an area considered by the researcher as of greater interest.

In addition, in self-administered questionnaires, the researcher is not sure whether the targeted respondents have completed the questionnaires. In other words, there is increased possibility of outside influence on responses provided in self-administered questionnaires.

Besides, the answers provided do not normally reflect the feelings of the respondents. In most cases, the respondents provide answers depending on the current circumstances or the response that would please the researcher. Further, the response rate in self-administered questionnaires whether postal or email can be extremely low.

Advantages and disadvantages of interviews

One of the major advantage interviews have is its adaptability and flexibility in gaining information. The flexibility is particularly attained in unstructured interviews where the interviewer is not restricted by stern schedules or list of questions.

In the case of semi-structured interviews, there is increased degree of flexibility and maintenance of the structure, which forms a critical basis for comparison at the analysis stage. Semi-structured or unstructured interviews also allow the interviewer to probe for further information particularly in areas the researcher find interesting for the study.

In such situations, the interviewer is not entirely restricted to specific answers from the respondents as observed in questionnaires. In other words, the interviewer can use observations to deduce whether further information is needed depending on the reaction of the respondents.

Besides, the interviewer has the capability of clarifying some of the complexities that may arise on the spot. The ability to make clarifications reduces the probability of getting inaccurate responses due to misunderstanding or misinterpretation of the questions. Moreover, the researcher knows the respondents and the chances of influencing the information are reduced.

However, in the case of structured interviews, there is lack of flexibility due to limited choices concerning the manner in which the questions are formatted. In addition, due to the formal nature of the interviews, the chance of developing a rapport with the interviewee is reduced.

In other words, the researchers have less chance of probing for further information. Besides, in the semi-structured and structured interviews, the information gained is normally difficult to categorise and code. In other words, the information from interviews is not susceptible to coding and comparability.

The approach

In this study, mixed approaches will be used. In other words, both qualitative and quantitative research methods will be applied. However, more emphasis will be given to quantitative approach. The reason is that quantitative research approach provides more reliable and valid results compared to the qualitative method (Richey and Klein 247).

The pursuit of this study is to obtain more reliable and valid results. Results can be said to be reliable and valid only in the circumstances that objectivity is observed. Quantitative approach is the most objective method through which reliable and valid results can be obtained (Richey and Klein 247).

In other words, quantitative approach attains the required objective results through the application of scientific inquiry. The scientific inquiry mentioned means that the quantitative research method focuses on the use of measurements, classification, coding and production of information, which can be tested through scientific means.

In other words, the data is analysed, interpreted and presented statistically. Moreover, the methods of collecting data are normally formalised.

Besides, the approach is the most reliable method through which scientific enquiry can be conducted. Most of the researches that have been conducted to add knowledge on an issue have always been construed to be scientific in nature.

In other words, there is less room for criticism as the results have been proven through scientific means. In this case, the aim is to ensure that the results can be achieved in the circumstances that similar studies are conducted given similar conditions.

However, qualitative analysis is also taken into consideration. The main method of attaining qualitative data is through interviews. In fact, the qualitative approach is used to add more knowledge or to give background information on the concerned area of the study.

Given the fact that qualitative approach is normally associated with subjectivity does not necessarily mean that qualitative data provided is not reliable and valid. Essentially, qualitative approach lacked a method through which reliability and validity can be measured.

In fact, the background information received through interviews is tested and analysed through quantitative means. Mixed approach is critical particularly in studies that tend to add knowledge in academic spheres. In other words, existing knowledge should constantly be tested through scientific means in order to ensure its reliability and validity.

Essentially, for this research to meet its obligations, it is designed to be both qualitative and quantitative study. The reason for the choice of the mixed approach is due to increased possibility of using innovating and novel ideas required in understanding variables involved in the study.

Moreover, through mixed approach, the research will come up with new and clear concepts explaining the dynamics and processes involved in the relationships existing between the variables.

Further, the research also explores how such relationships affect the outcomes. Moreover, the mixed research approach will set up main concerns, build on operational explanations and improve on the final study design.

Samples

Sampling procedure is the process of identifying the respondents that will actually participate in the study. Essentially, samples used in the study should be representative of the population to be studied. Besides, the sample size and nature should be considered in relation to the resources available and the research method applied in the study.

Moreover, the sample size should be reflective of the population and realistic to the study (Richey and Klein 247). However, in this study, where survey questionnaires and interviews will be applied to collect data, large sample size will not be effective considering time and costs. Therefore small sample size, which is representative of the population, will be the most appropriate.

In the study where the impact of on-job training on University casual employees’ performances is considered, all casual employees within the University are deemed viable when carrying out the research.

As indicated, the selected sample should represent the whole population of casual workers within the university. However, the population target, which constitutes the sample, will be selected depending on the level of on-job training and performance.

From the total number of casual employees present in the university, just ten casual workers will be selected via a technique dubbed as simple random sampling strategy.

The proposed sample size will comprise of five women and five men. The choice of the sample is suitable for the purpose of the study. In addition, since the study will majorly be based on survey and interviews, small sample size will be the most effective.

All the chosen sample of employees will undertake the in-depth interviews while the survey questionnaire will be distributed.

Regardless of the fact that the chosen sample size of eighty employees materialise to be exceptionally small given the type of research study to be carried out, the constraints such as the available financial resources and the planned timeframe makes it completely necessary to confine the study selected sample to the precisely specified size (Spector 225).

Random sampling procedure is applied to minimise the bias in the sample selection process. Besides, simple random sampling process is the most effective given the type of study to be undertaken since the procedure ensures a sample that is representative of the population.

In terms of accessibility, permission of various respondents will be sought before the proposed study is conducted. Moreover, consent of relevant authorities will be sought before administering the questionnaire to the respondents.

Ethical consideration

Like any research study, ethical issues are likely to emerge. Thus, ethical consideration is critical. The ethical issues that are likely to arise include the informed consent of the participants, the power differences between the researcher and the participants, the confidentiality of the information as well as the consent of the authorities (Penslar 345).

In other words, all researches raise ethical issues ranging from the informed consent of the participants to confidentiality of the information being provided. Madge argues that ethics in any research is critical in instilling discipline on how the respondents are treated 654.

Essentially, ethical consideration in any social research considers how respondents as well as other stakeholders are treated while the study is being undertaken. Looking into ways through which these ethical issues can be dealt with is critical for the success of the study.

One of the issues is the informed consent of the study participants. In this case, informed consent will involve treating the respondents with due respect. In this study, the participants will be approached through the application of a common language in order to make the information clear. In addition, the respondents will be provided with full information concerning the nature of the study and the amount of time they are required to participate.

Besides, the participants will be informed on the methods used and the way the study will be of critical importance (Penslar 345).

Moreover, the participants will be informed of any potential risks, whether economical or psychological, associated with taking part in this study. The mentioned issues will be provided to the respondents before the consent of the participants is sought.

Further, all the requirements will be completed as a requisite by the research supervisor as well as the department. In addition, all the participants will be provided with information concerning their freedom of participation using the stated standards.

A letter of introduction specifying and explaining the aims of the study and the standard methods will also be provided. Moreover, information sheet guiding and describing the study will also be provided.

The participants will also be made aware that they can remove their participation without any consequence. Lastly, the participants will be provided with letter of consent.

Since this study will be conducted within the learning institution, the consent of the concerned authorities will be sought. In fact, before the commencement of the study, the institutional authorities will be provided with information regarding the research.

In other words, an approval will be sought from the responsible authority particularly the institution’s top management and safeguards will be put in place during and after the research study to help protect the respondents and any other human subjects.

Confidentiality is another issue that is likely to emerge. In this study, confidentiality will involve securing information provided by the respondents (Madge 655). For instance, during the storage of data the responses from the questionnaires will be properly stored to avoid any ensuing alteration.

In addition, the identities of the respondents will be secured particularly where the information provided is deemed sensitive and can jeopardize the status and position of the respondents. Besides, a letter will be offered to the respondents in order to provide an assurance of the confidentiality of their information.

Honesty will greatly be considered in this study particularly on the part of the participants. Before the study is undertaken, the permission and the ability of the participants will be sought.

In addition, to ensure that the participants uphold honesty while participating in the research, the institution’s management permission will be sought and the unwilling participants will be exempted from the study (Penslar 345).

In fact, the participants’ information will not be disclosed to guarantee confidentiality and to preserve their anonymity. The information acquired from the study participants will be securely stored and protected whereas study-finding reports will not divulge the participants’ identification.

Besides, power difference between the researcher and the respondents is another ethical issue that is likely to emerge. Power difference emerges under the circumstances where the roles of the respondents and the researcher are not clear.

However, in this study, the respondents will be informed of their roles as well as the responsibilities of the interviewer. The information is provided in order to reduce any issue that may arise due to the power differences between the researcher and the respondent.

In fact, both physical and emotional harm that may accrue will be given due consideration in this section by stating the basic ethical approach along with the power differentials between the researcher and the respondents as well as how the participants will be protected from any eminent abuses.

Informed consent will similarly be sought. Finally, the information acquired from the study participants will be securely stored and protected whereas study-finding reports will not divulge the participants’ identification.

Generally, given that this research is essential, a formal request authorisation will be sought from the institution’s management where the survey will be conducted. The researcher will take all the responsibilities encountered during the research process to ensure the integrity, dignity and well-being of the involved study subjects (Penslar 345).

To make certain the completion of the research tasks within the required period, the researcher shall recognise and effectively balance any subjectivity by providing precise research accounts and abiding by the law to develop the indispensable expertise.

Considerations and observance will thus be given to a variety of ethical issues as well as guidelines namely the participants informed consents, power and confidentiality.

Further, in this study, the respondents will be granted a holistic indulgent into the study through seeking for every research participant’s permission to ensure abidance by their respective informed consent. In addition, a request for the participants understanding to be involved in the research will also be made clear.

For instance, time factor, the significance of the topic researched on, activities to be undertaken, and any risk to be encountered will be revealed to the research respondents or participants.

The participants will be free in making independent decisions of whether to take part or not to be involved in the research and this implies that the researcher have indefinite voluntary participation in the study.

Further, the researcher will ensure that the participants are aware of the research details and nature and their respective rights to pull out from the study any moment.

Techniques

The study will apply both quantitative and qualitative techniques. Quantitative technique normally draws data from surveys while qualitative technique will draw data from in-depth interviews and observations made (Richey and Klein 247).

Essentially, surveys and interviews will form the major techniques of data collection. The reason for the choice of the mixed approach in this study is that limitations of each approach are compensated.

Qualitative data collection techniques

One major weakness of qualitative research that this study will greatly consider is the possible subjectivity on the results obtained (Bhattacherjee 212). In other words, based on the validity of the data to be collected, qualitative studies are associated with subjectivity (Bhattacherjee 212).

In this study, the qualitative data will primarily be obtained through in-depth interviews and observation made during the interviews. In other words, in order to present significant research findings, appropriate conclusions, and credible recommendations, the proposed investigative study will use interviews as a method of collecting qualitative data.

In fact, the intentions of the interview are to administer the interview questions to the study participants through the application of various procedures by choosing respondent initially incorporated in the study population.

Interview schedules that would be approved to help gather information will equally be used to establish the relationship existing between on-job training and the casual workers performance.

The interviews will focus on how on-job training has increased the performance of employees. In order to identify the level of performance, interviews will examine the differences in performance of employees before and after receiving the training, areas that the casual employees need to be trained on in order to increase their performances, the employees’ turnover after and before receiving the formal on-job training as well as the motives of acquiring the on-job training.

Even though some of the areas may be broad, interviews will narrow on areas that relate to performance and interrogate other related factors.

The advantage with the interviewing method of primary data collection is that various observations such as the interviewees’ reactions and feelings can be made at the same time. In addition, the interviewer can modify the question depending on the situation to get the required answer.

The direct response is critical in establishing the effects of on-job training on casual employees’ performance as one of the main human resources practices currently undertaken by the organisations to help attain the desired outcome.

However, interview process may hinder the provision of the information the respondents consider secret. Moreover, the respondents may twist information depending on what the interviewer require.

Quantitative data collection technique

Quantitative technique is the process where the empirical procedures are applied to study the proposed topic. In other words, empirical procedures are applied in the data collection, analysis and presentation of the results.

The major advantage of qualitative techniques is that the results are based on scientific procedures (Trochim and Dodley 23). Moreover, objectivity of the results is highly attained. In this study, the quantitative data will majorly be obtained through a survey.

In other words, the proposed study will primarily utilise the survey method of gathering information through the administration of a well-structured questionnaire. Moreover, the requisite research data will be gathered across the study population consisting majorly of the university casual employees.

The data from the survey is aimed at assisting in devising sound and rational study conclusions amid offering feasible recommendations for the research being conducted. The survey will focus on the general information concerning the proposed topic.

As indicated, the survey will constitute the administration ofsoundly designed research questionnaire to the study participants constituting. Each part of the questionnaire will constitute key items that suitably attend to the research questions.

For instance, part one will constitute whether the casual employees have received the on-job training and whether the skills acquired contributed to improved performances.

Other parts will generate insights amidst offering recommendations geared towards encouraging the institution to offer on-job training to the employees as well as how such endevour is critical in augmenting success of the organisation.

Moreover, some items in the survey questionnaire will interrogate other related variables that may influence the relationship between on-job training and the improved casual employees’ performances.

The advantage with the quantitative data collection techniques such as survey is that there are possibilities for improvements on the type of information to be collected. In other words, the survey questionnaire contains variety of questions targeting the required information.

In addition, more related information on the study area can be obtained. The major problem with the survey as a technique of obtaining quantitative data is that it is time consuming and costly. In other words, the survey method of data collection normally takes time requiring researchers to increase the costs.

Data analysis

In order to ensure logical completeness as well as response consistency, the researcher will edit the acquired data each day to be able to identify the ensuing data gaps or any mistakes that needs instant rectification. When data editing is completed, the collected research information will definitely be analysed qualitatively and quantitatively.

For example, any data that will been collected through in-depth interviews and observations on the respondents behavior will be analysed by means of content analysis along with the logical analysis techniques (Spector 222).

Furthermore, from the acquired independent variables values such the number of on-job training and the study dependent variable which is the casual employees’ performance measured in terms of total output or general productivity, regression analysis will be applied to establish the correlation that exist between employees training and organisation’s success.

To obtain the best correlation approximation values, the study quantitative data analysis will be carried out by utilizing the integrated Microsoft office statistical tools.

Further quantitative data analysis techniques including percentages, frequency distribution and deviations will be used to determine the research respondents’ proportions that chose various responses.

The method will be applied for each group of items available in the questionnaire that ideally corresponds to the formulated research question and objectives (Spector 222). Line graphs, tables as well as statistical bar charts will be used to make sure that quantitative data analysis is simply comprehensible.

Works Cited Bhattacherjee, Anol. Social Science Research: Principles, Methods, and Practices. USF Tampa Bay: Open Access Textbooks Collection, 2012. Print.

Hassan, Shahidul. “Does Fair Treatment in the Workplace Matter? An Assessment of Organizational Fairness and Employee Outcomes in Government.” The American Review of Public Administration, 43.5 (2013): 539-557. Print.

Madge, Clare.” Developing a geographers’ agenda for online research ethics.” Progress in Human Geography, 31.5 (2007): 654–674. Print.

Patton, Michael. Qualitative research and evaluation methods. Newbury Park, CA: Sage, 2002. Print.

Penslar, Robin. Research Ethics: Cases and Materials. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 2004. Print.

Punia, Broke and Teena Saharan. “Management Approach and Conditions of Training: A Relative Study of Service and Manufacturing Industries.” The Journal of Business Perspective, 15.3 (2011): 239-250. Print.

Richey, Rita and James Klein. Design and development research: methods, strategies, and issues. London: Routledge, 2008. Print.

Spector, Paul. “Method variance in organizational research.” Organizational Research Methods, 9.3 (2006), 221-232. Print.

Trochim, William and James Dodley. The Research Methods Knowledge Base. Cincinnati, OH: Atomic Dog Publishing, 2008. Print.

Truitt, Debra. “The Effect of Training and Development on Employee Attitude as it Relates to Training and Work Proficiency.” The Journal of Business Perspective, 1.3 (2011): 445-453. Print.

Appendix List of Journal articles to be used

Avey, James B., Tara S. Wernsing and Fred Luthans. “Can Positive Employees Help Positive Organizational Change? Impact of Psychological Capital and Emotions on Relevant Attitudes and Behaviors.” The Journal of Applied Behavioral Science, 44.1 (2008): 48-70.

Bennett, Joel B., Wayne E. K. Lehman and Jamie K. Forst. “Change, Transfer Climate, and Customer Orientation: A Contextual Model and Analysis of Change-Driven Training.” Group

[supanova_question]

Ensuring Customer Satisfaction Report essay help: essay help

Introduction To ensure success in a highly competitive world it is important that an organization puts emphasis on customer satisfaction. Findings indicate that it is much easier to retain an existing customer than attract a new one. That is why it is important for any business entity to understand the needs of its customers and ensure the production of quality brands.

Ensuring satisfaction usually compels a customer to come again to buy the products or get the service. It is also vital in ensuring referrals, whereby the customers are able to refer other people to the same business entity or brand. The quality of products or services is critical in influencing the attitudes of the customers towards a given brand. Customer satisfaction influences the consumers to have a positive attitude towards the brand while dissatisfaction leads to negative attitude (Antonides 1999: 88).

Customer satisfaction is vital in promoting a brand. Customer dissatisfaction on the other hand leads the consumers to present their complaints to the manufacturer or dealer of that particular product or even discourage other potential customers from using that product or service. To determine the quality of a product or service, it is quite important to determine the attitudes of the consumers towards that particular brand.

This could be done by issuing them with questionnaires or directly interviewing them. This is crucial in spotting the needs of customers and improving that particular brand. For any corporate entity to succeed in an extremely competitive world it must be customer oriented and it should put measures in place to retain the existing customers and attract new ones. After obtaining findings about the customer needs, it is important to act on them so as to ensure customer satisfaction.

It is quite important for an organization or business entity to determine the customer satisfaction levels at that particular time before putting any customer satisfaction measures. Improving quality is not enough to give an entity a competitive advantage over its competitors. It is therefore important that an organization puts less emphasis on internal structures and processes and focus on the market and customers (Baudrillard 1998: 432).

Customer satisfaction The issue of satisfaction is particularly important tin the hospitality industry. Customer satisfaction can be termed as a feeling of pleasure or fulfillment that comes with the obtaining and using a product or service.

Consumer Decision Making Process

According to Smith, before any purchase is made, the consumer usually goes through a number of stages. It is important for any marketer to understand the whole process while marketing any given brand. There is a stage in the buying process whereby the marketer might not be in a position to change the decision of the buyer.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While doing the routinely purchases however, it is quite common for the customer to skip or in some cases reverse some of these stages. Someone who is hungry is likely to skip the information seeking and evaluation stages. While purchasing certain commodities however, there is need for significant thought and deliberation. The buying process is very important in such a case (Blythe 1997: 231).

According to this model, before any purchase is made, the consumer recognizes a need like hunger, the need to purchase certain equipment or it might be in response to a given stimuli like a sweet aroma. The customer then goes a head to find the appropriate information. If the need is quite agent and there is a place to purchase the product/service, a decision is instantly made to acquire the same. If not then the quest to acquire the information continues.

Some of the information sources for the customer include;

Personal sources which include; members of one’s family, friends or neighbors.

Business sources like advertisements, sales people, packaging and displays, retailer as well as the retailers of that given product/service.

Public sources, these include the media/press and consumer organizations.

Experimental sources. They include the handling of the product, examining as well as using it.

During the evaluation stage, the customer is faced with the option of choosing among the different brands, products or other service providers (Brown 2002:33).

Information Use

The customer uses the obtained information in determining the best brand in solving the apparent problem. An extensive evaluation is to be carried out if the purchasing is very much involving. High involvement purchases are those which either involve higher risks or are expensive. These might for instance be; the purchasing of a car, house or making an investment. Low involvement purchases on the other hand usually involve less evaluation as it is in the case of purchasing refreshments or purchasing foodstuff for preparing dinner.

A marketer needs to provide the customer with the appropriate information in the various purchasing situations. In high involvement purchases for instance, the marketer needs to give the customer accurate information about the quality of the brand and its importance and advantages over the competitors. He/she might have to give free samples or offer trials to the customer so as to make a sale and establish customer loyalty. (Cave 2002:461).

Post-purchase Evaluation

This is the final stage in the purchasing process. After purchasing, the customer might have concerns about that particular brand. This is usually done through cognitive dissonance. In the event that a consumer feels that an alternative product or service provider would have been better, he/she might not go for it immediately but might go for it next time he/she is in need.

We will write a custom Report on Ensuring Customer Satisfaction specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The person is less likely purchase the product or service that did not satisfy him/her. During the purchasing, the customer needs to be assured that the product or service would satisfy his/her need. Even after purchasing, the consumer has to be reassured that he/she made the right decision.

Application in the Hospitality Industry

This model is applicable in the hospitality industry although it has its own shortfalls. The aspect of decision making has not been an easy one in this industry given that it has been undergoing much complexity in the recent past. There are various factors that influence decision making in the hospitality industry some of which are socioeconomic. The aspects of the organizations image, its utility maximization as well as people’s knowledge about the products and services are also influential in the whole process (Ford 2005:33).

Decision Making

The management of any hospitality company uses the knowledge of this model to make decisions concerning the branding and ensuring effective marketing strategies so as to retain the existing customers and attract new ones.

The problem recognition stage in the hospitality industry is characterized by customers need for comfort and places of relaxation, refreshment, accommodation, transportation and places where they can get good food and other entertainment services. It is upon the retailer to provide these services to the customers and inform them of the products and services offered by that particular business entity (Gottdiener 2000:67).

It is therefore important for the marketers to carry out some study on the customers needs so as to know the services they need and improve on the existing ones or eliminate those that are not relevant. It is important to understand the customers and the attributes that influence their decision making.

This is the only way that a hospitality firm can effectively deliver to its customers. With the aspects of post-modernism and globalization, today’s market has significantly changed. The customers are more sensitive to the prices and the focus is more on the psychological rather than physiological needs. A marketer needs to know the perception of the consumers concerning the alternative brands in the industry (Griffin 2002:55).

The hospitality industry usually aims at ensuring customer satisfaction which translates to profit making. Marketing is particularly very important in the hospitality industry. The industry also depends on the travel industry for its marketing and operational activities.

By understanding the decision making process, an organization is in a position to meet its organizational objectives by putting programs in place to ensure that the customers are satisfied which results in greater profitability. The hospitality industry must have the customer service culture. Much emphasis is put on customer service and satisfaction. The organizations culture is in such a way that the needs of the customers are given priority (Gronroos 2000:22)

Not sure if you can write a paper on Ensuring Customer Satisfaction by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More A business entity in the hospitality industry needs to be consistent in its service provision so as to avoid customer dissatisfaction. The entity should do follow up even after the customers purchase their products or services so as to determine their level of satisfaction at the post-purchase stage. This helps in finding out whether the customers were satisfied or whether the product or service needs to be improved. This is crucial in minimizing dissatisfaction and establishing customer loyalty (Heath 2005:33).

Challenges

Globalization has resulted in market complexity. The hospitality industry is therefore encountering greater competition from firms across the globe. The industry is faced with the challenge of ensuring that high ethical standards are upheld and the players in the industry observe corporate social responsibility.

The model has been found to be ineffective given that a lot of emphasis is put on the customers. The organizational structures and procedures of businesses are likely to be sidelined. In some cases, consumers might approve a brand as being of quality yet still go for the competitive brand. This is evidence that this model might not be absolutely effective in defining consumer behavior.

Kotler’s The Buyer Behavior Model Consumer Markets and Their Buying Behavior

A consumer’s buying behavior has to do with the individuals or households buying goods and services for their own consumption. A marketer has to be concerned about the customer’s reaction to the marketing efforts of the company. According to this model, the buyers are attracted to buy a certain commodity or a service due to a number of stimuli that they are exposed to. They could be the marketing stimuli like the cost of that product or service, the location of the product, the promotional activities.

The other stimuli that influence the consumers buying behavior are the economic factors, the person’s cultural orientation, political factors and the aspects of technological advancement. All this factors help the consumer to decide on whether to buy a product or a service.

The consumer is usually stimulated by these factors to go for a particular brand or product. It is therefore the responsibility of the marketer to determine what goes into the mind of the consumer as this would determine his/her response to that particular brand. The buyer’s characteristics have an influence on his/her perception of the stimuli while his/her response to those particular stimuli would determine the person’s buying behavior.

According to this model, the customer’s decision to purchase a product or service is influenced by the family, peers, social group and the society in general. In the buyer’s mind, which is referred to as the back box in this model, his/her decision to go for a particular brand would be influence by the person’s attitude, knowledge, his or her personality, the persons lifestyle, motivations or perceptions.

In the decision making process, the person goes through the stages of buying, that is, the realization that a need exists, the person then seeks the relevant knowledge, the customer then carries out the alternative evaluation where he/she might compare the brand with the other brands in terms of quality and the cost.

The person then makes the purchasing decision. After buying the product or service, there is the post purchase stage where by the person looks at the performance of whatever he/she had purchased so as to approve or disapprove of its quality.

The consumer then makes a decision to remain loyal to the brand or go for an alternative brand on the next buying. The marketing stimuli are mainly planned by the respective companies while the environmental factors are influenced by the prevailing economic, cultural and political circumstances.

Factors Influencing Consumer Behavior Marketing Stimuli

Marketing stimuli plays a very important role in determining the buying behavior of the consumer. A consumer will for instance go for a brand that has been well marketed, less costly, and easily accessible. The quality of the services, the value and the consumer’s future intentions has a correlation (Lashley 2000:222).

Image seems to play a very significant role in the choices that consumers make. The consumers are likely to go for a retailer with the best prices, good customer service and excellent delivery services. The attitude of a consumer towards a retailer is greatly influenced by the image of that particular retailer.

The attitudes of such consumers greatly influence their intentions. This is also influenced by the subjective norms of the consumer. A good experience with a retailer in terms of satisfactory service delivery is most likely to result in the consumer’s loyalty. (Reisinger 2003:22).

Cultural Stimuli

According to this model, a buyer’s decision to purchase a product or service is greatly influenced by the person’s culture, sub culture or social class. A person might refuse to go for a particular brand if his/her culture prohibits the brand. Subjective norms are very likely to influence the intentions of a consumer to purchase. These are the factors that dictate whether a person should purchase a particular product or not (Rosenblatt 1999:85)

Social Factors

Social factors play a very significant role in influencing the purchasing behavior of a shopper. Besides the need for variety and convenience a shopper is likely to be influenced by his/her relatives, peers, and the desire to be within a certain social class. Social sites like Facebook, MySpace and twitter are likely to influence a consumer to either purchase from a particular retailer or avoid that retailer.

Whenever shoppers develop a positive attitude towards a particular retailer, they are likely to influence each other positively and hence go for the products and services of that particular retailer. On the other hand, if they have a negative attitude towards the retailer, they are likely to influence each other against that particular retailer. This calls for the retailer to make effort in ensuring effective service delivery and building trust with the consumers.

Technological Stimuli

Most companies and businesses in the hospitality industry have embraced the most current technologies in their service delivery. Some of them have introduced the touchscreen tables that enable the customers to make orders without having to speak to the waiters.

This is important as fur as improving the quality of services is concerned although success solely relies on the consumers perceptions of such technologies. Younger consumers might for instance be motivated by such technologies and might develop loyalty to such brands. This might not necessarily be the case with the older generation. Satisfaction is very significant in enhancing brand loyalty among the first-time consumers as compared to the regular customers.

A consumer’s efficiency in handling the current technological devices also plays a very important role in influencing the consumer to purchase a certain product/service or not. A customer that is technologically advanced and has a good knowledge of computer technology is more likely to embrace e-shopping than one who is not.

While making a hotel reservation for instance, a person needs to know how the computer system works and how to use the credit card in making online payments. Most of the e-consumers have embraced the technology as it is easier and more efficient than the traditional mode of making business transactions. The method is perceived as being clear and easy to navigate, get the relevant information and make comparison. It is more interactive than the traditional mode of shopping (Schiffman 2004).

Consumer Traits

The shopping behavior is also greatly influenced by the consumer traits like a person’s age gender, education level, and income range. Men for instance tend to be quick buyers. Women on the other hand are known to be selective and keen observers when it comes to shopping.

Well educated people tend to thoroughly seek the relevant information about a particular retailer before purchasing. Less educated people on the other hand tend to depend on cues and do not look for much information before purchasing. It is coincidental that most of the wealthier people are educated as well.

They therefore tend to collect all the relevant information about a product and a retailer before buying the same (Swarbrooke 1999:65). Considering the age factor, younger people are more likely to seek more information concerning a particular retailer than the elderly. This is because the elderly are characterized by loyalty to a particular brand while the younger people want to try out new things.

Application in the Hospitality Industry

Most customers of the hospitality industry look for places of relaxation where they can escape from the usual pressures of life or work. They therefore go forth to look for destinations where they can socialize and escape from the usual hustles and tussles of life. These are the factors that players in the hospitality industry should consider in order to ensure customer satisfaction.

Hospitality companies and businesses therefore ought to put structures that are consumer oriented in place so as to ensure consumer satisfaction which in the long run leads to loyalty. Players in the industry ought to be market oriented. A customer’s experience with a product or brand often has a psychological effect on him/her. The person is emotionally and psychologically attached to that particular brand or product as opposed to those who have not had an experience with that particular brand.

The person is therefore well placed to influence the attitude of others towards that particular brand. Dissatisfaction towards a brand would mean that the customer had a negative experience with it and is likely to negatively influence potential consumers. The consumer would most likely develop resentment towards that brand.

Having a positive experience with the brand would result in satisfaction which would result in the consumers positively influencing their colleges to go for the brand. It also results in the customers going for the brand in subsequent instances.

Relationship marketing is quite important in building customer loyalty. Such loyalty can be boosted by a hospitality business ensuring personalized services, upgrading rooms and taking the customers’ problems seriously. Customers need to be provided with security and accurate information so as to build customer loyalty.

Offering quality services is the only way for the firms or hospitality businesses to remain relevant and competitive in a post modern world (Lury 1996:44). Findings have shown that image is so significant in the hospitality industry. Quality services would automatically lead a consumer to come back for the same services or recommend the brand to others.

Customer satisfaction is based on the attitudes of the customers towards a particular brand and that is why it is very important for any business entity to know the perceptions of the customers towards that particular brand. The success of any particular brand cannot solely be based on the frequency of purchase of that particular brand (Kotler 1999:33).

The model has been characterized by a number of shortfalls. The model therefore fails to fully explain how these other factors affect consumer behavior. With the aspects of globalization and post modernism, the aspects of customer satisfaction have become a challenge hence the need to ensure quality services if customer satisfaction is to be achieved.

E-Customers

Findings have shown that the needs of e-customers and typical customers are similar. With the current technological advancement, the number of e-consumers in the hospitality industry has significantly increased. There are a number of factors influencing e-consumer behavior. Functionality seems to be the driving factor in the behavior of the online consumers.

Most people are still very reluctant to embrace online purchase as it is a new phenomenon. E-consumers rely on their past experience with the brand to make decisions. In such cases much emphasis is put on the quality of services. Good services would definitely attract the e-consumer to purchase the goods and services in subsequent instances. Most businesses in the hospitality industry have embraced online services.

Hotels have for instance made it possible for someone to make online bookings and reservations possible. People are able to make online payments for instance by using credit cards. This has been convenient to most consumers who do not have time to travel to that particular hotel or destination just to make a reservation. Those businesses that have embraced the current technologies in their service provision are therefore most likely to attract e-consumers and this plays a very significant role in improving their image among these consumers.

Trust is very important in making the consumers to have confidence in any particular service provider. The consumers need to be assured of privacy, safety of their information and effectiveness in service delivery. Once confidence and trust is established, the consumers will become regular shoppers (Solomon 2002:11).

Experiential factors of e-shopping

E-shopping is not only about purchasing. Interactivity plays a very important role in this type of trade. A consumer would for instance be appealed by the ability to customize some of the features on the retailer’s website. Interactivity plays a big role in influencing the attitude of the customer towards the retailer which significantly affects the aspects of trust.

An interesting website that allows for easy compatibility and interactivity is preferable to that which lacks such features. These aspects can be exploited by players in the hospitality industry in ensuring that their websites are very much interactive. They should use attractive features like music, videos and 3D in ensuring that their customers and potential consumers are attracted to the website.

This is crucial because a person’s first encounter with a website would determine whether the person will visit the site again or not. The features of a given website portray the image of the respective e-retailer, hence the need to develop a highly interactive website that ensures consumer satisfaction (Stalnaker 2002:22).

Conclusion Consumer behavior is influenced by a number of factors. According to Smith, consumer behavior is characterized by a number of interrelated stages. It is therefore important for the marketer to know the stage at which the consumer is so as to try to influence his/her decision to go for that given brand.

Even after purchasing, it is important for the marketer to follow up and know the opinion of the customer concerning that brand and even convince the person that she/he made the right decision by selecting the brand. According to the Black Box model, it is quite important for a retailer to ensure effective marketing so as to positively influence the consumer to develop loyalty towards that particular brand (Taylor 2004:87).

According to this model, brand image is perceived to be a very significant factor that influences customer behavior. A good image results in brand loyalty while a negative image leads to disloyalty. It is therefore the responsibility of the retailer to develop a positive image of the brand. The image of a brand does not just affect the consumers alone. This is because the consumer has the ability to influence other potential customers to try out the brand or avoid it.

List of References Antonides, G., and Van Raaij, W. (1999) Cases in consumer behaviour. New York: Wiley.

Baudrillard, J. (1998) The consumer society: myths and structures. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.

Blythe, J. (1997) The essence of consumer behaviour. London: FT Publishing.

Brown, S. (2002) Free gift inside: forget the customer: develop market ease 2,(4) 33

Cave, S. (2002) Consumer behaviour in a week. London:Hodder and Stoughton.

Ford, K. (2005) Brands laid bare: using market research for evidenced-based brand management. New Jersey, Wiley and Sons.

Gottdiener, M. (Ed.) (2000) New forms of consumption: consumers, culture and commodification. Lanham: Rowman and Littlefield.

Griffin, J, (2002) Consumer Loyalty: How to earn it How to keep it. San Fransisco: Jossey-Bass.

Gronroos, C. (2000) Service management and marketing: a customer relationship management approach. 2nd Ed., New York:Wiley.

Heath, J., and Potter, A. (2005) The Rebel Sell: how the counterculture became consumer culture. Chichester: Capstone Publishing.

Kotler, P., Bowen, J., and Makens, J. (1999) Marketing for hospitality and tourism. 2nd Ed., London: Prentice-Hall International (UK) Ltd.

Lashley, C., and Morrison, A. (2000) In search of hospitality: theoretical perspectives and debates. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann.

Lury, C. (1996) Consumer culture. Rutgers: Rutgers University Press.

Reisinger, Y., and Turner, L. (2003) Cross-cultural behaviour in tourism: concepts and analysis. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann.

Rosenblatt, R. (1999) Consumer desires. New York: Island Press.

Schiffman, L. G., and Kanuk, L. L. (2004) Consumer Behaviour. 8nd Ed., New Jersey: Pearson Prentice-Hall.

Solomon, M., Bamossy, G., and Askegaard, S. (2002) Consumer behaviour: a European perspective. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall.

Stalnaker, S. (2002) Hub Culture: the next wave of urban consumers. Singapore:Wiley and Sons.

Swarbrooke and Horner (1999) Consumer behaviour in tourism. Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann.

Taylor, D. (2004) Brand stretch: why 1 in 2 extensions fail, and how to beat the odds. New Jersey: Wiley and Sons.

[supanova_question]

The Future of NATO Essay essay help

Introduction The North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) when signing the North Atlantic Treaty in 1949 declared that the organization would diligently work towards the unification of their combined defense in the preservation of peace and security.1

The utmost danger to these goals was an armed attack by an unfriendly power. The insight resulted in the treaty’s most renowned provision as entrenched in Article V. It states that the parties to the treaty had concurred that a military attack against any of the members in Europe or North America would be regarded as an invasion against them all.

However, the purpose for creating NATO has been objectively investigated by several interested parties of researchers and academicians including Lord Ismay to examine if NATO has a future given the contemporary security environment.

In fact, Ismay formulated that the main objective of founding the alliance in 1949 was “to keep the Russians out, the Americans in, and the Germans down”.2 Six decades later, the mission has been achieved. However, the modern democratic Germany does not present any security threat.

The effective collapse of the Soviet Union has resulted in a Russia that is incapable of presenting substantial military or conceptual threat to Europe effectively making NATO unnecessary from this perspective.

The United States has played a vital role in ensuring that its national interests are permanently protected. Some quarters have suggested that the US has played its part in the alliance and should now leave. At the same time, NATO has achieved its mission in accordance with the treaty that created it.

The accomplishment of these important missions somehow leaves NATO close to obsolete. NATO consequently requires restructuring and revamping to reflect on the realities of the 21st century.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Evidently, the role of NATO remains important in view of International Security Assistance Force (ISAF) and increasing terrorism activities that threaten its members and non-members in equal measures. The security concerns of the 21st century and interconnected aspects offer NATO a new lease of life and a future.

Main Body Initial paradox

During the final decades of the 20th century, NATO was faced with a paradox. “The battle that the alliance had created to confront and conquer known as the conformist conflict in Europe terminated without bloodshed”.3 This almost made NATO irrelevant.

Strangely, when the alliance relaxed, armed chaos exploded in the Balkans. As a result, Europe was caught in the violence. NATO’s response appeared to be sluggish given that the enormous task of merging the expanse increased with the flop of Yugoslavia.

In a timely manner, the alliance made the right resolution by intervening to terminate a violent war and remaining to maintain peace. The alliance assumed the responsibility of reconciling the former rivals into the transatlantic fold.

This was a feat and the realization of one of the objectives of the European unity as stipulated in the Treaty. Reaching an agreement on both counts was taxing. However, the leaders of the alliance fixed the course of European history in a style that would offer enhanced safety, refuge and opportunity for all.4

Modern paradox

The alliance is inherently faced by another paradox in its operation. The key member of the alliance in terms of finance and military capability enabled the United States to accomplish its mission as envisaged in the formation of the alliance. It has secured its interests globally by using the provisions of the treaty.

Besides, it has managed to neutralize major threats to its national and regional security through ISAF and direct military actions. The paradox that faces the alliance emerges from these facts and demands gallant and extensive resolutions.

We will write a custom Essay on The Future of NATO specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The transatlantic region is less susceptible to conformist conflict now and in the foreseeable future. Since the alliance was designed to protect the community and the region from threat, it is still busy pursuing this mission despite lack of any potential threat.

However, renewed threats to the region took a twist though not directly after the 9/11 attack on the American landmarks. Citizens of ninety countries died during the attacks on the Pentagon and New York. The consequences were economically felt globally.

Through ISAF, NATO’s responsibility expanded to the global arena through the deployment of troops to Afghanistan to combat terrorists responsible for the attacks.

For a number of countries, the shift to democracy has progressed in fits and starts. These include NATO’s neighbors. Economically weaker states face the hitches of controlling their areas and affording urgent needs for their populations.

Under the umbrella of ISAF, NATO has a future as its assistance is required in these countries and regions. Terrorism mushrooms in these weaker countries. If first world countries are to effectively defend themselves against terrorism, they must support NATO in its endeavor to eliminate terrorist shells in these emerging economies.

This globalizes the increasingly multifaceted threats. The 2004 Madrid and 2005 London and multiple deterred attacks illustrated what transnational radical groups pursue to spread across the multiple verges of shared transatlantic region.

The unwelcomed visitor of international terrorism accompanied by social, racial and spiritual strife is augmented by other threats. There are other threats that are creating their course towards the transatlantic zone from unanticipated quarters.

The dangers touch all countries similarly and no country is immune.5 This realization requires the partnership with NATO giving it a new role in future.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Future of NATO by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The origins of these threats cling to globalization and shrouded within the economic networks that fuel the engines of global economy. For example, the essentials to construct biological weapons and the resources for their delivery possess a trend of masking behind millions of ordinary vessels meant for genuine trade.

Computer-generated networks transmit novel ideas and chances at immeasurable speeds yet prowling in the data streams are fresh susceptibilities to trade and national security. When the Alliance was formed, cyber-crime and related threats did not present the region with substantial threats.

These dangers advanced by technology require the alliance to review the mandate of NATO. In so doing, NATO will have extra responsibilities in future. Technological threats are currently the most probable source of global insecurity.

Additionally, piracy, which for hundreds of years has been consigned to irritating levels, is on the increase. Illicit networks traffic artilleries, drugs and human are forming long vague shadows traversing international boundaries.

The doubt of consistent energy provisions has the prospect in the disruption of livelihoods and trade at an extraordinary measure. Above this milieu of threats is a financial crisis of momentous degree.

These emerging challenges to safety and security offer NATO a lifeline. Piracy activities have seemingly subdued contemporary measures by security agencies. This offers NATO a chance to help the world deal with piracy in collaboration with the agencies and nation-states.

Expanding Jurisdiction

The NATO leadership is alive to the emerging realities and challenges of the 21st century. NATO is re-inventing itself to deal with the threats to its interests in economic and security frontier. In the last five years, NATO forces have been deployed in its largest operation in history.

The alliance has trained over 150,000 police and army forces to combat ferocious insurgence in Afghanistan, which is more than five thousand kilometers from its headquarters in Brussels.6 This is a departure from the initial objective of the Treaty and evidence of embracing global responsibility.

In Balkan, there are various martial personnel devoted towards advancing firmness and amity.7 NATO ships prowl the high seas off the East African coast to combat the increasing piracy menace associated mostly with the Somali instability.

Although the United States has played a vital role and close to accomplishing its mission with NATO, it remains an important partner in the role played by NATO in securing its interests globally. Its interest particularly in East Africa has been a target by terrorists who find it difficult to execute their mission in the American soil.

As a result, withdrawal from the alliance in pursuit of other commitments would have dire consequences for the US.8 The intensive investment in training and deploying of troops to different locations further indicates the alliance members’ intention to ensure that NATO continues to have a position in the global security sphere.

Renewed responsibilities

The rate of operation by NATO demonstrates that even though the world security setting has altered, the alliance’s raison d’etre has not. It is the continuing responsibility of transatlantic community to assist nations, the alliance and entire world in addressing the grave and frequently detached threats that endanger the world.

In this view, NATO will remain a beacon of unwavering peace and liberty in Europe as was the case in the 20th century. In an address to the NATO members, the Secretary of State named Hillary Clinton informed that the alliance was being challenged by circumstances to deal with greater challenges in the history of mankind.

The secretary stated that to meet the challenges the alliance needed to renovate and fortify their partnerships.9 The challenge by the secretary was positively received by the 28 leaders of the alliance.

In November 2010, the leaders undertook the bold and enormous role of setting forward the vision on how the alliance through NATO would confront the security tasks of the present and the future effectively offering a future to NATO.

In order to modernize and strengthen NATO, the leaders began with the development of a new Strategic Concept. The concept was launched on the platform of the initial premise offered by the earlier transatlantic visions, which included that the Transatlantic Alliance is a society of associates organized by a set of shared beliefs.10

Strategic Concept

The NATO leadership realizes the need to develop a concept that will reflect on the changing security environment and reinvent the alliance to face the challenges of the 21st century and beyond. The strategy is composed of two fundamental and sturdy pillars.

The first pillar is combined defense called the pledge (preserved in Article V of the Washington Treaty) meant to react to the aggression touching one as aggression touching all.

With the Balkans and neighboring countries joining the alliance, the responsibility of NATO has been increasing despite the fact that the region does not face immediate threat.11 The collective defense precept means that NATO will remain an essential alternative in case of imminent threats.

The second pillar of the alliance is co-operative security. The leaders appreciate that security issues need to be addressed proactively as opposed to being ready and reacting to threats that may ensue. Such cooperation is particularly important for the security agencies. The agencies need to work in tandem and synergically to forecast probable security scenarios.12

In implementing the strategic plan of the alliance leadership, NATO has in the last two decades been extending the ideology of partnership. Observably, the scope and value of the alliance’s partnership has remarkably improved. This has enabled NATO to increase its presence in the global security arena.

In an array of ways, NATO is regaining its relevance in the international security community through renewed commitment to partnering with compatible countries and security agencies on shared security concerns. This approach is important in differentiating the NATO of the Cold War era and subsequent years from the NATO of today.

This is an affirmative leap forward for the future of NATO. The partnerships have enabled NATO to correctly construct the right competences, logistical and structural capacity in addressing security concerns of the present and the future.13

With the strategic concept in place, nations inside and outside the transatlantic zone are regaining their confidence in NATO.

In recent years, NATO in collaboration with likeminded countries effectively created a no-go-zone in Libya that culminated in the ouster and consequent killing of one of the Africa’s most intimidating autocratic President called Muammar Gaddafi.

This demonstrated that NATO still has a role to play in enhancing global security. Without the intervention of NATO, the war propagated against civilians would have spilled to the neighboring countries and probably to the entire African continent.

The dismantling of piracy cartels along the coast of East Africa signifies that NATO still has a future. It has a role in stabilizing diverse world locations.

Unique capability for security organization

The parties that are members of the transatlantic alliance possess huge economic, political and military potential. With the largest percentage of its military and structural organization being funded by the world’s most influential economy, NATO has a unique capability for organizing security and operating in any environment through the marshaling of influential forces.

This means that like-minded countries are keen to ensure that NATO remains as a partner in global security issues. While the security setting has altered significantly, the core ideals, the roles of collective defense and cooperative security, as well as the shared capabilities continue to be the essential basis of the alliance.14

With more countries around the world sensing the increasing threats from different corners including terrorism, the role of NATO will become relevant and necessary in future. These countries will be willing to assist and cooperate with NATO to improve security.

They will offer financial and military support to the alliance. The departure of the US from the alliance will have an impact on NATO, but countries which feel that being affiliated with NATO is beneficial to their security will join efforts to fit in the US position in the alliance.15

Organizational structures

Strategic Concept adopted by NATO leadership with a global aspect with the transatlantic zone acting as a security hub indicates that shareholders in the security region are keen to actualize the role of NATO in future. The future of sponsored organizations heavily depends on the well-wish of the partners.

The suggestion by the stakeholders to realign NATO structures is a clear indication that it has a future. They are ready to investing in capabilities, training and mutual command structure that interlink the partners into a cohesive whole.16

NATO requires the assistance of security agencies and military support from outside the transatlantic region to avert security threats emanating from continents such as Asia and Africa propagated by terrorism networks like AL Qaeda.

Such cooperation will ensure that the endeavors as envisaged in Article V are attained.17 The restructuring to involve international players is an indication that it has a future full of responsibilities that require distribution of responsibilities.18

New capabilities

The United States has for decades played a dominant role in NATO. It has committed its economic and military power to the preservation of peace, stability and security in Europe after the destructions of the Second World War.19

The termination of cold war, the downfall of the Berlin Wall and the breakdown of Warsaw Pact obligated NATO to discover a new responsibility to remain relevant in the eyes of the sponsors. By the end of the 20th century, the welfares of the US in the European continent had been entrenched firmly on irreversibility.

Economically, Europe provides a rich market for the United States. The US economy will not succeed without an affluent Europe and vice versa.

Although majority of the alliance members are cutting on defense spending, withdrawal of funding by the US as having accomplished its mission within NATO poses a major threat to the security and economies of the two continents and the world in general.20

NATO is a major conduit for the US in Europe hence America’s withdrawal and ‘returning home’ is ill-advised with dire consequences. For all intents and purposes, the US is virtually a member of the European Union without formally stating so in the treaty.21

There are strong indications from President Barrack Obama administration that the US is committed to fight emerging security threats through NATO. The fight against terrorism is complex.22

It requires expert approach. NATO offers sufficient expertise to execute the responsibility consequently earning a future in global security responsibilities. Given the history of NATO, it is easy to build new capabilities through it as opposed to establishing an entirely new organization.

In this view, having accomplished the mission in Europe, it is the interest of the US for NATO to advance geographically as threats become spread outside Europe but with the same impact as if the threats were directly emanating from Europe.

The EU has made significant steps in ensuring that the presence of the United States is not far-reaching. The countries have grown militarily and politically in leaps and bounds. They now have the capacity to stand on their own without essentially having the US partake in main or trivial roles.23

The European countries now admit that peacekeeping in the continent is their key responsibility. However, the economic interests of the US in Europe do not allow it to withdraw from the continent in totality. To safeguard its interests in Europe, the US will have to engage the services of NATO. This is yet another reason why NATO has a role to play in future.

The US will employ the tactic of retrenching from Europe in a setting that it remains a partner and can send its military as well as offer support but cease running the show and bearing the risks. As has been the case in the recent years, the US will continue to expand the NATO mandate to other global locations to safeguard its interests.

The US engagement with NATO will increase irrespective of the security environment and the funding will most likely increase. However, the engagement with Europe will be based on the needs of military backing. Irrespective of the need for backing, the US will ensure that NATO is well funded to effectively handle any unpredicted security threat.

The US appears to continuously underline the criticality of subsidizing NATO activities and tackling 10-vital competencies. Key among these capabilities is warhead defense, computer-generated and civil-military cooperation.

This approach in altering and increasing the responsibility of NATO while the leading sponsor gives it a future full of global responsibilities in countering threats as opposed to being restricted to transatlantic roles.

“The 21st century dangers of extremism, the spread of weapons of mass destruction and cybercrime further justify the continuity of NATO into the future.”24

The non-member countries require to be assured by NATO that despite their non-membership to the alliance, NATO will reciprocate assistance when needed in order to maintain global peace and security.

In this respect, NATO needs to review its objectives with a clear consideration of the changing security environment since the contemporary threats extend beyond ‘armed aggression’ as described in Article V. This way, the countries will give NATO logistic, military and financial support, and an operational future.

America would readily approve such a move. Inevitability, the US is focusing its attention from the transatlantic region to combat contemporary threats of terrorism and cybercrime that mainly originate from the Middle East, Africa and Asia.

NATO’s failure to embrace increasing global security responsibility will likely see the US losing interest in investing in the alliance’s future with NATO.25

NATO should partner with likeminded countries to effectively execute its global security mandate such as Australia and Japan.

When such non-member countries provide significant military support, they should form part of the operative planning procedures even though they have no vote in the considerations.26 This way, NATO will have a busy future with mandate beyond that stipulated in the Treaty and particularly Article V.

Conclusions and recommendations The future of NATO is increasingly challenged by social, economic and political factors. The future of the alliance is gradually being influenced by the diminishing security threats in the European continent. The stability and diffusion of threats has been facilitated by NATO which has played a central role for decades.

The end of cold war, the collapse of the Berlin Wall and stability in the region has placed NATO in a paradox as to what role it should play having accomplished its initial mission of collective defense and security cooperation. Additionally, European countries are increasingly becoming militarily independent.

Most countries in the regions have attained military capacity to defend their homeland from external aggression. The threats that had brought the countries together in an alliance have significantly decreased.

The threats are spread to other global locations. This waters-down the role of NATO in the transatlantic region. However, the future of NATO is still promising given the changing security environment.

In order to maintain its relevance, NATO, its members and leaderships require adapting to the current and emerging security threats of the 21st century. The leadership and members of the alliance should seek ways to restructure NATO command to accommodate membership with a global representation.

The dangers that are likely to threaten the transatlantic alliance will emerge from outside the region. The move by NATO to increase its security surveillance in Africa, Middle East and the coasts off East Africa is commendable but it requires increasing its presence to the global arena.

It is also imperative for NATO to combine its identity of ‘defensive alliance’ with ‘instrument of intervention’ in Europe and afar. In view of the ongoing crisis in Syria, it is evident that the US is a key player in NATO. The Barrack Obama administration has neglected the humanitarian crisis in Syria by refusing to offer extra funding to NATO.

Evidently, the departure of the US from NATO will create a global crisis in security. It should hence be the responsibility of NATO leadership to ensure that the relationship between the US and the transatlantic alliance remains intact.

The members should, therefore, commit to funding NATO’s operations to avert security threats that may spill to the region.

Currently, the US population feels that the alliance members have neglected their responsibility by cutting on military funding thus effectively leaving the US taxpayer to bear the burden. Despite these circumstances, NATO still has a future in combating emerging global security threats.

Works Cited BROOK, Tom. NATO Still has a Vital Role, Secretary General says. 2013. Web.

CURTIN, Mary. The Role of NATO in Today’s World. 2013. Web.

Daadler, I. A New Alliance for a New Century. The RUSI Journal, 2010, vol. 155 no. 5, p. 6-10.

ERLANGER, Steven. Shrinking Europe Military Spending Stirs Concern. 2013. Web.

Goldgeier, J. The Future of NATO. Council on Foreign Relations, 2010, vol. 51,no. 1, p. 1-33.

Hallams, E.

[supanova_question]

Information Technology and the Way in Which It Has Changed People’s Daily Lives Research Paper college admissions essay help

Living in the era of the informational society is not easy. Because of the reassessment of the economic, political and cultural values within the globalized environment of the XXI century, it has become necessary to adapting towards a completely new set of principles that rule the economics, business, finances and even culture.

As a result, the need to study information as a phenomenon and come up with the concept of information management emerges.

By using the skills acquired and trained in the process of studying the ISys 100 course, one can not only learn the specifics of information acquisition, distribution, and management in the XXI century but be able to use these skills of information management to their personal advantage, as well as to the advantage of the present-day economy and business sphere.

Before going any further, it is necessary to define the key concepts that the course has to offer. To start with, one must mention that the ISys 100 course is traditionally represented as the unit that introduces people to the opportunities that technology of the XXI century has to offer.

Allowing students to embrace the role that technology plays in the lives of the XXI century people, the given course teaches the basics of information and technology and provides comprehensive data regarding the modern methods of knowledge management and information processing, mainly the computer-assisted ones.

Thus, the role of technology in people’s daily lives is explained thoroughly in the given course, thus, allowing for using technological advances to their full potential.

When it comes to defining the positive effects that the information technology can have on the people attending it, one must mention the fact that it has redefined the pace of lives of modern people.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, seeing how the latest technological innovations are exposed to vast discussions and help people sneak a peek at how the [present-day media actually works, one might argue that IT helps people get rid of the fear that technology makes them dependent on computer-assisted communication.

For example, the recent research regarding the use of the Internet among tourists has shown that most people prefer to spend their vacation in the places where they can have Internet access – and, in fact, they do, therefore, turning the entire idea of a vacation into surfing the Net:

“The finding of the higher incidence of Internet access for VFR trips versus pure leisure trips could suggest a more likely setting for retained behaviors than more unfamiliar environments” (MacKay

[supanova_question]

Organization Culture for Boeing Term Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Abstract Organization culture is defined through the application of various aspects of the firm including rules, leadership, organization structure as well as the daily activities that determine the work processes.

In most cases, organization cultures are perceived as the processes that guide and determine the behavior of employees as well as other stakeholders within the firm.

Besides, organization culture promotes integration of the belief system as well as internal and external work processes undertaken by the organization.

The paper examines the concept of organization culture particularly within the precincts of Boeing. The paper will first examine the various cultural aspects of the firm before looking into the causes of several aspects of the organization culture.

Introduction Organization culture is defined through the application of various aspects of the organization including rules, leadership, organization structure as well as the daily activities that determine the work processes. In most cases, organization cultures are perceived as the processes that guide and determine the behavior of employees as well as other stakeholders within the firm.

According to Hofstede (2001), organization culture is the way through which people within the business think and act. In other words, views and actions of individuals within the organization determine the cultural practices.

Essentially, the organization culture deal with the belief system enshrined within the set goals and objectives of the firm (DeRoche, 2008). Besides, organization culture promotes integration of the belief system as well as internal and external work processes undertaken by the organization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In essence, cultural aspects of the organization are critical in enabling employees to understand the differences that exist between individuals as well as the external environment.

Organization culture is critical particularly in the situations where new strategies that affect the basic norms of the organization need to be implemented (Weick, 2007). In fact, organization culture exists in various types and dimensions.

According to Schein (2004), organization culture provides ways through which people within the firm find solution to various challenges. As such, organization cultures influences the behaviors of individuals as well as work processes. Conversely, organization culture can be influenced.

In order to have positive influence, organization culture should be imbued within the core values of the firm. Moreover, culture influences various aspects of the organization ranging from recruitment strategies to compensation policies (House, Hanges, Javidan, Dorfman,

[supanova_question]

Contemporary Issues in Marketing and Management Essay custom essay help

Introduction Firms, which operate in the film industry such as Hollywood, are now embracing social media and viral marketing to create publicity and high prospects to their audiences even before releasing their films.

This paper investigates the effectiveness of viral marketing strategies through social media in the film industry by analysing and criticising Adam Mills’ article titled Virality in Social Media: The SPIN Framework.

Informed by the case study of the success of Old Spice Brand’s viral marketing strategies with the aid of social media that was integrated in traditional platforms, the SPIN model proposed by Mills (2012) establishes a theoretical architectural framework in the development of effective social media marketing campaigns.

In the evaluation of the impacts of social media and viral marketing on the movie industry, the paper defines social media and viral marketing in the context of application of the terms in marketing before critically analysing the SPIN model. In the last section, it addresses the influence of social media and viral marketing on various stakeholders in the film industry.

Social Media and Viral Marketing In the context of this paper, social media refers to any Web 2.0 application that permits the two-way interaction between people, organisations, or a combination of the two in an online environment through which an intended audience has the capacity or no capacity to make modifications or even design and produce marketing contents before transmitting them to other people, organisations, or even groups of individuals.

This case suggests that the effectiveness of social media in marketing depends on mass collaboration of the participants in social conversation through Web 2.0 social media platforms (Olauwuyi

[supanova_question]

A monopoly market player: Apple Case Study best essay help: best essay help

A monopoly market player is a firm, which is the only one existent in a market. Monopolization is when a firm has a significant control to set the prices in a multiplayer market.

In 2005, even with more than one player in its market segment, Apple was able to sell a more expensive product and achieve 63% control of digital music players and 83% control of legal digital music download market. Such an achievement was made through leveraging on its ITunes store and stylish status of iPods.

In charging high products, Apple built a premium and exclusives status for its products. Over the long term, this will create a cult like following for its products as long as the firm can keep on developing digital music players with the better technology than that of its competitors.

This will require massive investment in idea and technology generation and development. Low sales numbers can easily lead to the company being bankrupt. In conclusion, charging high prices is a risky but highly rewarding option (Manikw, 2008).

Diagram 1 represents a monopoly market. A monopolist is a price maker because the company does not face any competitors in such a case. Thus, there is a price inelastic demand where marginal cost meets marginal revenues, which represents the quantity for profit maximisation.

The extrapolating the output up to its maximum to meet the average revenue and cost curves, we arrive at the prices P1 and P2. The total cost of production is P1Q1, while the total revenues are P2Q2; the difference is the supernormal profit.

Considering diagram 2, prices decrease from P1 to P3, while quantity sold has an increase from Q1 to Q2. This is due to a different demand pattern brought about by different demographic and physiographic population factors, while a different cost pattern brought about by a change of the tax regime affects the cost pattern resulting in a different price maximizing output and different prices.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More First, for price discrimination to take place, it must be performed in different geographical markets. Secondly, market segmentation is based on different demographic and physiographic population factors. Thirdly, inelastic price elasticity of demand ensures the advantage of price discriminators (Manikw, 2008).

Monopolies and oligopolies are vital firms in a country especially if they can work competitively to bring new products to the market, while providing job places.

Secondly, they accumulate large amounts of capital to the benefit of economy. However, consumer and labor groups have no trust in monopolies and oligopolies achieving this economic function without government oversight.

Arguments for intellectual property rights include giving the right of intellectual property to its owner, who can use it for financial gain. The right to own an intellectual property is a result of hard labor and investment in creating it.

Thus, development to humanity would not occur from private entities but only from the government. The socialist and economic growth would follow the government’s agenda. Margins for firms would be thin since it is a price market (Dwivedi, 2002).

Every industry deserves to obtain its intellectual rights, especially considering the economic significance of motivating capital and expertise investment.

In such areas as healthcare, its importance to ensuring human rights observance and proper solutions to human health problems is significant. For such markets, additional control by government authorities is necessary to balance morality and intellectual rights (Perloff, 2009).

We will write a custom Case Study on A monopoly market player: Apple specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More References Dwivedi, D. (2002). Microeconomics: Theory and Application. India: Pearson education.

Manikw, G. (2008). Principles of microeconomics: a guided tour. Connecticut: Cengage Learning.

Perloff, J. (2009). Microeconomics. London: Pearson/Addison Wesley.

[supanova_question]

Purposes of Tourism Industry Report (Assessment) best essay help: best essay help

Tourism provides employment to the local people. It is also a source of revenue both to the national and local authorities. Tourism provides the tourists with the opportunity to learn other cultural practices. In a broader aspect, tourism industry helps in the conservation of cultural heritage and even the environment.

Reasons for Travelling

Tourists travel for recreational, leisure or business purposes.

Benefits of travel

The visiting tourists get to learn of the cultural practices of the people living around the tourists’ attraction site. Travelling is also a good way of spending one’s leisure time. Travelling provides a means of breaking boredom especially for those who work for longer hours.

Visitor Profiles

The company will keep records of the visiting tourists. This will include nationality, duration of the stay, and the room number.

Tourism Trends

The new trends in tourism industry include green tourism, travel with a mission, workforce development and tour safety.

Tourism Development in the UAE

Over a long period of time, UAE drew its revenue mainly from the sales of fuels. However, recently tourism has become one of the major sources of revenue. This has been made possible with the existence of tourist attraction sites, better security, existence of direct fights especially between the major cities, and the hospitality of the local people.

Tourism Careers

There are several careers associated with the tourism industry. These include tour guides, drivers, security officers, accounting and even environmental conservationists.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Effect of Mass Tourism on Emirati Culture

Generally, tourism will instigate the interactions between the tourists and the local people. This may cause assimilation of new cultural practices,and consequently leading to the erosion the Emirati culture.

Cultural Identity

The area has hundreds of years of Arabic history, with this information being a special feature that requires the preservation of the existing culture.

Tangible/Intangible Heritage

The Ra Ghanada’s lagoon is located at a close proximity to the Abu Dhabi City, which harbors both tangible and intangible heritage of the past. The intangible heritage includes the hospitality of the local people, which promotes peaceful coexistence amongst the inhabitants of Ra’s Ghanada area.

Local culture as Tourism attraction

The local Emirati culture of the local people serves as a major tourist attraction practice. This culture is unique and enticing to learn.

Festivals and Events

Due to the low number of people inhabiting the area that surrounds the Ra’s Ghanada Lagoon, there are few festivals and events being organized in this area.

Multiplier Effect

Given favorable conditions, the moving company intends to expand its operations within the short time in order to accumulate resources for use during the hard economic times.

Leakage

The company seeks to prevent leakage effect by constantly improving the quality of services that it offers so as to ensure high influx of tourists.

We will write a custom Assessment on Purposes of Tourism Industry specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Carrying Capacity

The moving hotel will host 500 persons, with only 200 of the 500 spending in the hotel at night. However, the number of tourists in the hotel at any given time will fluctuate depending on the season of the year.

EconomicImpact

Economically, tourism earns the country foreign exchange.The moving hotel project will also create employment to the local people, and hence a source of income. The project will provide the country with an opportunity to improve her infrastructure and other social amenities.

Environmental Impact

Depending on the nature of practice, tourism may have a negative or positive influence on the environment. The need to provide standard boarding conditions necessitates conservation and proper care of the environment. However, some tourists’ practices, such as smoking, pollute the environment.

Cultural impact

Tourism has an effect of introducing new cultural practices as tourists get to interact with the locals on a regular basis. Tourism industry in a broader aspect encourages cultural exchange amongst the practicing parties.

However, this may result in the assimilation of new practices by the locals from the tourists and may consequently lead to either erosion of the rich local cultures or emergence of new cultural practices.

Social Impact

The moving hotel project sets up the platform for the tourists to enjoy the rich Asian culture. The emergence of trade centers along the beaches may initiate high rates of crime and other social vices including theft cases.

This project will be acceptable to both groups of foreign and local tourists, as it will provide an opportunity to move between different beaches while still enjoying the comfort of the hotel.

The management will have to work together with the local authorities to ensure that such vices are given proper attention, and corrective measures are put in place.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Purposes of Tourism Industry by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Ways to Reduce Impact

The project will implement the use of modern filters in order to ensure that most of the wastes released into the sea waters do not have adverse effects on the aquatic lives. The company will focus on measures to help the local people conserve their unique cultural practices, in addition, setting up security base to help check on the security of the area.

Sustainable Tourism

This involves travelling to areas where animals, flora and cultural heritage are the primary tourist attractions.The project seeks to help in the conservation of the Emirati culture while giving the tourists a chance to enjoy the comfort of the moving hotel.

Travelling Responsibly

Responsible travelling entails travelling to fulfill one’s desires while benefiting the local people and the surrounding environment by playing a role in environmental conservation and rehabilitation.

Interpretation

The moving hotel company intends to employ most of the local people so as to ensure that the tourists are able to get proper answers especially for questions on the Emirati culture and practices.

Tourism Elements

This involves all the factors that make up the tourism industry. They include physiographic factors, resources, people, and infrastructure among other things. Ra’s Ghanada area is generally endowed with these factors that will enable thriving of the tourism project.

Visioning Process

The vision of this project will be to provide the best tourist destination for visitors in Abu Dhabi and promote Emirati culture for people of Abu Dhabi in a completely natural habitat.

Comparative Advantage

Generally, this project has an advantage over other projects owing to its uniqueness and the perception of the public regarding its implementation.

Destination Differentiation

The location of the Ra’s Ghanada allows an easier differentiation of the location of the moving hotel industry from other tourist attraction sites.

Destination Sustainability

The economic sustainability of the project will come from continued investment in luxury items and marketing of the hotel as a luxury destination for the selected few. The funds generated will be used to improve services regularly, as well as promoting the local community to ensure that it is able to cater for its own welfare

Visitor segmentation

The moving hotel project is targeting majorly foreign tourists and the high class families who are willing to spend on leisure tours. The visiting tourists will be majorly foreign tourists at 80%, a good number of regional tourists at 15%, and a few locals averaging just about 5%.

SWOT Analysis

Conducting a SWOT Analysis of the location and concept explains the need of understanding the internal and the external factors of the concept.

Strengths

Ra’s Ghanada area is underdeveloped and it has few inhabitants. This will ease the cost of transferring the inhabitants in order to create space for the project. Ra’s Ghanada lagoon enjoys a close proximity to the main city of Abu Dhabi. The area also enjoys good climate throughout the year.

Weakness

Ra’s Ghanada lagoon has been tipped as a home of magnificent infrastructure and other construction projects in the future. Moreover, the area is characterized with few festivals and recreational events; this may limit the number of visiting tourists.

Opportunity

The moving hotel project has the opportunity to tap the income from the great number of tourists visiting Abu Dhabi City by providing a unique and better experience to her customers.

Threats

Despite creating a new idea, the moving hotel project faces a tough test right from conception to implementation. The financial burden that comes with acquiring the heavy machineries and even hiring of expatriates is enormous and requires an organized boardroom for the project to be a success.

Destination Lifecycle

The hotel will be moving between major centers along the beach as stipulated in the travel plans.

Stakeholders

Stakeholders of the moving hotel project include owners of the business, shareholders, government, alliances, suppliers,operational teams, customers, local community, and the interest groups.

Promotion

The promotion will include low tour rates during off-peak seasons, tour packages for families, and low rates for local tourists. Promotion will also be done through advertisements, booklets, and brochures on planes, promotion campaigns posters, and competition.

Branding

The moving hotel is a brand in the tourism industry as it will be the first of its kind in the UAE market.

Tourism Planning and Tourism Policy

The project upon implementation will work in line with the established government policies that control the tourism industry. These include promoting healthy business environment and conservation of tourist attraction sites.

[supanova_question]

Social Science Research Descriptive Essay custom essay help

Social science focuses on the study of society. The research centers on the importance of the scientific method in generating more convincing social science perspectives. The research focuses on the natural sciences and physical sciences to support the social science research activities. The scientific method as well and the other related sciences contribute to a more effective and convincing social science research course of actions.

In terms of psychology of group behavior, the social scientific question is: What is the effect of taste on the prospective clients’ product preference. The question is significant for analysis. The question will help identify the prospective and current client’s product preferences.

The results of the research will help company’s identity which product should be prioritized. The cost of the research is minimal compared to producing lots of goods that are unsalable. The company’s huge advertising budget would go to naught when the current and prospective clients refuse to buy products that are not in line with their taste preferences. Each person has a unique taste preference. Some prefer coffee, others prefer beverages.

Some prefer chocolates, others prefer mint candies. Some prefer pork food products, others prefer chicken food products. Some prefer McDonald’s hamburgers, others prefer Kentucky Fried Chicken. Some prefer office clothes, others prefer work clothes. The list can go on and on. The research will lessen the guesswork and frustration of producing products will does not fill the discriminating prospective target market’s needs, wants, and caprices (Black, 2002).

How should the survey be conducted? The first sub-question shows that he survey can be conducted by letting the respondents answer questions in a survey form or oral form. Some respondents prefer the survey form because it is grounded on privacy. On the other hand, people in the vicinity can hear the respondents’ answer to orally made questions. The survey can be conducted by letting the respondents take a taste test of two competing products.

The survey will indicate which product will be chosen by the respondent, according to taste. The survey can be conducted in universities, kindergarten or middle school locations. The different school groups will generate a different set of survey results. The results of the middle school respondents may differ or mimic the survey results of the university students. The survey can be conducted in grocery stores.

The researcher can set up a taste test table for the grocery visitors to freely partake in the research. The action avoids getting the survey results of person who do not frequent the grocery stores. The taste test can be conducted by setting up a taste test table along a busy street corner. The people of all ages, gender, religion, race, or other walks of life can contribute their share in determining the most sought after taste.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The survey will exclude other possible taste test respondents who do not pass along the busy street corner. The taste test can be conducted in the morning or in the afternoon. The taste test will indicate the taste preferences of busy morning people. On the other hand, the afternoon taste test will exclude the busy morning people as possible respondents. The taste test can be conducted during the prospective clients’ peak hours or during their non-peak hours.

The researcher will gather more research data if the research was conducted during peak hours. However, the deluge of the long queue of respondents will reduce the quantity and quality of the taste test process. The researcher must reduce the taste test time allotment in order to accommodate more taste test respondents. The researcher can generate the taste test result from 50 respondents. On the other hand, the research can have more convincing taste test results if the respondents reach 500 or more respondents (Yates, 2004).

How should the survey questions’ results be formulated and tabulated? The second sub- question focuses on how the survey questions will formulated and tabulated. The second sub-question focuses on the content of the survey questions. The survey question may indicate the respondents’ names, contact numbers, and addresses.

Some respondents freely give their personal data to the researchers. However, other groups of persons prefer to hide their identity. The United States constitution gives everyone the right to privacy. Thus, the respondent can tell the researcher that he or she elects to hide one’s identity by not stating any personal information on the survey form.

The survey form may indicate the person’s age, gender, occupation, education attainment, or marital status. The respondents can fill the blanks asking for the respondent’s average monthly salary. The respondents can fill the survey questions asking one’s religion (Yates, 2004).

How should the gathered data be interpreted? The third problem focuses on how gathered taste test results will be interpreted. The research may use different tools to interpret the above gathered research data. The research may use the mean statistical tool in the interpretation process.

The same researcher may implement the standard deviation to answer the taste test question. The research can use analysis of variance to determine if the there is a significant difference between different groups when taking the taste test results. The groups may be segregated according the respondents’ age. The group may be segregated according one’s gender.

We will write a custom Essay on Social Science Research specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The research may determine if there is significant difference between the taste test results of the respondents according to educational attainment. The researcher may use the mode statistical tool to interpret the gathered taste test results. The researcher can use the frequency statistical tool to determine the frequency results of the different respondent groups.

The researcher can use the ranking statistical tool as basis for coming up with an answer to the research question. The researcher can use the chi- square statistical tool to determine if there is a relationship between the respondent groups in terms of answering the taste test survey questions (Yates, 2004).

The social scientific method provides a complete framework for investigating the three research problems that were identified. The first three steps of the standard scientific method are defining the question, gathering relevant information and references, and forming an explanatory hypothesis.

The next three steps of the standard scientific process are testing the hypothesis by performing an experiment, analyzing the gathered information, and interpreting the gathered information and generating conclusions. The last steps of the standard scientific process are publishing the results of the scientific experiment, and retesting the scientific process to determine if the same results will be repeated (Aronson, 2011).

In terms of the first sub-question, the researcher can introduce all the eight steps of the scientific process to determine if the survey can be conducted by letting the respondents answer questions in a survey form or oral form. The researcher can gather relevant information and references on the different data gathering processes, especially the survey aspect and the oral interview aspect. The researcher can form an explanatory hypothesis that oral interview and the use of surveys are valid methods of gathering relevant data.

Next the researcher can test the hypothesis by conducting a survey and oral interview. The researcher can gather the results of the survey experiment and the oral interview experiment as basis for interpreting whether the survey method and the oral method are valid data gathering methods. The research can publish the results of the scientific method.

The results may include affirmation or negation of the suggested survey questions as appropriate data gathering procedures. Lastly, another group of social and scientific researchers can retest the same scientific experiment on the creation of survey questions. The repetition will affirm or dispute the findings of the first scientific experiment on the question generating hypothesis as valid data gathering processes (Aronson, 2011).

The researcher can implement all the eight steps of the social scientific process to determine if the second sub- question focuses on how the survey questions will formulated and tabulated. Similarly, the same researcher can implement all the eight steps of the scientific process to establish the most effective set of survey questions.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Social Science Research by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The researcher can gather related information and resources on the most practical method of generating data gathering questions. The researcher can form an explanatory hypothesis that the inclusion of age, gender, occupation, and religion, and other data are valid methods of gathering relevant data.

Next the researcher can test the hypothesis by making one’s own set of data gathering questions. The researcher can research on the most optimum set of questions asked in standard social research and scientific research activities. The researcher can use the sets of questions as basis for interpreting whether the selected questions are valid data gathering methods. The research can publish the results of the scientific method done on the question generating process.

The results will incorporate affirmation or negation of the survey method and oral interview methods as appropriate data gathering procedures. Lastly, another set of researchers may repeat the same scientific experiment. The repetition will confirm the findings of the first scientific experiment on the viability of surveys and oral interviews as valid data gathering processes (Aronson, 2011).

The researcher can apply all the eight steps of the social scientific process to determine how to resolve the third problem. The third sub- problem focuses on how gathered taste test results will be interpreted. The researcher can gather related data and resources on the best way to analyze and interpret the gathered results. The researcher can form an explanatory hypothesis that the analysis and interpretation process is correct.

Next the researcher can test the hypothesis by analyzing and interpreting the data gathered. The researcher can use the results of the analysis and interpretation process as basis for interpreting whether the current data analysis and interpretation processes are correct. The researcher can publish the results of the scientific method on the data analysis and interpretation experiment.

The results may confirm or negate the hypothesis presented in terms of data analysis and interpretation. Lastly, another set of researchers may reset the same scientific experiment on data analysis and interpretation. The repetition will affirm or contradict the findings of the first scientific experiment on the correctness in terms of data analysis and interpretation (Aronson, 2011).

The social scientific responses extensively rely on methods drawn from the physical and natural sciences. The social science spectrum focuses on how society acts. Man lives in a planet that filled with physical and natural objects. The physical objects fall under the concepts and theories of physical science.

Likewise, the natural objects fall under the theories and concepts of the natural sciences. The physical sciences include physics, chemistry, and astronomy. Chemistry is used in the study of determine the best tasting product. Thus, the social scientific research must delve into chemistry to discover the most salable product. Without the inputs for physical science, the social scientific responses would be incomplete (Shipman, 2009).

In addition, natural science includes the study of sociology and economics. The other natural sciences are chemistry, earth science, biology, and statistics. The social scientific responses are needed to successful generate realistic social scientific responses. The research must include the biology studies to determine the feasibility of not selling products that are expired.

The research must includes statistics in coming up with a convincing report that affirms or negates an established hypothesis on the taste test data gathered. In addition, the lack of inputs from natural science precipitates to inconclusive social scientific responses (Kant, 2004).

The research methods required for the formulated question (from part A2a) complements the scientific method as understood in the natural or physical sciences.

The scientific method incorporates the concepts of the natural sciences and physical sciences to explain the effectiveness of the social science research methods required for the formulated question, what is the effect of taste on the prospective clients’ product preference. Specifically, the scientific method will prove that the survey gathering process, analysis, interpretation, and conclusion are correct.

The social science perspective must rely on the scientific method in the same way that natural or physical science would. The scientific method is based on experiments. The experiments will prove or disprove the hypothesis. The social science perspective should use the scientific method to determine if the social science research (generating the question, etc.) is realistic. Experiments will prove that the survey and oral interview taste test gathering process is scientifically correct.

Based on the above discussion, social science focuses centers on the study of society. The scientific method generates more convincing social science perspectives. The natural sciences and physical sciences to support the social science research activities. Indeed, the scientific method, and the other sciences contribute to a more effective and convincing social science research processes.

References Aronson, D. (2011). Evidence -Based Technical Analysis: Applying the Scientific Method and Statistical Inference. New York: J. Wiley

[supanova_question]

Place Value Misconceptions and Techniques to Correct Them Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

The concept of place value is premised on wider ideas about the number system. These ideas are quite difficult and complex for students to learn. In particular, many children do not realize the purpose and essence of place value system and, therefore, they need active assistance in developing full comprehension of the number system structure.

Hence, it has been found that junior students do not understand that 1 in 14, for example, defines the first ten (Associated of Independent Schools of South Australia, 2004). Many students under 3 and 4 years do not understand the concept of value place either. The problem is that students can write 14 for fourteen objects in the right order, though they fail to understand its place value as a number made up of one ten and four ones.

It has also been reported that children can conceive up to four digits by the third year. Children, however, are seen little progress after the third year. At year 6, about 42 % of students are not able to single out ten thousands place (Associated of Independent Schools of South Australia, 2004).

Within 2-6 years period, some students are unable to analyze the number system structure (Associated of Independent Schools of South Australia). In particular, children count figures only in ones, even though the figures are presented on a 100 chart. They fail to notice tens and hundreds, which is also the basic problem to be corrected. Such a difficulty can lead to serious confusions and prevent children from understanding the main principles of place values.

Aside from difficulties with understanding, there are many other sources of misconception among children. Hence, such issues as boredom and distraction can come to the forth when children are not interested in the subject, or they are not enough motivating to studying mathematics (Bottle, 2005).

In addition, lack of practice is also among the main causes of misconception. Some students are not able to apply the theory and rules in practice because application has been presented in an irrelevant context (Bottle, 2005). Finally, lack of understanding can occur as the result of vocabulary misunderstanding. For instance, children may fail to understand the meaning of ‘subtraction’ or ‘multiplying’.

These confusions, therefore, can distort students’ understanding of place value due to their false perception of numbers. The corresponding solutions should be presented to correct the existing misconceptions. The best way to address students who miscount object is to introduce person-centered approaches to introduce the basis of place value theory (Department of Education and Early Childhood Development, 2006).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Teacher’s task is to define the weaknesses and strengths that each student possesses and analyze which techniques can be used to eliminate the problems. Specific emphasis should be placed on establishing the source of the problem, which is often confined to one person.

Second, the introduction of comprehensive games and educational courses will contribute to problem elimination and provide a solid basis for further improvements. Finally, the introduction of ICT and enhanced teaching will also be among the most effective means of solving the problem with place value misconception.

In conclusion, teachers should pay close attention to the role of place value in understanding numeracy, as well as the importance of numeracy in further study of mathematics. They should also realize that numeracy is the foundation for further studies because numeracy and place value set base for learning more complicated learning. In this respect, it is imperative for teachers to understand the main constraints that children might face while mastering the concept of place value.

References Associated of Independent Schools of South Australia. (2004). Understanding Place Value: A case Study of the Base Ten Game. Australia: Commonwealth of Australia.

Bottle, G. (2005). Teaching Mathematics in the Primary School. US: Continuum International Publishing Group.

Department of Education and Early Childhood Development. (2006). A Note on Common Misunderstandings. State Government Victoria. Retrieved from: https://www.education.vic.gov.au/Pages/default.aspx

[supanova_question]

Business Communications – Individual Qualitative Research Essay college essay help

Executive summary The report analyses the communication adopted by the Greenpeace international in reaching its stakeholders. Its major objective is to determine which have been the most applicable means of communication applied by the organization. It targets the stakeholders as it gives a clear picture of the communication and its transformation over the years. The report employs investigative and explorative research methodology to come up with the analysis.

According to the report study main findings, social media like facebook and twitter have been widely used. Other forms of communication are video conferencing, blogs, websites, emails, multimedia, and videos. The most effective forms of communication applicable when reaching the audience of Greenpeace are the social media followed by multi media.

They are cost effective reliable, user friendly, and reach a wide number of stakeholders. Mass media has been recommended as the most appropriate and effective form of communication that can be applied to reach the audience and the different stakeholders. The organization should relentlessly continue using this form of communication because of the nature of work it is involved in.

Introduction Communication plays an integral role in an organization. It is important to have channels of communication through which different individuals portray their ideas, opinions, attitudes, and ideologies. Communication has been defined as the transfer of information from one individual or groups to another through a medium of exchange (Barker 2008, p.3). The information relayed may be in the form of news, message, data, or emotions.

The medium of exchange ensures that information is relayed to the targeted recipient in the right time. The content should be understandable, time bound, accurate, and ready to interpret (Barker 2008, p.3). Communication can be either informal or formal as both are applicable in the organizational setting (Barker 2008, p.5).

Different organizations use different forms of communications depending on whom the message or information is being communicated to. For communication to be effective barriers to communication need to be minimized (Wertheim 2008, p.2)

The report explores the different types of communication used by Greenpeace international to present information to its various stakeholders. Based on the analysis, the report will give the most effective form of communication that can be used to reach the target audience supported by evidence. Lastly, it gives recommendations on where the organization can improve and what in do away with of any.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Background information Greenpeace international is a globally recognized non-governmental organization. It is a campaigning organization with the major role of safeguarding the environment through awareness creation and other conservative measures and policies. It aims at changing the behaviour and attitudes of the general population.

Its major campaigns are in energy revolution, oceans defending, encouraging peace through disarmament and call for abolition of nuclear weapons, sustainable agriculture, and creation of a future free from toxics (Greenpeace 2011).

The organization that was founded 40 years ago is presented in forty states across the pacific, Africa, Asia, America, and Europe. It depends mostly on individual contributions and grants from foundations. Contrary, it “does not accept donations from governments or corporations” (Greenpeace 2011) for independence purposes.

The report targets different stakeholders who need to understand the commonly applicable forms of communications and the most appropriate one. Its major purpose is to evaluate the communication process, mechanism, and form between the Greenpeace international and its numerous stakeholders.

Main findings Stakeholders

A stakeholder may be defined as any individual, organization, or a group that has either indirect or direct stake or interest in a particular organization (Fassin 2008, p.7). Stakeholders are divided into internal and external stakeholders (Fassin 2008, p.8).

Based on this definition then the different stakeholders of Greenpeace international are, foundations grant, individual supporters, donors, volunteers, employees, environmental communities, national and regional offices as well as the general public. The different stakeholders are presented with information in different types depending on the urgency, confidentiality level, and the time required conveying the information.

Communication between stakeholders and organization Social media

This is the latest form of communication which is transforming how information is communicated from one individual to another. Social media is a form of online communication where the internet forms the basis from where information can be exchanged in real-time (PWC 2011, p.2).

We will write a custom Essay on Business Communications – Individual specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The commonly used social media channels are Facebook, twitter, and MySpace among many more uprising channels. According to Bengtson (2010) social media has transformed the relationship that exists between organizations and stakeholders. Since the modern stakeholders like a dialogue that it two way and authentic, social media has been the favorite form of communication. Greenpeace has not been left behind.

Being a campaigning organization that relies mostly on activism to relay its information to stakeholders, the organization has been using facebook and twitter among other forms of social media to reach its stakeholders.

Through the social media, the organization is able to reach out to its followers, donors, supporters, and foundation grants and communicate in real-time. For example, these stakeholders are engaged in debates that criticize organization or corporations that do not comply with the values and the objectives of the Greenpeace international.

The use of facebook and twitter has been effective as Greenpeace has used it to communicate with stakeholders on how Apple was developing products with high toxic levels (Bengtson 2010). As a result, Apple was able to reduce its wastes production. Other companies that have been criticized by the stakeholders and Greenpeace international through the social media are Unilever and Nestle (Bengtson 2010). The use of social media to communicate with the different stakeholders has been effective so far as its values and objectives have been restored.

A report by the PWC (2011, p.5) indicate that most of the employees currently are using the social media to share information, research, and network. An organization like the Greenpeace international communicates with its employees through the social media. This is appropriate form of communication given that the organization uses the social media to make its campaigns.

It is a cost effective mode of communication as information can be relayed from the organization management and posted on the organization wall for the employees to see. Although it is a risk venture in dimensions of security and confidentiality, guidelines can be applied to minimize these risks (PWC 2011, p.5).

Other forms based on internet platform

Other than using the social media to reach its stakeholders and convey the required information which is environmental conservation, the Greenpeace international has been involved in the use of blogs, websites, and You Tube (Bengtson 2010). By positing on the organizations blogs and its websites it is easy convenient to have the information readily available to the different stakeholders (Combs

[supanova_question]

Theme of Survival in The Painted Bird, The Death of Dolgushov, and Slumdog Millionaire Compare and Contrast Essay college essay help online

According to Hal Lindsey: “Man can live about forty days without food, about three days without water, about eight minutes without air, but only for one second without hope”.

The reading of Jerzy Kosinski’s novel The Painted Bird (which tells the ‘survivalist’ story, on the part of a Jewish boy, stuck in Eastern Europe during the course of WW2), of Isaac Babel’s story The Death of Dolgushov (which provides readers with a better understanding of what accounted for the realities of Civil War in Russia), and the watching of 2008 film Slumdog Millionaire (which portrays two Indian boys trying to survive in the hostile poverty-stricken environment) do confirm the soundness of Linsey’s idea.

At the same time, however, there are good reasons to think that readers/viewers’ exposure to the earlier mentioned novel, the short story and the movie, helps them realize that people’s strive to survive, despite the impossible odds, does result in altering the very workings of their psyche.

This partially explains why; whereas, in the novel and the movie characters seem to be endowed with a strong desire to survive, the character of Dolgushev in Babel’s story is being presented as someone who had lost its will to live. Apparently, the very nature of Dolgushev’s injury did in fact deprive him of his sense of existential optimism.

People, who get to be exposed to the suffering of others for a long time, eventually come to realize a simple fact that, despite the claims of monotheistic religions, there is no ‘all-loving deity’ up in the sky. The reason for this is simple – it is not only that the God does not seem to care about executing his ‘divine duty’ of providing protection to the abused individuals, but he also appears to be always siding with the abusers.

Therefore, there is nothing odd about the fact that, throughout the entirety of The Painted Bird, the narrator never skips a chance of exposing readers to what appears to be his strongly defined hatred of God, as someone indistinguishable from Devil: “Above me, God Himself stretched, suspended in space, timing the horrendous spectacle with His perpetual clock” (58).

If God does not help a particular individual trying to survive, than it does not make any sense for such an individual to be continually invoking his name, as it would result in lessening his or her chances to survive in the hostile environment even further.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The realization of God’s absence also appears to define the existential mode of growing up Jamal and Salim in the Slumdog Millionaire. Apparently, as both characters were dealing with the realities of a Third World’s living, they were becoming increasingly aware of a simple fact that the best way to go about protecting themselves from abuses, on the part of immoral adults, is to act towards these adults in even less moral manner.

There is a memorable scene in the movie when Salim pulls out his gun, robs Maman of his money and shoots him: “Salim: Maman never forgets, isn’t it right? Maman: I can make an exception… Salim: Sorry (shoots)” (00.58.17). In his particular scene, Salim acted in full accordance with the foremost law of nature, which implies that it is absolutely natural for the living organisms to go about expanding their environmental niches at the expense of eliminating competitors.

In The Death of Dolgushov, the theme of atheism defines story’s semiotics, as well. After all, according to Christianity’s convention, one’s life represents a ‘sanctified value’. Nevertheless, during the time of war, the value of people’s lives drops considerably. After all, unlike what it is being the case with natural resources, ‘human resources’ are fully renewable: “Why all the proposals and marriages, and having fun at the weddings?”

In its turn, this explains the ease with which wounded Dolgushev asks to for a mercy-shot: “You’ll have to waste a cartridge on me” and the ease with which platoon commander shoots him: “Afonka hid the papers in his boot and shot Dolgushov in the mouth”.

Nevertheless, it would be inappropriate to discuss Dolgushev’s weakened desire to survive in regards to merely ideological considerations, on his part. He simply knew that the injury he had sustained was not compatible with life – pure and simple. In this respect, Dolgushev differs rather considerably from the survivalists in Kosinski’s novel and in Babel’s short story.

Another common psychological feature about the people, who deal with the impossible odds, while trying to survive physically, is their reduced sensitivity to pain. Apparently, while striving to survive, the mind ‘turns off’ a number of pain-receptors on survivalist’s body. This is the reason why, on many occasions, Kosinski novel’s narrator seems to have grown mentally adjusted to dealing with an acute physical pain: “The muscles of my arms became conditioned by the hanging and I could endure it for hours without much effort” (133).

The same applies to the character of Jamal in the Slumdog Millionaire. After all, despite the fact that in the film’s initial scene, police officers subject him to torturing, Jamal never ceases to act in a particularly stoic manner – hence, causing his tormenters to wonder about why Jamal’s exposure to the artificially induced sensation of an extreme physical pain did not cause him to come up with the ‘confession’: “Police Inspector: You’ve been here a whole bloody night, what have you been doing? Head Constable: He (Jamal) is a tough guy” (00.04.10). This once again points out to the fact that ‘suffering’ is an essentially relativist notion.

We will write a custom Essay on Theme of Survival in The Painted Bird, The Death of Dolgushov, and Slumdog Millionaire specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The earlier suggestion also pertains within the context of analyzing the scene in The Death of Dolgushov, in which Babel provides readers with the graphic details of Dolgushov’s injury: “He (Dolgushov) sat leaning against a tree… Without lowering his eyes from my gaze, he carefully pulled back his shirt.

His stomach had been ripped open, his intestines were hanging on his knees, and you could see the beating of his heart”. Even though that, given the nature of Dolgushov’s injury, he should have been unable to talk, due to experiencing an unbearable pain, he nevertheless addresses Red Army’s soldiers in a strikingly calm manner.

Nevertheless, unlike what it is being the case with novel and movie’s characters, Dolgushev’s lessened sensitivity to physical pain did not increase his chances to survive. It appears that the actual reason why Dolgushev’s mind had switched off pain-receptors on his body was to ease up the process of dying, on his part.

Given the fact that the majority of today’s Westerners never get to experience any real hardships in their lives, it does not come as a particular surprise that they often tend to adopt a morally-judgmental stance, when it comes to reflecting upon what they consider people’s ‘socially inappropriate’ behavior.

Yet, just as it is being the case with the value of human life, the value of a number of ethical conventions appears highly circumstantial. The reading of Babel’s novel substantiates the full validity of an earlier suggestion. The reason for this is apparent – in The Painted Bird, author does not refer to the notion of evil as something ‘intrinsic’ but rather as something ‘instrumental’: “I also began to understand the extraordinary suc­cess of the Germans…

They pre­ferred attacking other tribes and taking crops from them… That is why they were endowed with all their splendid abilities and talents” (153). Apparently, as time went on, it was becoming increasingly clear to novel’s narrator that ‘evil’ is being as much of an integral part of people’s lives as ‘good’ is – a rather ethically unconventional idea. In its turn, this helped the narrator to adequately assess the surrounding reality – hence, increasing his chances for survival.

Essentially the same idea defines the philosophical sounding of the Slumdog Millionaire movie. After all, in this particular movie, the director had made a point in exposing the acts of stealing, on the part of main characters, as being rather morally ambivalent.

In the scene where American tourists end up having their car ruined by the underage members of a street-gang, Jamal comes up with the statement: “You wanted to see the piece of real India? There it is!” (00.46.23) – hence, implying that there were no objective reasons for the perceptionally arrogant Westerners to think of emanations of India’s ‘cultural richness’ as something necessarily positive, in the first place. This, of course, helped the American tourists to snap out of their arrogance and consequently – to expand their intellectual horizons.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Theme of Survival in The Painted Bird, The Death of Dolgushov, and Slumdog Millionaire by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The theme of moral unconventionalness is being prominent in The Death of Dolgushev, as well. In the scene, following the mercy-killing of Dolgushev, platoon commander Afonka reflects upon the narrator’s unwillingness to finish off his wounded comrade in the following manner: “You guys in glasses have as much pity for our boys as a cat does for a mouse”.

Nevertheless, there is a substantial difference between how the motif of moral unconventionalness extrapolates itself in the novel/movie, on the one hand, and in Babel’s story, on the other. Whereas, by distancing themselves from the virtues of conventional morality, the character of ‘gypsy boy’ in Kosinski’s novel and the characters of Jamal and Salim from the film, were gaining an additional strength to survive, Dolgushev’s clearly defined moral unconventionalness resulted in speeding up his ultimate demise.

Apparently, one’s desire to survive weakens considerably when he or she gets to realize that the price for its temporal survival would be his or her deprivation of much of its ‘original’ humanity (in case with Dolgushev – due to physical incapacitation).

Despite the fact that the earlier mentioned novel, the short story and the film deal with spatially unrelated subject matters, they nevertheless do provide readers/viewers with the in-depth insight into the very essence of ‘survival’, as a mind-affecting process. This conclusion is being fully consistent with paper’s initial thesis.

Bibliography Babel, Isaac. “The Death of Dolgushov.” Filesonic. 2010. Web.

Jerzy Kosinski. The Painted Bird. New York: Grove Press, 1976. Print. Slumdog Millionaire. Dir. Danny Boyle. Perfs. Dev Patel, Madhur Mittal, Irrfan.

Khan. Celador Films/Film4 Productions, 2008.

[supanova_question]

Commercialization of Organ Transplants Essay best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Abstract

Arguments for and Against the Commercialization of Transplants

The Sale of Organs Should be Permitted

Moral Defense and Principles for this Argument

Conclusion

References

Abstract There has been an argument on the issue of commercialization of organ transplants by individuals who are willing. A section of the society holds that this is not ethically right, while others say that this commercialization is ethical as long as an individual gives the consent to it.

This research focused on the view of the society and professionals in this field, and it has concluded that it is ethical to commercialize organ transplant as a way of helping those suffering from defective organs. Using the normative theory of Welfarism, this conclusion is focused on finding the best way of improving the welfare of the society.

Patients have negative impact on the society. If this move will help reduce their numbers without hurting anyone, then the move should be considered as appropriate.

Arguments for and Against the Commercialization of Transplants The issue of commercialization of organ transplant has raised a lot of ethical concerns in the recent past. The controversy that has been raised is on whether or not it is ethically right for this operation to be commercialized. One may decide to donate or sell his or her organs when alive or upon his or her death.

Those who support this commercialization argue that when one dies, it would be ethical to take his or her organs and use it on another individual who needs them. According to Smith (2009), there are many patients who have died because of weak heart, ineffective lungs or kidneys and other sensitive body organs.

Patients who suffer from defective organs are always at risk of dying if measures are not taken to offer them adequate treatment. On the other hand, some people die of causes such as accidents or other illnesses.

It is ethical to have a program where those who die can donate their organs to people who are suffering from defective organs. However, a section of the society has considered this move to be morally unethical. They argue that this would encourage unnatural deaths among the people who have committed themselves to donate their sensitive body organs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Others also argue that it would be inappropriate to extract these organs and transplant them to other people while the dead is not able to accept or reject such a move. They insist that one should donate organs such as kidney when they are still alive, and not when they die.

The Sale of Organs Should be Permitted The sale of organs should be permitted as long as one is not coerced into the deal. The permission should be subject to specific conditions to ensure that ethics is highly maintained in the entire process. As Honneth (2004) says, an individual should always have the final say on whether or not his or her organ can be extracted upon his or her death.

There are people who believe that it is appropriate to extract the sensitive organs from them once they die, and donate it to those in need of it. However, others have a different opinion. Others feel that being buried without all their organs intact would be an incomplete burial.

Whichever perception one has towards this issue, it is important to respect it. The dissenting opinions from a section of the society should not form a basis for denying those willing to help the opportunity to do so. Once one dies, it is necessary to make use of these organs instead of burying them together with the body. It may help others who are in need.

As stated above, this should be based on a clear set of guidelines that must be followed by the concerned individuals. The donor of these organs should approve of this in an official writing.

This document should be kept until he or she dies. Such consents should always be confidential to ensure that these donors are not subjected to any form of criticism from members of the society who have a different feeling over this issue (William, 2014).

The donor should be over 18 years when making this consent, and there must be a clause that allows him or her to withdraw from this arrangement any time before his or her death.

We will write a custom Essay on Commercialization of Organ Transplants specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Lastly, it would be very unethical to facilitate the death of a donor through unnatural ways because the need for the organ cannot wait for the natural death to occur. This will be considered a criminal offence, and it may discourage others from accepting such deals.

Moral Defense and Principles for this Argument The researcher believes that it is morally acceptable to commercialize organ transplant as long as the donor approves of the deal. It is a fact that one can survive on one kidney. If such an individual is willing to donate or sell the other kidney, this cannot be considered as being unethical.

The law allows for this, and therefore, it would be ethical to commercialize this process. It would make it easier for those who are willing to donate organs, and those willing to buy or receive these organs meet easily. The principle of mutual consent of the parties involved allows this to happen.

As long as coercion or any form of intimidation is not used in convincing the donor to give out the organ, this should be considered as an ethical move that is focused on helping people suffering from organ failures.

However, Brezina (2010) warns that it should not be acceptable to have an outlet where these organs are available for sale at any moment without the need of knowing the donor.

This is so because it may encourage unscrupulous individuals to start hunting for these organs by killing innocent people and taking away their organs. This may pose a serious threat to the members of the society. The organ should come straight from a willing donor, to a patient who needs the organ.

Conclusion From the above discussion, it is concluded that commercialization of organ transplants should be acceptable as a way of improving health of some members of the society. Using the theory of Welfarism, this will help improve health of members of the society suffering from organ failures.

As long as approval from the donor is based on mutual consent other than coercion, the society should accept that this is one way of reducing the number of weak patients who cannot participate in the normal developmental activities in the country.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Commercialization of Organ Transplants by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More However, based on the varying beliefs in various communities, this idea may face serious oppositions. There is need to sensitize the society on this issue in order to change their negative perception towards organ transplant and convince them that it is purely done to improve the health conditions of those weak or sick.

References Brezina, C. (2010). Organ donation: Risks, rewards, and research. New York: Rosen Publishers.

Honneth, A. (2004). Morality and recognition. Oxford: Polity.

Smith, J. D. (2009). Normative theory and business ethics. Lanham: Rowman

[supanova_question]

Kraft Foods Group’s Strategic Controls Report (Assessment) best college essay help

Executive Summary Although it may seem ineffective to develop a strategic plan without devising means of implementing the strategy to achieve the anticipated outcomes, the strategic plan forms the foundation of management.

Organizations must understand that for an implementation process to be successful, the culture of an organization, a competent and devoted workforce, the structure of the organization, and the presence of strategic control systems are fundamental.

Organizational culture involves shared visions that impel the workforce to achieve the intended aims in the plan. The organization structure involves the arrangement of authority that is normally important in making informed decisions in the plan.

A motivated, dedicated, and competent workforce inclusive of managers is important as planning requires substantial human resource and their competencies. The strategic control systems are important in an organization because they ensure that the activities and processes focus on mission, vision, and goals, which are central to the success of an organization.

Introduction The contemporary business world continues to experience immense corporate competition, with companies formulating means of achieving the best organizational outcomes (Falshaw, Glaister,

[supanova_question]

All Natural Nutritional Drink-Green Fit Report best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Current marketing situation

SWOT analysis

References

Introduction Competition in the market increases everyday and business enterprises that produce substitute products and services introduce them to the market all the time. This has increased the market competition as the enterprises try to outdo each other. To ensure they achieve the competitive advantage, every enterprise plans its strategy to use in order to gain the market (Aaker

[supanova_question]

Organizational Challenges and the Role of Leadership Analytical Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Economic crisis and its impact on leadership

Negotiations concepts and economic recession

Conclusion

References

Introduction The global economic recession, which began in 2007, emphasized the importance of leadership in modern organizations. Such scholar as Warren Bennis argues that these challenges can force educators and managers to reconsider their understanding of leadership if they want to better respond to various challenges (2007, p. 1).

These individuals will have to change their attitude toward communication, decision-making, and structure of their organizations. There are numerous definitions of this concept; overall, it can be understood as the ability to influence and inspire other people and make them committed to ones ideas and strategies (Northouse 2009, p. 5).

Many researchers such as Penny Tamkin and Stephen Overell believe that post-recession leaders will have to meet much higher standards in order to sustain their companies during this recession (2009, p. 1). Furthermore, special attention should be paid to negotiation strategies since they are an integral element of leadership and have to reflect the interest of an entire organization.

This paper is aimed at analyzing the impacts of economic recession on leadership theory and practice. In particular, it is necessary to single out those aspects of leadership and negotiations practices which become important during this crisis.

Economic crisis and its impact on leadership Overall, the ongoing economic recession prompted many people to reconsider modern definition of leadership and leaders. Many corporate executives as well as educators understood this term as the exercise of power and authority within hierarchical structure of the organization (Tamkin

[supanova_question]

Christian-Muslim Conflict in Nigeria Research Paper college admissions essay help

Introduction Although democracy in Nigeria has given citizens an opportunity to freely express themselves, it has also been the cause of serious political and economic conflicts between different ethnic groups in the country. With at least 140 million inhabitants, Nigeria is Africa’s most populous country with regional power of economic, political and military influence (Clarke, 2013).

The country has, however, gone through serious conflicts ignited by religious affiliations that have led to the loss of many lives over the years (Handley, 2013). According to findings drawn from different case studies, there is a complex relationship that exists between religion and development in Nigeria.

On one hand, widely shared visions of development among Christian and Muslim groups suggest that they are indeed united by jointly held values. Religious groups even provide both criticism and guidance to the state sector on development matters.

However, a reflection on the strong competition that characterizes relations between Christians and Muslims are indicative of the fact that the shared values divide rather than unite religious groups in their development activities.

As a result, where religious groups offer to open their provision of development to non-members, especially across the Christian-Muslim divide, such offers have always been viewed with suspicion.

Furthermore, the existing religious competition appears to be fueled not only by Christian-Muslim relations at the central level but also by the nature of links that these groups have with the government of the day.

Effects of Christian-Muslim Conflict on Economic, Political, and Social System As noted by Williams and Shenley (2013), successive Nigerian presidents have failed to deal with the challenge of spiraling violence between Christians and Muslims in an ongoing religious conflict in the country.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While President Obasanjo and President Goodluck Jonathan are Christians from the south, President Yar’Adua was a northern Muslim who was involved in implementing sharia law, seen as part of the problem. Since 1999, the resulting clashes have claimed more than 14,000 people (Williams

[supanova_question]

Footsteps Historical Tours Report essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Executive Summary The current information age dictates that organizations that are willing to succeed should have a strong presence on the internet. One such company that has developed the objective of increasing its visibility is Footsteps Historical Tours.

It has contracted Inter-Net Ltd, which is an IT consultancy business, to provide it with a strategy to be followed while updating its IT structure to boost its trade on the internet. This report provides the strategy that Footsteps Historical Tours should follow to ensure that it is marketable on the internet in an effort to increase its revenue.

The report proposes that Footsteps Historical Tours should buy the necessary computers and equipment. It also suggests that the company should install a working intranet while also contracting a web designer to equip it with a working website.

The report also proposes that the company should contract an Internet Service Provider and another company to host its website. The investment appraisal, timescale for the operations, and the appropriate recommendations are provided in the report.

Report: Footsteps Historical Tours Strategic Analysis of Footsteps Historical Tours

Footsteps Historical Tours is a travel company that majors on local and international travel. It has been in existence for five years. Established as a tour company, Footsteps Historical Tours initially owned several transport vehicles, which were used for tours around the country.

The company later engaged in international travel, with its customers mainly consisting of business people, families, and individuals traveling internationally and locally. The company’s size has been increasing over the last few years. It is ranked highly in the travel and tours industry in the country.

Other companies operating smaller travel and tours programs for organizations together with small businesses provide competition. Footsteps Historical Tours is in the process of opening offices in many parts of the world.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Currently, it has operations in three countries, employing 170 people in the process. The annual performance as indicated by the revenue returns are in the range of millions of dollars. The management structure consists of the CEO, the board, and the departmental heads.

Marketing Plan

Footsteps Historical Tours has had a successful marketing plan in place. This plan has enabled it to be the market leader in the region in the travel and tours industry. Despite this success, the organization has no working online marketing strategy. The management has not put the same in place to ensure adequate competition along this front.

The company aims to be the leading tours and travel company in the country and the region at large. The management and the marketing department also have the objectives of increasing the firm’s visibility on various platforms, with this activity being projected to increase the returns.

However, the main objective for approaching Inter-Net Ltd is to enable the company to trade as a successful on-line travel business.

By engaging in e-commerce, Footsteps Historical Tours will have a number of benefits. The company will have improved visibility on the internet, thus increasing the number of clients. The other benefit of e-commerce for the firm is that there will be relative reduction of costs since some of the operations such as travel bookings can be done online.

This situation will also reduce overcrowding at the offices. It will increase efficiency and/or allow room for better information management. Many of the organizations and companies operating in the travel and tours industry have shifted their operations to the online platform.

This move has created a new avenue for competition. Footsteps Historical Tours will have better competitiveness if it engages in e-commerce. The firm will also be able to increase the number of services that it can provide including marketing.

We will write a custom Report on Footsteps Historical Tours specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Some of the other benefits that Footsteps Historical Tours stands to enjoy through the development of e-commerce and the use of the internet as a business include coverage of new geographic areas that were previously out of reach and expansion of the customer base.

The company will be accessible to all people in different parts of the world. This will be beneficial in its goal of regional and global expansion. The program will also be a platform for the corporation, with other companies sharing the goals and objectives of Footsteps Historical Tours.

There are currently a number of weaknesses that may influence negatively on the development and maintenance of an effective online marketing strategy for this organization. One of the weaknesses is that business owners are currently inexperienced in the IT industry.

They will have the challenge of maintaining the operations. The management is willing to learn the utilization of the strategy at the company. This step will be important in countering the weakness. There is currently no infrastructure at the organization to handle the proposed e-commerce project, and hence another weakness.

However, the organization is financially able to put in place the required infrastructure. The main threats for the organization and the online marketing strategy are the negative publicity that the project may face together with the poor reception from employees who may not be well experienced in the use of the internet.

A number of issues will have to be implemented so that the plan may succeed. The organization needs to invest in hardware such as computers, routers, working internet connectivity, and other computer accessories. Back-up for the machines and power back-ups will also be needed at the organization’s branches and headquarters.

Each department will have to equip employees with computers at their desks and carry out programs to train them on how to use this infrastructure. The company will then invest in appropriate software such as web browsers and operating systems that are compatible with the machines and the data connection networks.

The next step after the investment in the hardware and software will be the creation of a special intranet where all departments will be connected, with employees being provided with special passwords to transact with on this network. A special internet service provider (ISP) will then be contracted to run the intranet at the organization.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Footsteps Historical Tours by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It will also connect the organization to the World Wide Web. After the development of an intranet and connection to the internet through the ISP, the organization will then need the creation of a website together with a company that will be contracted to host the website with annual payments.

This website will contain the description of the services that the company offers. The main use for this website will be to allow travel bookings, payments, printing of receipts, downloads for the organization’s services, and marketing the company among others. After the implementation of this strategy, the company will be present on the internet to provide its services.

After the company has established its presence on the internet, it will need to engage other organizations providing related services such as online payments. The collaboration with these online companies will make the operations easier.

The strategy will also be a marketing plan to allow users of these partner companies to see Footsteps Historical Tours on their web pages. It is also necessary for Footsteps Historical Tours to embrace the use of online marketing. Some of the online materials to be used include web promotion on other websites and search engines.

The development of an e-commerce site is worthless if there are no likely customers who can visit the site or know of its existence. To enable the web page to be easily discoverable, the company should have keywords listed by the major search engines, with appropriate pay for the service.

The tactics to be utilized include e-mail marketing, affiliate marketing, banner advertising, rich media advertising, publicity, and virtual malls.

The organization will need to put in place these measures to increase its online visibility, thus ensuring that the website is visible to offer information to as many customers as possible. These services will cost the firm in the initial setting up. However, the cost benefits will be evident after some time.

Investment Appraisal

The investment appraisal for Footsteps Historical Tours IT strategy is possible through consideration of the appropriate costs of the infrastructure and operational costs. The estimated amount required to set up the company so that it can trade online is $180,000.

The bulk of this money will be used to purchase the required equipment and develop the adequate infrastructure for the online services. The average estimated cost for setting up appropriate hardware on each desk in the organization is $5000.

This money will be used to purchase a fast and cheap computer, software for the computer, and the backup required at each desk. In total, the organization will need to equip 100 desks with computers and software, with the amount totaling to $50,000.

The development of the intranet at the company headquarters will cost an estimated $60,000 since the organization is not large. The rest of the money will be used for the development of a website, development of the marketing tools on the internet, and contracting an internet service provider.

The design for a good website is estimated to cost $15,000. The amount for one year’s hosting is a maximum of $60,000. The estimated cost for the maintenance of the networks is $20,000 a year.

The project will be successful. Managers can expect a growth in the sales and the number of clients visiting them. This means a growth by over 300% in revenue. It will cover the costs of setting up the network and maintenance.

The estimated total cost in the first year will be roughly $250,000. The revenue will increase by $600,000 because of the online transactions and the estimated doubling of customers by the end of the year. This means that the overall benefit of the project will be the creation of $350,000. This will increase in the subsequent years as the company embraces e-commerce.

Timescale

The company should start the acquisition of machines that are necessary in the creation of the network in the first three months. Since the organization has the available funds, tendering should be conducted, with the winning contractor delivering the machines within three months of the tendering process.

Another tender that the company should advertise is the supply of networking materials and the creation of an intranet within the premises.

This should also have the same timeline as the delivery of computers and other equipment in the organization. The company should install the network and computers in another month. At the same time, an internet service provider should be sought.

The next step will be the creation of a website and the development of an appropriate marketing strategy on the site and other websites. The estimated time that the process will take is five months. By the sixth month, the management should have employees suing the internet and the intranet as their workstations.

The organizations should also install a WIFI network at the workplace, thus ensuring unlimited internet connectivity for employees. The returns of the project should be visible within a year, with the expected outcome being the increase in sales volumes.

Recommendations There are a number of recommendations in the application and maintenance of the IT strategy at Footsteps Historical Tours. The company should ensure that it puts in place these recommendations to assure positive productivity. Some of the recommendations include:

Footsteps Historical Tours should embark on training its employees on the use of the internet.

The company should also set up a trial of the website to be used before the installation of the intranet and the contracting of an internet service provider to allow assessment of web performance.

Footsteps Historical Tours should also invest in campaigns to popularize the new strategy to its employees and the public.

An IT department should be setup at Footsteps Historical Tours to oversee the implementation of the online marketing strategy.

[supanova_question]

Development Opportunities in Procurement Service Essay college essay help

The ever-expanding technologies, changing customers’ needs, and the establishment of fresh business enterprises have led to the abrupt increase in development opportunities related to procurement. It is worrying to note that a number of entrepreneurs are uncertain about how to make over their procurement companies to decrease costs and at the same time make the most from supplier dealings.

To make the best out of these opportunities, we are planning to open a procurement service in Oregon, United States. Four members will be responsible for the service. Each of the members will be in charge of one part of the service. Our business majorly targets the Chinese customers who want to buy luxury goods.

As we plan to be one of the leading providers of procurement service in Oregon, we aim to help our customers to cut down their procurement cost, improve their shareholder worth, and realize improved productivity by cutting down their operation cost.

We will leverage our relations with local and foreign businesses to ensure that our customers get value for their money and get access to technology-based edge services. These abilities combined with our business-dedicated personnel will see our clients save much of their spending.

We plan to have our own website. Thus, customers can place their orders online. Through our online services, a client can log into our website, look through the available goods, and initiate their orders. Thereafter, the client can wait for the supplier’s approval.

In general, undertaking procurement online has many benefits for our clients because the system has integrated many features tailored at easing purchasing processes. As such, our systems will contain online catalogs. These catalogs hold a number of luxury goods from a number of suppliers.

In this regard, our clients will be required to confer with one place to locate their required products. In addition, our website will offer our clients with multiple means of communicating with their preferred suppliers. By doing so, they can select their preferred means of delivery.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Once our clients access their products through our online-based procurement method, they will recognize the advantages without more ado. Their usual administrative cost met with their individual purchases will be cut down.

This will be realized because the majority of the paperwork will be done with the use of software rather than the workers themselves. In addition, the usual lengthy time between initiating an order and delivery will be significantly decreased.

Automation will make more efficient the sharing of the essential information. Given that our services will enable consolidated purchasing, our clients can keep track of their transactions.

Another reason to procure with us is that our clients can shop online without having to worry about meeting taxes on their products. This service paired with cheap shipping cost, make procuring with us cheaper compared with conventional procurements.

We will work hand in hand with our customers to add value and surpass their expectations by enhancing our customer service, tools, organization, and the proficiency of our personnel.

With our exclusive mixture of abilities meeting all features of procurement, we will come up with a robust delivery scheme to ensure that our clients are satisfied and enhance their dealings by delivering real, substantial, and continued solutions.

In general, we believe that our integrated services will distinguish us from our competitors. Ultimately, we hope to be one of the leading providers of procurement service in Oregon and beyond.

We will write a custom Essay on Development Opportunities in Procurement Service specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

Wassily Kandinsky: the abstract expressionist Analytical Essay scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Abstract painting

Composition and improvisation

Geometric paintings and publications

Kandinsky in Paris

The expressionists movement

Conclusion

Bibliography

Footnotes

Introduction Wassily Kandinsky, born in 1866 in Russia was one of the pioneer abstract artists. The first pieces of paintings he created were the Improvisation and compositions in 1910. Many things influenced the working method he used. This influences include; the paintings he saw done by Monet.

He got motivation by the opera by Wagner that made him think that melody could be used to indicate shade1. He got awed by the different things he experiences in his tours. In Paris, he saw exhibitions done by different painters. While, in Munich, he studied theosophy that played a crucial role in shaping his aesthetic values.

He began his painting career by painting things that had a Russian topic. He tries to match the value of post-impressionistic process of painting with the palette.

This helps the people identify with the subject of his painting because such features art established in the local elf tales and folks songs. A good example of such work is the one seen in his painting, Composition 2. He later explains that the theme of the painting based on life in Motley2.

However, his theme of painting changed after he visited Paris. While in Paris, he got a chance to see landscape paintings. He then started painting fauvist-motivated paintings3. There was also a difference in his use of color. He shifted from the use of naturalistic and evocative colors to communicative colors.

His focused shifted from painting Russian theme based paintings to painting fauvist and landscapes. He focused more on three themes; impression, composition and improvisation. He described the paintings he made from the direct impersonation of the external environment as impression.

Improvisation, on the other hand, was the paintings he made from motivation he got from the things that happened in the spiritual level. Lastly composition was those paintings that he made based on the inspiration he got from both the improvisation and impression paintings4. However, the main reason for the development of such paintings was the long time that he spent in Munich studying anthropology.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He made his first publication on abstract painting during this time. He concerned himself with comparing colors to the day to day activities in the world. For example, he uses the yellow color to show the articulateness of different sounds on earth. Blue to compare it with the heavens and the sky. Color represented sounds and places and every color used in a painting have a different meaning5.

Abstract painting After his stay in Munich, he settled in Germany with his mistress who was also a painter. This was where he began his journey in the world of abstract painting. This encouraged by the fact that he loved paintings, which had its lines, shapes and colors giving the inner meaning of things.

He did not want paintings that had objects that easily identified in a painting6. His main aim was to create paintings that could stir deep emotions in its viewers. However, he was not the only abstract painter at that time. There were other painters who tried to paint the same painting he was doing. This, however, changed after the World War 1. Before the war, there were many other accomplished artists who were doing abstract paintings including Cubists7.

The first prime abstract painting that earned him the title the pioneer’ was his composition 7 that he made in 1913. Encircled was another painting he made in 1911 that also proved his change of painting from recognizable to abstract things. His other significant paintings that also marked the begin of his work in painting abstract 5things were the “Landscape with Steeple”, “Improvisation XIV” With the Black Arch,” “Black Lines,” and “Autumn” and the “The Blue Rider”8.

Composition and improvisation Most of his paintings focused on composition and improvisation. The paintings focused on the spiritual aspects of life. It was a portrayal of the spiritual affiliation of the people and nature as a whole. The three types of paintings can be explained by music analogies that go well with these themes.

It was during one of his performances that he felt conviction towards abstract. He felt that each color had a different and mystifying existence unique to itself9. Composition required a lot of mental concentration as it was motivated by the mind and other internal factors unlike the impression.

When painting the compositions, he numbered them and based each composition on a different theme. However, there were times when the themes of an improvisation and a composition matched. This can be seen in his composition 6 and improvisation Deluge. The two paintings try to present a new world or a new beginning of the old world.

We will write a custom Essay on Wassily Kandinsky: the abstract expressionist specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Kandinsky always made sure that he never forgot about a topic or theme used in the previous paintings. He could hide a certain meaning in a painting and bring it out in the next painting. This can be seen his painting improvisation 30 and improvisation 31. In improvisation 30, he braces the topic of a sea battle, but does not make clear. He makes it clear in the next painting of an improvisation that his theme in the previous painting was sea battle10.

The painting done by Kandinsky was susceptible to change due to the changes experienced in the political, economic and social factors. Political instability during the World War 1 made Kandinsky reconsider moving back to his native country. This meant that he had to end his relationship with his mistress Gabriele Münter,11.

After resettling back in Russia, he married a younger woman and lived in Moscow. He got a job as a professor at the Moscow Academy of Fine Arts in 1918. During the times, time of the Interlude, he did not find enough time to do any substantial paintings12. He did some paintings that portrayed his change of painting style from his paintings in Munich.

His paintings characterized by water colors and canvases which were quite different from his previous paintings, where he focused mainly on landscapes.. However, he contributed to the growth of art when he built artistic institutes in different parts of the country. He started schools like; Russian Academy of Artistic Sciences and the Institute of Artistic Culture.

He also played a crucial role in the construction of museums across the country. He shifted from the unprompted, poetic, and unrefined style to a more purposeful, lucid constructional way of painting. This change was slow and it can be felt, and seen in his paintings that include the “White Line”, and “Blue Segment13.”

His life in Russia ended after the soviet government shifted its concentration form acceptable arts to social arts. Kandinsky had no other option but to leave the country. He left Moscow with his wife and went to Bauhaus. Here, he got a job as a lecturer at a local Bauhaus university. However, the university did not offer courses in non applied art, and he had to wait until 1925 before he started lecturing on non-applied painting14.

Geometric paintings and publications While, in Bauhaus, he continued with his advance geometric abstraction. However, he was more dynamic and focused more on the aspect-filled painting area. This was like a reminder of the early paintings he had made while in Munich. During his stay in Bauhaus, he became interested in supposition, and he started publishing books and articles15.

His last pieces of paintings in Germany were the Development in Brown’. This painting thought to be targeting the Nazi brown-shirted storm troopers, who did not appreciate his paintings. They claimed that his paintings were disintegrating.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Wassily Kandinsky: the abstract expressionist by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More A significant change in his painting style after the First World War was the shift from the use of landscapes to blank spaces. This effect got empowered by the use of geometric dimension in the paintings. In addition to the geometric dimension, he also used standard forms and other drawings that looked like the living organisms. The messages probed the reader to search for the inner explanation of the painting16.

This was the last painting he did while he was still the citizen of Germany. The closure of the university of Bauhaus forced him to relocate to Paris France.

Here in Paris, he drew paintings that gave the public intrinsic view of the world. His paintings gave the public a chance to see the abstract things in life as separate and distinct from the ordinary things.17. He focused on using all his senses and soul during his painting. His aim was not to create pictures or decorations in his paintings, but to stir up some emotions in the public18.

His aim was to involve the viewer while painting. This could make it easier for the artist to paint and create a scenario that will capture the viewer’s attention. His use of concealed imagery in his paintings was a technique he used to reflect the state of confusion that was common in the world.

His painting in Paris was not as blooming as in the past areas where he settled. Here, people did not appreciate their presence, and the existence of abstract painting. He spent lonely hours in his apartment with his wife in the apartment. This forced him to lead a lonely life without interaction with other painters. The foreign artists he met there in Paris did not accept him as their own. The only option he had his old friends as the only art friends19.

His last evolution in the world of painting occurred in Paris. He no longer used a mixture of primary colors that were common in his past paintings. He started using supple colors that had a more sophisticated and delicate texture. This new range of color forms went in line with the forefront in Paris that always appeared to be biomorphic20.

This goes a long way to show how well he was in touch with his inner being. His paintings represented a life that was full of excitement and not one that was dull and full of boredom21. Some of the pictures he created during this time include the pictures “Sky Blue”, painted in the early 1940, “Complex-Simple”, of 1939 and the, “Colorful Ensemble”, which he painted in 1938.

Kandinsky in Paris It was during his stay in Paris when the Second World War began. This was a period marked by scarcity in the supply of painting materials. This forced him to use less paint in paintings making the drawings shallow and pale. The situation worsened and forced him to start painting on small cardboard22.

His focused shifted once again to the theory part of abstract arts. In his publications, he said that arts put a new world, a new beginning and a fresh start on bare ground without the certainty of its existence. He tried to prove that the two worlds were not different and if given a chance can integrate in to one thing23.

Even up to his last days on earth, Kandinsky never lost the sense of his innermost feeling while painting. He drew strength from his inner being, and the abstraction arose from the determination, concision and vigor that was deep within him. Kandinsky died in 1994 in Paris, but his life spent contributing to the development of abstract art or the arts of expression24.

His work was one of the major breakthroughs in the world of abstract arts. It was one of the finest works that helped guide the beginning of a new age in the world of abstract movements. He played a leading role in the beginning of the abstract expression era of painting.

The expressionists movement This movement emerged in the early 1940s in leading cities in the world including New York. The artists in this movement wanted to change the common believe that art was just any other thing that had no meaning. They wanted art to be seen as a way of thinking, something that could be used to pass information; a communication tool25.

The existence of abstract expression had been in existence for a long time, but the expressionists wanted people to focus on the whole process. They did experiments on how to engage themselves fully in the work of painting. They wanted to engage themselves in the whole process, feel the texture of the painting, understand the tools used and appreciate the work26.

The abstract expression that erupted in New York was commonly known as the ‘New York School’. They adopted the way of painting used by Kandinsky. They refused to use the common way of painting used in the United States of America in the past. They wanted a painting that reflected their own experiences and one that was in touch with their inner beings.

They rejected the use of social realism prevalent in the Soviet Union and the geometric abstraction. They were interested in their own individual work. However, this changes in 1943 when some of the abstract expressionists began appreciating the work done by others27.

Later on in the 1940s the different expressionist’s artists exhibited their and the work done by the pioneer abstract artists like Kandinsky in the art galleries around the country. The artists also formed groups, and started social organization where they met and shared ideas.

However, this was short lived because the onset of the cold war in early 1950s. The expressionists who were proud of the work in pure romantic and freedom, in their deeds, affected by the war. Most of the abstract expressionist artists went back into the old way of paintings that involved the use of objects and theme in their painting28.

Conclusion Wassily Kandinsky played a crucial role in the evolution of the abstract painting. He never lost touch with the spiritual aspect of the painting. This approach applied by the expressionist in the early 1940s and 1950s. The artists always felt an inner fulfillment in the expressionist art. They use color order to represent their inner feelings and thoughts, and at the same time passing vital messages to the public.

This has not been a pleasant thing. The onsets of abstract expressionists affected by many factors, but the most common ones were the political instability29. Many up coming abstract artist have to change their residential areas during and after wars..Others that are not successful loses their lives in the war stricken countries.

Political instability causes shortage in supply of the materials required. This forces the artists to seek other alternatives that may not suit his painting style. However, most of the artist who have a passion for abstract art do not lose touch with their painting30.

Bibliography Alberti, Leon. Alberti on Painting. Translated with Introduction and Notes, by John R. Spencer. London: Yale University Press, 1966.

Ball, Peter. Bright Earth: The Invention of Colour. London: Penguin, 2002.

Banai, Alison. Colour after Klein: Re-Thinking Colour in Modern and Contemporary Art. London: Barbican Art Gallery: Black Dog Publishing, 2005.

Bill, Max. Wassily Kandinsky. Paris: Maeght, 1951.

Bomford, Dan. Colour Pocket Guides to the National Gallery. London: National Gallery,company, Ltd,. 2000.

Bowlt, John. The Life of Vasilii Kandinsky in Russian art: a study of “On the spiritual in art” by Wassily Kandinsky. Newtonville, MA.: Oriental Research Partners, 1984.

Callen, Allan. Techniques of the Impressionists. London: Orbis Publishing, 1982.

Cennini, Cennino: The Craftsman’s Handbook, translated by Daniel P Thompson, Jr. Yale University Press, 1960.

Dabrowski, Magdalena. Kandinsky Compositions. New York: Museum of Modern Art, 2002.

Delamare, Fred. The Story of Dyes and Pigments. New York: H.N. Abrams, 2000.

Düchting, Hajo. The Avant-Garde in Russia. New York : Oxford Publishers,2009.

Düchting, Hajo. Wassily Kandinsky 1866–1944: A Revolution in Painting. Taschen, 2000.

Ferrier, John. The Fauves: The Reign of Colour: Matisse, Derain, Vlaminck, Marquet, Camoin, Manguin, Van Dongen, Friesz, Braque, Dufy. Paris: Terrail, 1992.

Gage, Janet. Color and Meaning: Art, Science, and Symbolism. Berkeley; Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1999.

Girard, Raymond. Matisse the Sensuality of Colour, New Horizons. Italia: Editoriale Libraria Trieste, 1994.

Golding, John. Paths to the Absolute: Mondrian, Malevich, Kandinsky, Pollock, Newman, Rothko and Still. London: Thames and Hudson, 2002.

Grohmann, Will. Wassily Kandinsky. Life and Work. New York: Harry N Abrams Inc., 1958.

Kahnweiler, Daniel. The Rise of Cubism in Art in Theory, 1900-2000: An Anthology of Changing Ideas. edited by Harrison, C., and Wood, P., 203-209. Oxford; Malden: Blackwell, 1949/2003

Kandinsky, Wassily. Kandinsky, Complete Writings on Art. Da Capo Press, 1996.

Kandinsky, Wassily. Klänge. Munich: Verlag R. Piper

[supanova_question]

Critical Perspective on Management and Leadership Report best essay help: best essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Case Set Up

Case Study Analysis

Bureaucracy

Transformational Leadership

Recommendations

Conclusion

References

Introduction Critical Management Studies (CMS) form a substitute to a number of conservative administration presumptions and approaches. The key reason behind the development of CMS was to provide a transformative approach to traditional management. CMS is a sceptical look at the management and organisational structures that are currently in use.

These structures are evaluated and criticised based on their demonstrated social and ecological sustainability (Adler 2007). Contrary to the popular belief, CMS is not rooted on the focus on individual organisations and their managers’ poor management practices (Adler 2007).

This belief, which is propagated by the outsiders of CMS, is largely untrue. CMS stands for the critical assessment of the wider organisational and management structures.

Adler states that CMS focuses on ordinary elements such as ecological pessimism, public discrimination, and pitiable management that are displayed in the wider social and economic structures whose traditions have been simulated by long-established administrators and the evolving conformist organisations.

The current framework of CMS entails the critical assessment of issues in management such as marketing, organisational strategies, information systems, accounting, organisational relations, and international networks (Clegg, Dany,

[supanova_question]

EU Zone Crisis Exploratory Essay best college essay help

There are a number of criteria that member of Eurozone should follow to be signed in. Most importantly, the inflation rates of the aspiring member state should not be above 1.5 percentage points. The second factor should be government finance; both annual government deficit and gross government debt. The other important factor is exchange rate of the applicant countries. It is required that, the aspiring member state, must have joined mechanism for two consecutive years. The last and equally crucial criterion is long-term interest rates.

Henceforth, an analysis is drawn of the causes of crisis in the Eurozone. The main crisis in this zone is financial crisis. The crisis is said to have been caused by structural layout of member states. This is because different member states have different level of developments.

Financial needs of all different countries were determined and means of curbing contagion were created for the year 2012. All factors leading to spread of the Eurozone crisis were studied carefully. Emphasis was laid on the change of inflation and interest rates over the years using graphs and charts.

This consequently, helped to establish the effect the crisis on the economy of E.U. In addition, the effect of this Eurozone crisis did spread to other countries. Hence there was a need for careful analysis of the effect of the crisis in other countries other than Greece.

It should be noted that, if the Eurozone crisis is not tackled in the excellent time, there would be minimal hope if any, to realise a stable E.U currency. Therefore, strategic plans are supposed to be put into places to eradicate this crisis for good.

In conclusion, concerted efforts of all stakeholders, citizens, policy makers and politicians in the E.U. are needed to ensure that they adopt effective policies aimed at restoring the financial strength of the counties in the region.

[supanova_question]

Balance of payment crisis Essay college essay help: college essay help

Balance of payment crisis is also known as currency crisis. It is characterized by spontaneous devaluation of currency for a country. This devaluation often affects the foreign exchange market. The crisis arises from persistent imbalances in the balance of payment.

The impact of currency crisis has more effect on a fixed exchange regime than a floating exchange regime. Further, such crisis might have an impact on the foreign reserves of a country thus creating instability in the economy (BBC 1).

An example of a balance of payment crisis is the European sovereign – debt crisis. The Euro crisis is a balance of payment problem that was characterized by a persistent rise in the amount of net debt over several years. The high amounts of net debt led to collapse of the economies within the European region.

The five regions which were adversely affectedare Greece, Portugal, Ireland, Spain and Italy. These countries failed to produce adequate economic growth to repay the debt balances. The debts were in the form of bonds.

It is not only these five countries that felt the negative impact of the Euro crisis but various countries in all the continents suffered the consequences of the Euro crisis. The epitome of the crisis was felt in late 2011. Though the five regions started to feel the impact from late 2008 (BBC 1).

The crisis was instigated by unproductive fiscal policies that were implemented by the governments of these countries. The governments instituted unsustainable fiscal policies. For instance, these countries fund their budget deficits using debt.

This led to the creation of Ponzi scheme hence the large amounts of debt balance and budget deficits. The economies started to experience slow economic growth and reduced tax revenue. In some countries such as Greece, the amount of debt surpassed the magnitude of economy (BBC 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The crisis in these countries had a serious impact on the financial institutions. Capital providers started to demandextremely high returns on the amount of capital they invested especially in government bonds. This resulted in an increase in the cost of capital in the countries such as Greece.

Besides, it also resulted in an increase inthe cost of borrowing in these countries. Before the crisis, the banks reported increases in revenue which were not supportable. When the economy of these countries collapsed, banking institutions were the most affected. It is because the banks reported revenues which could not be earned.

Besides, banks that invested massively in bonds of these countries experienced heavy losses. Despite these indications, some countries did not attempt to alter their fiscal policies thus making the situations worse.Countries which changed their fiscal policies felt less consequences than the countries such as Greece and Portugal.

These countries had to receive a bailed out. For instance, Greece was bailed out of the crisis twice. The first bailout amounted to $163 billion in 2011. The second bailout occurred in March in 2012 and it amounted to $157 billion.

The bailwas provided by the International Monetary Fund and European Union. Similarly, countries such as Portugal received bail in 2010 while Ireland received bail in 2011. All the bailwas in the form of restructuringdebts (BBC 1).

Several measures were put in place tostabilize the affected economies in the European regions. First, the European Central Bank bought all the government bonds to ensure that the interest rates stabilize.This initiative was branded Long Term Refinancing Operation.

The initiative saved some countries that had a small amount of debt. The measures that were put in place partly solved the currency crisis. The countries have not fully recovered from the currency crisis (BBC 1).

We will write a custom Essay on Balance of payment crisis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited BBC. Greece in crisis: How European Debt problem affects you. 2013. Web. .

[supanova_question]

History of France Economics over the Past 20 Years Research Paper college essay help: college essay help

Demographics France consists of a population of 65,312,249 with 64.7% of the inhabitants lying between the ages of 15 and 64. It has a population growth rate of 0.5%. The main and official language in the country is French. It is spoken by one hundred percent of the population. However, some regional dialects do exist such as Breton and Provencal. Previously, France used to use the French Franc as its major currency.

However, after entering the Euro zone, it adopted the Euro as its official currency. In 2011, the official exchange rate for the Euro against the dollar was 0.755; this was an increase from the previous year of 0.434 Euros. France is a republican government. It operates under its own constitution and that of the European Union.

The country has a chief of state or President called Nicholas Sarkozy. It has a Prime Minster who is the head of government as well as a cabinet that the president appoints in consultation with the prime minister. Elections in France are done after five years; subsequently the president must appoint the Prime Minister.

The country has a bicameral parliament and this has assisted in maintaining a balance between the executive as well as the legislative arm. The predominant industries in France include energy or power generation, retail as well as tourism. France is the third strongest country in the global tourism sector.

In terms of the economic indicators, the Nominal growth rate of 2010/2011 was reported as 2.145 trillion. This was an increase of 34 trillion US dollars from the previous year.

Furthermore the GDP per capita was 1.5% and this was an improvement from the previous year which grew by -2.5%. It should be noted that the country’s economy was adversely affected by the global economic crisis in 2009. It had an adverse decrease in almost all economic indicators.

Unemployment rates were at 9.3%, which was an increase of 0.2% from the previous year. Additionally, the country’s budget deficit was at 0.18 trillion dollars. This emanated from revenues of 1.26 trillion US dollars and expenditures of 1.44 trillion US dollars. In terms of percentage comparisons to the GDP, the budget deficit was -7% of the GDP. The balance of payment accounts was 54.4 billion dollars as of 2011.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The country is ranked 193rd in the world owing to these figures. Inflation currently stands at 2.5%; this was an increase from the previous year which recorded an inflation rate of 1.7%. It should be noted that the current figures reflect the economic crisis and the government stimulus efforts that the French government is undertaking. It is experiencing one of its worst budget deficits and public debts in the decade. Therefore the government has embarked on a serious expenditure freeze to prevent further increases in debt levels.

Behavior of the same economic indicators over the past 20 years The nominal GDP growth rates for France have largely been increasing over the past two decades. Some minor exceptions have arisen between 2008 and 2009, but most of them have been positive. In the early 1990s, the nominal GDP growth rates stood at 2.645 on the mid 1990s, they were at 2.248.

The nominal GDP continued to rise and peaked at 3.871 in 200. It then started decreasing; in 2003 to become 0.888. In the next year, a dramatic increase occurred when the nominal GDP increased by 2.346. These increases continued until 2007 when the country’s rate was at 2.31.

However it began reducing to -0.213, -2.632 in 2008 and 2009. Nonetheless, this increased in 2010 to 1.384. On the other hand the GDP per capita was a different account. In 1990, it stood at 1.4% percentage points. In 1995, it was 1.4 also, in 2000, the figures were 1.9 while in 2003 they reduced to 1.6. In 2009 they reduced by 0.2% while in 2010 they increased to 2.5%; this was equivalent to $33,100.

Unemployment in France has been at an average of 9.5 percent in 1990, the country underwent a percent decrease in unemployment, which stood at -4.48% from the previous year. In 1993, unemployment figures increased from the previous year by 12.86%. They eventually reduced in ’95 to -4.56%. In 2000, unemployment went down by -13.155. In 2002, there was an increase of 6.15% from the previous year.

In 2003, this figure corresponded to 0.94%. In 2006, the trend again changed to a decrease of -0.62. Later on in 2008, there was a percentage decrease of -6.68%. In 2009, the country had landmark increases in unemployment levels. There was a 21.67% increase from 2008.

In 2001, unemployment stood at 9.787, which was an increase of 3.02% from the previous year. In the past 20 years, the highest unemployment rate occurred in 1996 and this corresponded to 11.583 while the lowest figures were in 2001 corresponding to 8.392. Overly, France’s unemployment levels have never gone beyond 12% over the past two decades.

We will write a custom Research Paper on History of France Economics over the Past 20 Years specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The budget deficits have always been a problem for this country in the past twenty years (OECD, 2005). In the late 1990s, they stood at -2.6. In 2000, they reduced to -1.8. The country had -1.5, -4.1, -2.9, -2.7, -7.5 in 2002, 2004, 2006, 2008 and 2010 respectively. It should be noted that these figures are quoted as percentages of the GDP.

The balance of payments in France was quite strong in the 1990s but dramatically weakened in the 2000s. In the early 1990s, the country boasted of a surplus of 31 billion Francs. This trend continued to the mid 1990s where the country kept exporting commodities to European countries.

In 1995, the country had about 11,175 million US dollars worth of a trade surplus. The surpluses stopped in 2001 when the country reported a deficit. Later on in 2002, this changed again into a surplus of approximately 4.1 billion US dollars. In 2005, this started reducing and became a deficit of 12, 395 million US dollars.

From that year onwards, France’s balance of payments has remained negative. In 2010 it had a budget deficit of 56.13 billion and in 2011, the balance of payment figures were at -54.4 billion. This is the reason why the country is struggling to control these figures through minimal government stimulus plans as well as expenditure freezes.

The lowest inflation rates ever recorded by France were in 2009 where they stood at -0.7%. Over the past twenty years. Inflation rates in this country have been at an average of 4.93. In the early 2000s, they were maintained at between 1-3%. They started decreasing between 2007 and 2008 and reached the record low of -0.7%. In 2010, the figures stood at 1.7% while in 2011 they were at 2.5%.

Historical relationships between the following Variables Real GDP and labor productivity

These figures are directly related; real GDP has grown in proportion to labor productivity in France. This is especially true for the period between 1995 and 2002. It should be noted that the numbers are not as high as they are in other developed nations such as the United States. The relationship between real GDP and productivity in this country also mirrors the performance of other EU countries (Artige

[supanova_question]

Concept of United Nations Conventions on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG) in Business Report (Assessment) best essay help

Trading in the global market means that transactions are done with businesses located in different parts of the world. There are quite a number of challenges that businesses and organizations face while doing transactions based on the CISG treaty.

By joining the United Nations Conventions on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG), there are several organizations and businesses that have widened their ability to face these challenges with victory.

According to the argument posed by Flechtner (1), this consortium is one of the best in ensuring that businesses realize the required international commercial laws.

It is best known for helping its member businesses and organizations to avoid or reduce the legal obstacles connected to international trade and commerce. It unifies the laws and makes them easy to understand and interpret, and also redefines the whole contract.

The advantage is that the law is upgraded depending on the conditions of the global economy. The treaty does so in a bid to ensure that all businesses that are under it enjoy all the benefits associated with its membership.

Aliano (1) explains the implications for any business that wishes to operate within the countries that have not agreed to the United Nations Conventions on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG). Ever since it was started in 1980, the treaty has succeeded in bringing down the high number of obstacles that businesses face in their quest for profits through the global economy.

Businesses enjoy benefits of fair international trade laws. The treaty demands no written laws. In as much as it acts as a union, there are challenges and hardships associated with it. It is complicated and may sometimes be the main reason why some countries have not yet adopted to it.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There is a tough implication especially for countries that attach more importance to their local laws. In some cases, these laws might not conform to what the treaty laws have stated. In this case, it is better for the business not to accept to trade under the treaty. Brazil, UK and South Africa are some of the countries that do not trade under CIGS.

Implications are that they are not protected by the CISG law and as such, they trade on their own. In addition, they have no treaty to aid in ratifying the international trade law. This makes sure that the laws of their mother countries do not contradict with the laws of the treaty.

In cases whereby the CISG laws are likely to interfere with the local trade laws for a certain country, it is the highest point that the businesses shift to other different treaties. According to Vollmers (1), the CISG laws apply only for transactions that are conducted internationally.

This implies that a business has the freedom to choose whether to adapt to the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. This gives room for organizations to trade without being forced into unnecessary laws. Businesses that are not bound by local law would rather choose to work under the CISG treaty.

This is due to the fact that it helps in closing the gaps that trade might bring to businesses, as well as the obstacles that businesses face in the course of trading. The latter scenario may be pronounced largely on a global scale.

Works Cited Aliano, Tiffany. United Nations Convention on Contracts for The International Sale of Goods (Cisg). Socyberty, USA. 2011. Web.

Flechtner, Harry. United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. (1980). 2008. Web.

We will write a custom Assessment on Concept of United Nations Conventions on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods (CISG) in Business specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Vollmers, Todd. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. U. S department of Commerce, USA. 2002. Web.

[supanova_question]

assignment, you’ll use the readings to think of a political issue today and how debates around federalism impact various understandings of that issue. You’ll find a news source online that discusses that problem and then write a substantive paragraph in which you summarize that source (be sure to include a citation) and explain how it connects back to debates about federalism. For example, if you are interested in mass incarceration, you might find a source that examines the federal prison system or federal policing agencies versus the idea of crime as a distinctly local matter. Other issues that you might choose to write about in terms of federal and state (or federal and local) disagreements include immigration, policing, the COVID-19 pandemic, taxation, education, healthcare, water, climate change, voting, or any other issue of your choosing. scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

This is a Credit/No Credit assignment. To receive credit, you need to write a substantive paragraph (5-7 sentences) and include the citation of your source. Here is an example of correct citational practice and an article that would work well for this assignment on how debates about federalism continue to shape politics today: Arun Gupta, “In Portland, Questions Swirl Around Local Police’s Coordination with Federal Officers,” The Intercept, July 24, 2020: https://theintercept.com/2020/07/24/portland-federal-police-protests/ (Links to an external site.)

[supanova_question]

Descartes Goes to Hollywood Essay (Book Review) essay help

Samantha Holland’s article addresses the ‘cyborg’ element in modern contemporary films and the philosophy surrounding cyborgs. Holland’s article focuses on Rene Descartes’ philosophy when analyzing the use of ‘half human-half machine’ characters in films.

Samantha Holland addresses various angles of the mind-body philosophy in this article including personal identity, dualism of beings, gender, and technology.

Throughout the article, the use of cyborgs in films is used as a tool of analysis by the author. This paper provides a précis of Holland’s “Descartes Goes to Hollywood: Mind Body and Gender in Contemporary Cyborg Cinema”.

The article begins by providing examples of how materialism and dualism are manifested in cyborg cinema. The movie “Robocop” is used to show both the materialistic OCP and the dual existence of Robocop (Holland 158).

Holland presents readers with an example of how the mind-body philosophy is the central theme in most cyborg films. According to the article, there are a lot of conflicting philosophies that are contained in most cyborg films. In most cases, the film will be seeking to perpetuate a certain viewpoint but it ends up bringing up a contradiction.

The conflict of the body and the mind is also the main theme in most cyborg films according to Holland. The author cites “The Terminator” and “Robocop” as examples of films with their main characters suffering from mind-body conflict.

The article addresses the gender element in cyborg cinema. According to the author, although cyborg creators insist on the authenticity of the cyborg’s body, they also enhance the cyborg’s gender-look. The article cites the muscled Terminator and the feminine Cherry as examples of the emphasized gender-look in cyborgs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The article points out that the reason for gender emphasis in cyborg cinema is to maintain the body-essence and exploit gender roles. In addition, the article faults the notion that cyborgs are meant to go beyond gender boundaries and that they do not emphasize the common gender stereotypes.

The author points out how the titles of cyborg films such as “Robocop”, “Cherry”, and “Eve of Destruction” are gender specific (Holland 165).

The article continues by covering the feminist myth in most cyborg films. According to the author, most producers only try to portray strong female characters but they do not succeed. The portrayal of Sarah Connor in “Terminator” is used as an example of how feminism is usually misused in cyborg cinema.

It is argued that feminism is portrayed in both narrative and visual levels in cyborg films. The masculine male body possessed by most cyborgs is an example of the visual portrayal of the ‘strong male-gender’. The article also addresses the issue of how cyborg cinema portrays reproduction.

According to the author, the ability to reproduce without using the female element can be interpreted as chauvinistic. The role of the cyborg cinema in the modern world is also addressed. Holland believes that cyborg cinema not only addresses future events but also present events. In addition, they serve as a critique of the human views on mind-body relations.

The article concludes by noting that the cyborg cinema represents only the more acceptable notions of the body-mind theories. In addition, most cyborg films highlight the dualism of human beings and other forms. However, no film has been able to portray Descartes’ body-mind philosophy on an advanced level.

The author also notes that most cyborg technology focuses on the machine-human interface as opposed to the human-machine interface. Therefore, most cyborg films are a manifestation of the growing anxiety over the increasing use of technology.

We will write a custom Book Review on Descartes Goes to Hollywood specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Holland, Samantha. “Descartes Goes to Hollywood.” Cyberbodies/Cyberpunk: Cultures of Technological Embodiment. Ed. Mike Featherstone and Roger Burrows. New York, NY: Sage, 1996. 157-174. Print.

[supanova_question]

The Power of the Internet in China: Citizen Activism Online Essay (Book Review) essay help free

Introduction This book is about the power of online activism. The author reveals how it is hard to contain a society that is not satisfied with the status quo.

With well elaborated illustrations, the book reveals how a society fights against corruption in government, abuse of employee rights and social inequalities among other hot button issues through the online platform.

The book reveals that the Chinese online audience is actually a society taking into consideration that it has more than 253 million users (Yang 2), whose ages and occupations are quite diverse (Yang 32).

This book simply shows how the Chinese people have resorted to cyberspace as a means of fighting against vices they view to be wrong in the society.

The author puts this more clearly “This book is about people’s power in the Internet age” (Yang 1). The author makes a number of arguments three of which are

The cyberspace users form a society: The internet offers a platform where people grow stronger in the pursuit of their rights

The civil society is taking an interest o societal affairs: As opposed in the past, there is a change in the manner of managing crisis to a bottom-up process.

Grievances will always be aired irrespective of the obstacles confronted: It is not possible to completely censor the opinions of the society especially where injustice is involved.

How the Themes are related to Class Work This section discusses the above listed arguments made by the author. References are made to the class lecture notes and articles used in the course syllabus. An attempt is made to relate the class work with the views expressed in the book especially in regard to the three arguments identified above in the introduction section.

The internet users form a society Yang presents the cyberspace as a platform where people grow stronger in the pursuit of their rights. Internet users have grown explosively in numbers. Yang puts the figure, as at 2008, at 253 million users (Yang 2). He also illustrates that the internet users are of various ages and occupational backgrounds (Yang 32).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This online society is quite heterogeneous with groups like “homeowners, pensioners, migrants, hepatitis-B carriers, ant farmers, consumers, computer gamers and pet owners” (Yang 27).

He further notes that there is participation by ordinary people in issues that affect them: “Ordinary people engage in a broad range of political actions and find a new sense of self, community, and empowerment” (Yang 2). The author therefore shows that indeed the Chinese cyberspace users form a society.

What is covered above by Yang is directly related to what has already been covered in class. This trend whereby people form groups of association is common with the Chinese. Lecture 16 shows how members of the society attempt to form groups which will fight for their own rights.1

In the class work, the willingness of the Chinese society to fight policies which are harmful was also discussed. It was shown that students have been very vocal in fighting for the rights of various members in the society. The social evils against which public demonstrations have been carried out were discussed well and mainly touch of disrespect of civil rights by government agencies.2

As one may expect in societies, public events receive response. Some events receive praise while others are condemned. The internet users are very quick to apportion praise or condemnation to any public events as the need arises. Yang shows how the Chinese cyberspace is active in reacting to unjust actions which affect the public.

In some cases, the internet society has forced the central government to spring into action on issues it had previously ignored. The story of illegal brick kilns in the province of Shamxi and many more others are just illustrations of the effectiveness of the internet society in China as illustrated in the book.

Articles used in class showed that the Chinese society has evolved to fight for its members. These articles showed students being at the fore front especially in championing the rights of the marginalized in the society.3 It was also shown that during national calamities, the Chinese people have a strong will to stand by each other.4

We will write a custom Book Review on The Power of the Internet in China: Citizen Activism Online specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Therefore, the willingness of the online community to stand by each other as Yang depicts is well reconciled. The last lecture we had in the month of March touched on how some environmental Non Government Organizations have found reinforcement from online communities.5

The civil society is taking an interest in societal affairs As opposed to the past, there is a change in the manner of managing crisis to a bottom-up process. This is expressed in the class article by Shawn Shieh and Guosheng Deng. The people made a great demonstration of a bottom-up strategy in dealing with the crisis that confronted the people of Sichuan.

We learned that the Chinese society is growing more cohesive and members of the society are learning to help each other without necessarily being pushed by the government.6 Class lectures also showed that Chinese society is becoming more used to engaging the government through public demonstrations.

Again students were shown to be very active in this area. This can be said to be a trend which has been gradually growing within the Chinese civil society.7 This is clearly shown throughout the book as the civil society uses the internet to air their grievances against actions they view as being unfair.

Evidence in the book that the civil society is taking more interest in affairs concerning the society comes out well when the determination of the internet users against bad policies is reviewed. The chapter titled Civic Association Online shows how civic associations are actively encouraging the online communities to join hands for the common good of the Chinese people. The author shows that the internet is playing a leading role in creating informed citizenry.

This trend of the civil society trying to emerge amid suffocation from government suppression was well discussed in the lectures. A historical snapshot shows that after what seemed to be a rapid growth of civil society organs, the violent Tiananmen Square demonstration suppression slowed these organs. However, afterwards there was a renewed growth of these organs.8

Lecture 16 also highlighted the efforts of civic bodies to push the government for reforms. It was shown that the civic bodies believe that reforms in the governments were required. The interference of the party in government was pointed out as an obstacle to these reforms.

The kind of issues that raises responses from online communities are varied but all of them affect the people. According to Yang, the issues that the online community has responded to are “popular nationalism, rights defence, corruption and power abuse, environment, cultural contention, muckraking, and online charity” (55).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Power of the Internet in China: Citizen Activism Online by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More As already noted from lecture notes and articles, these are issues that the Chinese society has been fighting against. Through the article ‘Popular Protests’ various issues that the Chinese society has been pushing for were discussed. These issues are very similar to the ones that the author has listed above.9

The lectures showed, for instance, how the household responsibility system was adopted by the people secretly and later openly despite the government dragging its feet to give it a full support.10

Grievances will always be aired irrespective of the obstacles confronted The author also argues that the society will always air their grievances no matter what obstacles are on the way. This determination has been demonstrated several times in class through various articles. One good illustration is the 1989 Tiananmen protest by students.11 It is not possible to completely censor the opinions of the society especially where injustice is involved.

The author argues that despite the constant effort by the authorities to censor the internet, the Chinese online community has always found ways of going round this obstacle. He notes that “state power constrains the forms and issues of contention, but instead of preventing it from happening it forces activists to be more creative and artful” (Yang 7).

This has been well illustrated through the class work. Being creative and artful in the expression of opinion in the face of stern opposition from the state and state organs seem to the way of the Chinese society as was illustrated in the use of the ‘democratic wall’ by students.12

From the articles used in class, it was also shown that the members of the society quickly learn from each other. And if what they learn is important but somehow suppressed by the government, it is adopted and applied in secrecy. The people also have a way of defending themselves if they are taken to task on why they adopt such actions.13

Under the chapter Politics of Digital Contention the author gives details of how the state has engaged internet activism specifically to ensure that it is under control. The state is always watchful and applies different techniques to ensure that the internet community is censored. It has already been shown in the class that the Chinese government has that tendency to control the public.14

The book also raises a lot of concerns that censoring the Internet might be slowing the economy of the nation. Free access to information and exchanging of such information freely greatly determines economic growth of a nation. It also empowers people as there is exchange of information with the world.

The censorship of the internet however hampers this free flow of information and therefore does not encourage transparency.

In class, the effect of the high handedness of the government was shown. It was discussed that this control by the government negatively affects the economy of China – lack of transparency in state function fosters corruption and therefore affects the economy.15

Hampering free flow of information by the state is an old trend in China. The Mao era was strongly opposed to free expression of views by writers and those who were suspected to be against the government were subjected to harsh conditions and as a result literary work in China suffered a great blow.16

Conclusion Guobin Yang makes a compelling argument that the internet has become a force to reckon with in China. He systematically shows how the internet use has affected the civil society in very great ways.

In this article, the arguments made by Yang are discussed in three themes: the cyberspace users form a society, the civil society is taking an interest in societal affairs, and grievances always get aired no matter what kind of obstacles are faced.

These themes are discussed as Yang presents them in the book with special reference to the lecture notes and articles used in the coursework.

The arguments made by author were part of the issues that were discussed in class. The first argument by the author was that the Chinese tend to form a society through the internet platform.

Several of the articles that were covered in class showed that Chinese people have adopted the spirit of working together as a society. This is especially the case when they need to help each other or when they are fighting against government brutality or high handedness.

The class work had also covered the second argument by the Yang. Civil bodies are continuously teaching the citizens on their rights. Part of the 16th lecture covered in class discussed how various bodies are pushing for reforms in the government.

The class work also covered the attempts by students to launch public demonstrations some of which were ended fatally. All these illustrate that the society has become more sensitized to issues affecting them than they were in the past.

Lastly, class work also showed that the society is dynamic and adopts various ways of expressing their grievances. It was also shown that when the government becomes too restrictive, the society resorts to secret measures as is discussed in the article Calamity and Reform in China by Dali L. Yang on page 159.

Works Cited Yang, Guobin. The Power of the Internet in China: Citizen Activism Online. New York: Columbia University Press, 2009. Print.

Footnotes 1 Lecture 16 on Political Reforms, slide number 16.

2 Popular Protest in China’ by Kevin J. O’Brien.

3 ‘Civil Society and political Change in Asia’ edited by Muthiah Alagappa on page 441. Also refer to lecture 16 slide number 6.

4 Article ‘An Emerging Society: The Impact of the 2008 Sichuan Earthquake on Grass-roots Associations in China’ by Shawn Shieh and Guosheng Deng.

5 Page 147 of the article ‘Popular Protest in China’ by Kevin J. O’Brien

6 ‘An Emerging Society: The Impact of the 2008 Sichuan Earthquake on Grass-roots Associations in China’ by Shawn Shieh and Guosheng Deng

7 ‘Popular Protest in China’ by Kevin J. O’Brien

8 ‘Civil Society and Political Change in Asia’ specifically chapter 13.

9 ‘Popular Protest in China’ by Kevin J. O’Brien

10 Chapter six (The Political Struggle over Reform) of the book Calamity and Reform in China by Dali Yang examines this trend

11 ‘China Politics 20 years later’ by Joseph Fewsmith.

12 Refer to Dennis J Doolin, Communist China: The Politics of Student Opposition, p. 15.

13 Calamity and Reform in China by Dali L. Yang on page 159

14 ‘China Politics 20 years later’ by Yang.

15 Ibid

16 Communist China: The Politics of Student Opposition by Dennis J Doolin on p. 16.

[supanova_question]

The Matrix Structure Advantages and Disadvantage Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Introduction There are several ways of organizing groups of people. Generally, this tends to fall into one of the five organization structures. These are the functional, the hybrid, the matrix, the geographical and the product. The functional structure groups people according to specific functions.

The next structure, the product one, unites individuals in regard to the services they offer. Thirdly, the geographical structure depends on the location of the different organizations. Fourthly, the hybrid is a mixture of all the organization structures. Finally, the matrix is a combination of the functional and the product structures.

Since they have different advantages and disadvantage, the organizers of the London 2012 Olympic Games chose to adopt the matrix structure. As a result, this paper presents the benefits associated with the matrix organizational approach as well as the problems that the organizers may experience. Finally, the paper ends with description of problems associated with a project involving a mix of different companies and cultures.

The matrix organization structure The matrix organization structure involves grouping people with similar skills for work assignment (Rollinson, 2008). For instance, the organization of the Olympic 2012 Games uses varios bodies with different functions. Moreover, this structure divides authority by functions and by project.

As a result, the employees answer to two managers who are the functional and the project supervisors. The functional supervisor is responsible for managing employees in specific areas like engineering as well as marketing. On the contrary, the project supervisor oversees a specific venture (Robbinson et al., 2010). For example, the head of the Government Olympic Executive is the project supervisor while the heads of the other bodies are the functional managers.

The benefits associated with matrix organization structure Resource coordination

The matrix organization structure allows managers and supervisors to concentrate on their areas of proficiency (Mullins, 2010). On the one hand, the functional managers focus on recruiting, developing and managing workers. On the other hand, the project supervisor deals with attaining the mission of the venture.

For example, the major concern of the manager of the Olympic Delivery authority is coordinating resources that will facilitate the building of the permanent venues and infrastructure needed for the games. On the contrary, the manager of the Government Olympic Executive is responsible for ensuring that the games will be on time and within budget as well as represent value for public money and benefit for the whole UK.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Specialization

Placing workers in functional units gives them chances to work in specific areas (Moore, 2009). For example, employees can specialize in product development, distribution or marketing.

This distribution is important because it helps workers perform well resulting to the achievement of the overall goals and the objectives of the project. For instance, if the workers of the British Olympic Association are highly skilled, the Olympic movement throughout the UK will be smooth. This will result in attainment of the overall goal that means a success of the Olympic Games and their legacy.

Breadth of the skills

According to Martin et al (2010), the isolation of employees in a functional unit makes it hard for them to benefit from the knowledge and the skills of other workers in different areas. As a result, in a matrix organization structure, employees of a specific unit are always in contact with workers of other areas through their membership in the project teams.

This means that employees engaged in activities like engineering can easily interact with workers involved in other activities like marketing. Thus, employees have chances to develop a variety of skills. For example, the personnel of the London Development Agency can learn from the workers of the Olympic Park Legacy Company how to plan, develop and maintain the Olympic Park.

Communication

According to Bucanan et al (2010), in a matrix organization structure, employees are always in contact with each other. This facilitates free movement of information as well as resources in the different functional areas. This coordination of information and resources assists the project manager to handle intricate challenges. For example, it is easier for the Government Olympic Executive to handle any problem facing the different bodies involved in the organization of the London 2012 Olympic Games.

Flexibility

The matrix organization structure allows sharing of the human resources across the products (Bliosi et al., 2007). For instance, workers who have not specialized in any field can assist in different areas while skilled employees remain in their areas of specialization. This is imperative because it ensures that work is always on progress, thus the organization achieves its objective within the stipulated time. For instance, if the Olympic board does not have enough unskilled workers, it can get some untrained employees from the London Development Agency.

The problems associated with the matrix organization structure The roles and responsibilities conflict

Arnold (2005) argues that confusion over the roles as well as responsibilities is prevalent within the matrix organization structure. For instance, the London Government can experience an amount of conflicts over roles and responsibilities between the manager of the Government Olympic Executive who oversees the project and the functional supervisors of the other bodies.

We will write a custom Essay on The Matrix Structure Advantages and Disadvantage specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This opposition can be manifested through angry letters to the supervisors and functional managers not attending meetings. As a result, the Olympic Games may not be successful.

Inefficient reporting system

According to Bliosi et al (2007), the matrix organization approach does not have a reporting system that monitors the activities of the functional managers. As a result, the project manager relies on the assurance from the functional supervisor that everything is fine. This keeps the project at a risk of failure especially when the functional manager does not concentrate on his area of expertise.

For example, the Olympic Delivery Authority may report that the building of the needed infrastructure is complete but because the project manager, he does not need to go to see it on his own. So he may not know if all the buildings are constructed and ready to be put into operation.

Politicization of the resources

Politicization of resources, which is a characteristic of the matrix organization structure, means that it is the responsibility of the functional manager to distribute the materials needed for the project implementation (Bucanan et al., 2010).

This division is critical because the functional manager may not recognize where to allocate more resources and this can lead to failure of the project. For example, the manager of the British Paralympic Association may invest more resources in one of the Paralympic Games leading to failure of the other activities.

Lack of the project level focus

In the matrix structure, the functional areas of the organization are more powerful than the project side (Martin et al., 2010). As a result, the functional managers do not focus on the overall goal of the project. For instance, the Mayor of London may focus so much on the residents and the visitors that he forgets about the prior goal of the project. This concentration on a specific item can lead to failure of attaining success in organization and holding of the Olympic Games.

Difficulties in need of skills training

Moore (2009) states that in the matrix organization structure, it is difficult to train people who do not have specific skills. This is because the dual authority of this organizational approach needs people who are content with ambiguity so that the negative pressure to motivation as well as job satisfaction will be reduced. Due to this fact, the organizers of the 2012 Olympic Games may not train unskilled workers, and this can lead to production of low quality work.

Increase in cost

The creation of functional managers as well as different organization bodies leads to an increase in cost (Mullins, 2010). This is because the functional managers will need an increase in pay as they are of different levels from the other employees. Additionally, the establishment of the different functional organization bodies will lead to duplication of resources.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Matrix Structure Advantages and Disadvantage by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More For example, some companies and departments organizing the London 2012 Olympic Games will require their own resources. This means that the government will spend a lot of money funding each body. In the light of the fact that the government lacks money, the entire project is likely to collapse.

Problems associated with a project involving a mix of different organizations and cultures Power culture

The power culture exists in organizations where authority is in the hands of few people who have ability to make decisions (Robbinson et al., 2010). Hence, these individuals enjoy most of the privileges at work place. The problem with this culture is that the management may find it hard to link many activities as well as maintain control. As a result, the management creates several independent organizations while retaining the financial control.

This leads to duplication of resources, which put the company at a risk of increased expenditure. Additionally, the power culture depends on individuals and not committees (Arnold, 2005). Thus, performance appraisal is based on results hence the organization tolerates average performance. Furthermore, the employees have low morale, and there is an increase in staff turnover. Lastly, in the extreme cases, this culture is a dictatorship.

Role culture

According to Rollinson (2008), role culture involves giving employees certain rights and responsibilities according to their specialization as well as education qualifications. Furthermore, according to this pattern of behavior, the employees decide what they want to do and tackle the challenges that accompany their actions.

The problem with this role culture is that it is difficult for the organization to adapt to change. This is because the whole structure is slow in perceiving the need of modification and responding to the change. Moreover, the role culture is annoying for power driven ambitious employees who are interested in results and not the methods (Mullins, 2010). This is because it gives employees opportunities to specialize within their functional areas only.

Task culture

Moore (2009) states that task culture involves formation of teams in order to achieve certain goals. As a result, individuals with similar interests and specialization form teams of five to six members. Each member contributes equally and completes tasks in inventive ways. The problem with this culture is that control is a difficult task (Martin et al., 2010).

This is because the senior manager retains the essential control as he focuses on the allocation of the employees and resources. As a result, when the resources are inadequate, the senior manager begins to control methods and consequences, and this leads to competition between him and the teams’ leaders. Thus, morale in the teams decreases, and the job becomes less satisfying as each employee begins creating his or her own objective.

Person culture

In this culture, individuals are concerned about themselves and not the organization (Buchanan et al., 2010). As a result, an organization with such a culture eventually suffers because workers report to work because of money and they do not have any attachment to their work.

Moreover, the workers are not loyal to the management, and their decisions do not favor the organization. According to Bliosi et al. (2007), many organizations cannot survive with this type of culture because associations have objectives that are above personal goals. Besides, the control mechanisms and the management hierarchies are impractical in the person culture, except by common consent. For instance, an employee can leave the organization, but the management has no power to expel him.

Conclusion The matrix structure is perfect for organizing the London 2012 Olympic Games. This is because it combines the efficiency as well as the effectiveness of function and product organization structures. Although the matrix organization structure has some problems, the benefits outweigh the disadvantages.

Finally, a project involving a mix of different organizations and cultures usually faces a number of problems concerning roles, persons, power and tasks. As a result, managers need to be cautious when choosing the type of cultures they want their organizations to adapt.

References Arnold, J 2005, Work Psychology. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.

Bliosi et al. 2007, Management and organisational behaviour. McGrawhill, New York.

Buchanan, D

[supanova_question]

Working in Teams Report writing essay help

Table of Contents Executive Summary

Introduction

Characteristics of a Team

Critical Literature Review

Effective Teamwork

Why Working Teams Fail

Practical Implications of Working Teams

Conclusion

References List

Executive Summary The work of teams is an increasing concern for top management as well as all other leaders in any organization. Real groups offer an attractive potential for boosts in small group performance at all levels in the organization (Katzenbach, 1998). The versatility of a team is well suited to the dynamics of speed and rapid change that is faced by high performing organizations.

This paper looks at the assumption that people working in teams always achieve their goals more efficiently and effectively than those working in isolation. It provides different definitions and characteristics of a working team and goes on to discuss what different authors have said about the working of teams. Challenges of creating and maintaining a good working team as well as factors that lead to the effectiveness of a team are also discussed.

Towards the end, the practicality of working teams in organizations is examined and explanations are given to show why the actual implementation of a team is a difficult task.

Introduction A team may be defined as a group of people who have come together to pursue a common goal. Barnes (2008) defined a work team as a group of people who work together on a common task to achieve a specific goal or objective.

In the present day competitive business world, it is almost impossible for any organization to succeed in isolation. Teams are therefore a common characteristic in most organizations today. According to research, when people join efforts, it is possible to work well than when individuals are left to work individually.

According to West (2004), when we create teams, it is important to think beyond the relatively unchangeable aspects of the person such as their personality and think more of their motivation, knowledge and skills for working in teams.

This includes their preference for working in teams; whether they have an individualistic or collective approach to working with others; their basic social skills such as listening, speaking and cooperating; and their team working skills such as collaboration, concern for the team and interpersonal awareness.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Team working practices are based on the belief that when working together effectively, a group of people can make a much greater contribution than would be made by those people working as individuals (Barnes, 2008).

Barnes also points out that a team is more than just a group of people. A team works together on a common task to achieve a specific goal or objective. Team work requires cohesion, complimentary skills and leadership (Barnes, 2008).

An organization may create a variety of teams such as action teams, problem solving teams, project teams or production teams (Barnes, 2008).

Characteristics of a Team A team is defined by a clear common goal that is well understood by everyone in the group who also believe in it. The goal could be a sales target, the development of a new process, or managing a group of business units (Maginn, 2003). Whatever it is, achieving the goal is clearly the reason for the existence of the group.

Another characteristic is that individuals have to work together to achieve the set goal. People on a team often depend on each other’s expertise, perspective and efforts (Gaines, 2006). Working in teams enables organizations to bring together employees with varying skills and this creates opportunities for staff to grow in their various fields. When the power of the different perspectives within the organization are brought together to deal with a problem or challenge, the outcome is always amazing (Maginn, 2003).

Critical Literature Review According to Barnes (2008), working teams have always been an important feature of most organizations. It is very rare to find an individual working in total isolation in any organization. As a matter of fact, one of the main purposes of business organizations is to bring people together so that they can perform more efficiently than if they acted a lone (Aronoff

[supanova_question]

Second Language Teaching Research Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

How Does the First Language L1 Help Make Content Accessible in the L2 In teaching second language literacy to English-Language Learners (ELL), teachers must be aware of the similarities and differences of the linguistic features that exist in the student’s home language. Thus, for a student to acquire literacy in a second language, some form of literacy in the first language is also required.

The second language (L2) reading and writing process involves the interplay of two language system so that when reading or writing in second language readers often use their L1 as a reading strategy to access the material (Helman,2009).

This factor is particularly important for ELLs. Students who can read and write in their native language find literacy in English much easier than students who never learned to read and write in any language. ) The following literature review given the reader a background understanding of the how developing the L1 plays an basic part in helping student access the content in the L2.

Literacy Literacy refers to the ability for comprehend and use printed information at work, home and all other daily activities. The ability allows persons to achieve their goals, enhance their knowledge and build their potential to acquire more knowledge. Since literacy has a wide definition, a more specific component, the functional literacy, will suffice for this review.

Street (1984) shows that functional literacy serves people by allowing them to solve their immediate problems. For example, literacy would enable farmers to take notes about the better ways of managing their crops. The same farmers should later be able to refer to what they wrote and use it to expand their knowledge, which may include listening or reading additional materials.

The extensive research by Street (1984) takes the reader through the different metamorphosis of theories and ideologies that shape the term literacy. The following sections of the literature review use the functional definition of literature as alluded before.

Richard (1993) examined the teaching of literacy to second language learners at a Municipal Workplace Language Training Program in British Columbia. He notes that, most programs are affected by the selection of teachers and their training. Teachers must have certain attributes, and these depend on their personality and attitude.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The teacher has to be trained on the ability to trust oneself to do the right thing. They need to believe in the learners and relate well to people. The main challenge is usually the schooling of the teacher. Richard (1993) observed with the workplace literacy education that, the active learner-centered teaching yielded the most benefits for workers, unions and management because it centers on students developing and using their own language.

The above observation was also apparent in the study by Benseman, Sutton and Lander (2005) who explained that, the involvement of the learner in the teaching allows students to increase their use of first language literacy in understanding the second language. Moreover, the method covers for the teacher’s shortcomings by allowing students to include cultural and social experiences in the classroom (Verhoeven, 1994).

Literature by Richard (1993) shows that, a good grasp of the first language and its usage led to useful attitudes and practices. This was contrary to the explicit use of the second language that was full of self-restrictive attitude and practices.

The first language use, leads students to use writing, to bring the wisdom of their earlier experiences into the new environment with the second language. Richard (1993) highlights the need to investigate the relationship between learner-centeredness and active teaching and their effect on developing the second language.

The general definition of literacy and the availability of many strategies for teaching may be a challenge for language teachers. Helman (2009) comes to the teachers’ rescue explaining that they must know the limitations of applying a specific strategy to teaching the second language.

One limitation is the difficulty in establishing comparison groups of those with and without L1 literacy ability, which means that one can normally describe correlations rather than direct effects. The wide range of factors, which affect literacy, must play a part, particularly for adults who have varied exposure, time constraints, prior educational experience, and so on, in addition to such personality variables as motivation (Helman, 2009).

Different Types of Literacy Students The study conducted by Benseman, Sutton and Lander (2005) shows that the characteristics of learners influence their ability to learn a language. Therefore, they should be the focus of any language lesson plan. In general, learners have diverse needs. For example, English-speaking leaners may be good at speaking but average on reading and some may not be able to write.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Second Language Teaching specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Others could have no skill in any language and need to improve their spoken English. People who go back to school after previous failures have a low confidence while those who are learning a second language because of a change in environment have a high confidence (Benseman, Sutton,

[supanova_question]

Social Media Marketing Plan: Subway Fast Food Report essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Introduction The communicative power of the internet has essentially replaced many of the traditional tools, particularly in the world of traditional advertising in print and broadcast media.

Properly designed online marketing and product distribution management strategy facilitates the success and sustainability in online marketing since it operates within stipulated business laws. This analytical treatise attempts to present an explicit social media marketing plan for the Subway Fast Food.

Objectives for Social Media Marketing Attract

The main objective of this digital marketing plan is to attract the younger customers’ market through the Subway’s website and a twitter fun page in order to increase the customer traffic in its stores. The objective aims at packaging the fast food company as a favourite of the younger customers who frequent social media and actually share a common communication culture.

Apparently, this segment forms the largest bracket of those who visit Subway stores (DeLong, 2012). The use of social media to attract this market segment is achievable since the target market frequents social media as a site for interaction and purchase of different products (Stokes, 2011).

Customer retention and loyalty building

Properly modified website and the twitter fun page will reassure the customers on the quality of the sandwiches served at the Subway stores. Through massive recruitment of Subway funs in the twitter page, the company will not only benefit from an increased traffic of online compliments, but also record high rates of customer loyalty as most customers are influenced by reactions from other clients.

Customer retention strategy is meant to position the company as a market leader in terms of customer satisfaction tracking and response. This will be achieved through optimisation of the Subways website’s search engine and improving on the visibility of its twitter fun page (Farris, Bendle, Pfeifer and Rebstein, 2010).

Online Value Proposition (OVP) In order to increase credibility and maintain professionalism, the Subway’s website and the proposed twitter fun page channels will encompass processes and features that flawlessly facilitate a healthy lifetime relationship between a business and its client.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Among the new development elements that will be incorporated in the twitter fun page will include trust, reliability, distribution, fair retribution process, and passing accurate information to target audience to restore confidence (Farris et al. 2010).

Content engagement strategy Search Engine Optimisation (SEO)

Search engine optimisation for the Subway’s website can be achieved through installing plugins that possess extra features like page navigation, thumbnail and customized page numbers. Specifically, this proposed system in Google will consist of a multi tab page that will serve different areas and services to online customers. The main categories are eatery menu, e-newspaper/magazines and brochures for the related different sandwiches served at the Subway restaurant (Stokes, 2011).

When implementing SEO in the Google, it is necessary to revise the algorithms constantly for the search result for the Subway website to remain at the top. This can be achieved through revising the content to ensure that all the information in the website pertains directly to the needs of potential clients.

Thus, constant blogging on the website and recruiting other independent bloggers to blog about the website will give the Subway website a competitive advantage in marketing its products. Beside each item, the price, quantity, and availability are posted at the bottom left page (Farris et al. 2010).

Twitter fun page promotion

Social media, especially Twitter has gained popularity among potential customers of the Subway restaurant who uses this site as interaction modules to share food culture and exchange ideas. The tweeter is an ideal tool for branding and community following building for the Subway restaurant (Subway, 2013). This will allow people to interact and let users to add content to align to different orientations of group products.

There are three perspectives which will help in understanding the impact of the twitter fun page. It will help the company to reach their customers by skipping or bypassing the traditional gatekeepers, such as written magazine publishers, and placing them online so that customers can get them directly (Stokes, 2011).

Content design examples The use of the Subway’s website and Tweeter can be promoted by building an interest, location and need based initiative. Through likes and tweets, the customer base for the company will expand substantially over a short period of time. Social media focuses on e-marketing which involves building friendly partnership and working relationship with a market segment without necessarily having physical contact with it.

We will write a custom Report on Social Media Marketing Plan: Subway Fast Food specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Secondly, the current bomb internet channels of reaching the consumers should be tailored to encompass processes and features that flawlessly facilitate a healthy and a lifetime relationship between the business and its clients. The success of e-marketing is deeply entrenched in the principle of keeping reliable and professional reputation in exchanging ideas and convincing customers in online selling (Stokes, 2011).

Measurement strategies Use Twitter page insights

It is necessary to determine the online behaviour of the target market before selecting the best channel for internet marketing to minimize the issue of changed consumer preference. Essentially, success of brand and product management depends on a proper alignment of a functional idea into the creation of flexible, involuntary, and quantifiable measurement of perception among the target audience.

Thus, the Subway Company will be in a position to track the engagement ratios on its twitter fan page and classify different contents according to the level of engagement recorded (Stokes, 2011).

Use Google analytics

The Subway Company may use the online traffic results to draw a growth calendar for the social media marketing strategies after every six months to fast track the initial objectives against the realities of market swings. Besides, the company may be in a position to locate the regions with the highest and the lowest traffic in order to improve its social media marketing strategy.

In addition, the company may be in a position to accurately determine the average duration of access to these sites in order to track the success of its social media marketing channels (Farris et al. 2010).

Reference List DeLong, K 2012, Zagat 2012 fast-food survey: Subway is most popular, https://fox6now.com/2012/10/04/zagat-2012-fast-food-survey-subway-is-most-popular/

Farris, P., Bendle, N., Pfeifer, P.,

[supanova_question]

Radical Rights Groups Essay cheap essay help

How do current radical right groups such as sovereign citizens threaten the legitimate federal authority in the United States? In the United States, a radical right group is a term used to assign common depiction to each extreme side of the political spectrum (Johnson 46). Radical right groups comprise of a number of fanatic movements that support nationalistic leanings. These groups can be classified into supremacist movements, militia movements, sovereign citizens’ movements, and various single-issue movements (Johnson 46).

Among these groups, sovereign citizens are the most active. The groups, together with other right groups in the United States threaten the legitimate federal authority in a number of ways. As such, these groups champion for secession. They want to fight for the removal of their states from the United States. These groups argue that state separation is a constitutional right that the federal government should respect.

Based on these motives, it is apparent that these extremist groups are after undermining the legitimate federal authority of the US. Similarly, sovereign citizens have always insisted that the US federal government is illegitimate. Therefore, they have always tried to reinstate an idealized and an inconspicuous government that has never been in existence in the US.

To date, these groups wage confrontations against the federal government and similar related authorities by use of paper terrorism, pestering, threat tactics, and infrequently resorting to aggression (Johnson 47). In addition, sovereign citizens assert that the county is the legitimate seat of command in the US. Their ideology is supported by the fact that county administration is nearer to the citizens than the federal government.

Why does the FBI classify this group as domestic terrorists? According to the FBI, domestic terrorism group is a faction that satisfies the below characteristics (Johnson 47). The first attribute is that a group must be planning dangerous acts against fellow humans contrary to the national or state law.

Second attribute is that a group must seem to be intentionally threatening civilians, undermining the policy of a government through threats, and have an effect on the behavior of a government by mass obliteration, murdering or abducting.

Lastly, for a group to be considered a domestic terrorist it acts must occur inside the territorial jurisdiction of the United States and be carried out by its citizens. Sovereign citizens are categorized as internal terrorists because they exhibit the above characteristics. For instance, ever since the fall of the Posse the group has witnessed a momentous increase in numbers of its acts.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These acts comprise of attempts of aggression frequently against the legislative body of the government. During the year 1993, radical escapees Linda Lyon Block and George Sibley, who were the members of the group, assassinated a police officer in Alabama (Hamm 217). In mid 1990s, a gang of radicals linked with the extremists battered Karen Mathews at her residence.

Similarly, in the year 1998 two members belonging to the group fired their guns at two firefighters in Ohio. They attacked the firefighters because the two servicepersons’ vehicle had blocked their way. At irregular intervals, the group members have engaged themselves in high-profile confrontation with the authorities.

In spite of aggressive activity, the favored weapon of this group is referred to as paper terrorism. Paper terrorism utilizes the use of fake legal credentials and filings. Similarly, paper terrorism employs the misuse of lawful credentials and filings. These acts are undertaken to threaten, annoy, and pressurize public officials, police officers, and the public (Johnson 46).

Works Cited Hamm, Mark S.. Terrorism as crime: from Oklahoma City to Al-Qaeda and beyond. New York: New York University Press, 2007. Print.

Johnson, Daryl. Right wing resurgence: how a domestic terrorist threat is being ignored. Lanham: Rowman

[supanova_question]

Stage Theory and Stages of Grief Essay college application essay help: college application essay help

The Stage Theory and Its Pros and Cons Stage theories are developed to organize and explain the complex life processes, to make definite predictions in relation to the further development of the process, and to conclude about the expected process’s outcomes. That is why, stage theories are typical for different social and behavioral sciences and disciplines (Rutjens et al., 2013, p. 313).

Thus, stage theories are developed to explain the processes of the people’s adaptation to various situations as well as the changes in the people’s behaviours, attitudes, and perceptions (Dillenburger

[supanova_question]

Little Red Riding Hood in Matthew Bright’s Freeway (1996) Research Paper a level english language essay help

In the past, different societies used varied tales to educate the society as well as children on different matters affecting humanity. Besides, they used narratives to warn children against engaging in some activities that could compromise the established social norms. Little Red Riding Hood is a narrative used to warn the children against revealing their secrets to strangers.

The narrative tries to show the children the dangers of associating with strangers (Lang, 1891). Later, Matthew Bright came up with a film version of the same narrative.

In spite of making significant changes in the narrative, the film propagates a theme that is somewhat similar to the theme of the initial oral version. The wordings in the different versions of the tale might be different. Nevertheless, all the versions convey the same message though in different ways.

There are both oral and non-oral versions of Little Red Riding Hood. Generally, non-oral and oral versions of any tale differ significantly. While both versions may try as much as possible to bring out the same theme, the characters in both versions might differ as well as significant changes appear in different scenes. Moreover, some of the scenes in the oral version might differ from the scenes in the non-oral version.

There are significant differences between the Freeway (1996) film by Matthew and the Little Red Riding Hood narrative by Charles Perrault. One of the differences occurs with respect to characters in both the tale and the film.

Perrault uses the title of the narrative as the name of the main character in his narrative while Matthew uses Vanessa as the main character (Wratislaw, 1889). Besides, according to the narrative by Perrault, he uses wolf as the other character while Matthew coins up a character by the name Bob Wolverton who is a serial killer (Preston, 2004).

Significant disparities between the two versions appear with respect to their plots. According to the narrative by Perrault, Little Red Riding Hood’s mother requests her to visit her grandmother and, she prepares some cakes for her. On the way, the girl encounters a wolf, which she tells it all about her grandmother.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The wolf plays a trick against the girl and gets to her grandmother’s house before her. On the other hand, Matthew’s plot is very different. According to the film, Vanessa decides to go to her grandmother after suffering in the hands of her cruel stepfather and prostitute mother.

After her foster parents are arrested, she vows not to live under foster care again. She stills a car and on her way to her grandmother’s house, the vehicle breaks down forcing her to look for assistance (Bright, 1996).

Bob offers to help her. Vanessa sees him like a good person and she confides her secret about her sick grandmother. In the middle of their dialogue Bob reveals his deviant side and he attempts to kill Vanessa who declines to give in to his demands. Vanessa draws a gun that his boyfriend had given her earlier and shoots Bob severally rescuing her.

The shooting incidence lands Vanessa in prison while Bob is treated like a hero. Later, Vanessa escapes from prison and decides to go looking for her grandmother, but after entering the house, she learns that Bob, who is in the house brandishing a gun, had killed the granny. Confrontation ensues where Vanessa manages to strangle Bob and kill him. While Perrault’s narrative ends with the demise of Little Red Riding Hood, Matthew’s film depicts Vanessa as victorious.

Besides the difference in the plots, the two versions were established in different periods. The narrative came prior to the modern civilization, while the film came during the modern society. Therefore, there are significant differences with respect to the language and words used throughout the narrative.

Perrault chooses his words carefully and avoids using obscene words or scenes throughout the narrative. On the other hand, Matthew takes the initial narrative, twists it in a satirical manner to depict the modern society. He includes a lot of profane language in the film.

This helps to bring out the level of moral degradation existing in the modern society. Further, Matthew depicts Vanessa as a determined woman who is not willing to succumb to male domination. This portrays the level of women liberation.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Little Red Riding Hood in Matthew Bright’s Freeway (1996) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More For a narrative to be captivating and to draw the attention of the target audience, the narrators use different surface elements. The elements may include words or themes that the target audience likes most. The elements are packaged in a way that they keep the audience attentive throughout the narrative or film, therefore making sure that the film or narrative delivers the intended message (Preston, 2004).

The narrative by Perrault is intended for young children. It warns them against associating with strangers. To draw the attention of the children, Charles tries to come up with fascinating characters. He uses characters like the little girl, the grandmother, and the wolf.

Majority of the children love their grandmothers and thus they would never wish to see or hear anyone or anything harming them. Furthermore, narratives that include wild animals as the characters mesmerize many children. Hence, the inclusion of wolf in the narrative makes it attractive, therefore, attracting the target audience.

Besides using different characters that attract the target audience, the narrator also organizes the story in a thrilling manner. She depicts the girl as going through a forest where she encounters a wolf and dialogue ensues. This makes the audience attentive as it wish to know what happens in the process of dialogue.

The thrill of going through the forest in the company of a wolf makes the children wish to know what happens to the young girl (Wratislaw, 1889). The thrill acts one of the surface elements that make the narrative captivating to the young children. Throughout the narrative, Charles uses elements that are known to the target audience.

Besides, he does not make the plot complicated as a way to ensure that the audience is capable of following every event in the narrative. The narrator also includes the trick used by the wolf to dupe Little Red Riding Hood as one of the surface elements. To most children, the trick appears like a fascinating game.

In many times, children participate in games that help them outdo each other. Consequently, the trick applied by the wolf makes the children perceive it as a game. They are keen to see if the girl defeats the wolf without knowing that it is a trick to help the wolf eat the girl’s grandmother without the girl’s knowledge.

Matthew establishes his film in a modern setting. Unlike Charles who targets the children, Bright targets audiences from different groups. He does not focus on the children. Instead, he focuses on the youths as well as the older generation. Among the surface elements he includes to make the film relevant include, moral decadency, discrimination of poor by the rich as well as sexual illusions (Preston, 2004).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Little Red Riding Hood in Matthew Bright’s Freeway (1996) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Moral decadency is one of the challenges facing the contemporary society. Nevertheless, many people do not like talking about it. Consequently, in an attempt to bring out this theme, Bright includes it as one of the surface elements in the film. Nevertheless, he does not depict it directly. Instead, he repackages it in a way that does not put off the target audience.

Bright directs the film with numerous twists and turns. He uses some scenes of aggression and irreverent dialogue as a way of bringing out the element of moral decadency within the society (McGurk, 2012). Many people have the allure of the serial killers. He depicts Bob as a serial killer with an aim of brining out this fascination and showing the public how it is inclined towards the negative norms at the expense of social ethics (Bright, 1996).

There is great disparity between the privileged and the underprivileged in the modern society. The privileged in the society look down upon the underprivileged and exploit them in different ways. Bright includes the element of this discrimination in the film as a way of portraying the level of hypocrisy in the modern society.

He portrays Vanessa’s parents as irresponsible (Bright, 1996). The mother engages in prostitution and the father is a drug addict. Moreover, he depicts Bob as a well-up man who takes advantage of the poor girls. He exploits them sexually and later kills and disposes them.

Sexuality is an issue that challenges the modern society. The problem faces both the young and the old. Bright takes the initial narrative and turns it upside down to fit the modern society. In spite of sticking to the main theme, he twists his plot to enlighten the target audience on the challenges of sexuality (Preston, 2004).

He uses a perverted tone to make the film relevant to the teenage audience who are the major victims of sexuality. Bright manages to blend these elements to make the film fascinating to all the target audiences. Eventually, he not only makes the film entertaining, but he also manages to put across his intended messages in a way that all the audiences understand.

Tales, narratives, and anecdotes act as good avenues of enlightening the public on different issues. The main reason for using them is that they are easy to understand and retain. Film directors identify different tales and twist them in a manner that suits them to convey certain messages (Preston, 2004). Similarly, Matthew Bright takes the Little Red Riding Hood tale and twists it to fit his film.

The main reason why he re-uses the tale is that he perceives it as the most appropriate in delivering his intended message. The plot and theme of the initial tale are somewhat congruent with the theme and plot of his film. Moreover, the characters and environment used for the tale do not change significantly in the film.

For instance, Bright uses Vanessa to represent Little Red Riding Hood while Bob represents the wolf. The traits of the new characters are almost similar to the trait of the initial characters in the tale. Therefore, the film director is able to articulate his themes using these characters without difficulties.

There was no better way of helping the public understand the level of moral decadency, gender discrimination, sexuality, and other challenges facing the society than through a film. Furthermore, to bring out these challenges, Matthew needed to package his message in a way that the target audience understands.

The Little Red Riding Hood tale offered a better platform of portraying these themes. As the tale was easy to understand and remember, Matthew saw it as the most appropriate to apply in communicating with the public. The tale facilitates in developing and directing the plot of the film.

Freeway is a revised version of Little Red Riding Hood. Bright manages to twist the initial tale to reflect a different theme in the modern society. In addition, he changes the various characters from the previous tale and uses them to play different roles in the film. In spite of changing the plot of the film relative to the original tale, Bright manages to convey his message in a way that all the target audiences understand.

In a bid to make the film relevant, Bright uses numerous surface elements. He includes the elements of moral decadency, sexuality, and disparity between the privileged and the underprivileged, as they are the main challenges facing the modern society. The main reason why the film director opts to re-use Little Red Riding Hood in his film is that the tale’s plot and characters fit well in the delivery of his intended message.

Reference List Bright, M. (1996). Freeway [DVD]. US: Kushner-Locke Company.

Lang, A. (1891). The Blue Fairy Book. London, UK: Longmans.

McGurk, M. (2012). ‘Freeway’ an old but alluring ride. The Cincinnati Enquirer, p.32.

Preston, C. (2004). Little Red Riding Hood uncloaked: Sex, morality, and evolution of a fairy tale (Review). Marvels

[supanova_question]

Operation management – Nokia Corporation in the UAE Report (Assessment) essay help online

Introduction: Background of the Company Nokia is one of the most internationally renowned leading mobile phone companies that originated from Finland, with its headquarters in Espoo. The company emerged in 1885 and has since then been dealing with providing telecommunications and information technology services such as developing mobile phones and their accessories, internet services, and telephony technologies.

Be sure to discuss the main products and/or services that the company sells Nokia Corporation deals with an assortment of products and services related to telecommunication and IT. For products, the company ventures in mobile phones, mobile phone accessories, computer devices, tablets, and several other portable Information technology gadgets. Nokia also provides internet services, including mobile phone internet applications, routing services, digital mapping, gaming services, and multimedia services.

Describe the industry in which the company operates Nokia Corporation is a mobile phone manufacturing company under the mobile phone industry, but is under the telecommunication and information technology industry as it deals mostly with communication products and services. The telecommunication, cell phone and the information technology industries are industries dealing with inventing modern communication devices and providing efficient communication services.

Nokia Corporation is a multinational company that is currently venturing in almost every state or nation across the continents. Within the UAE, Nokia has a series of argent companies that operate under the Nokia umbrella. Nokia Corporation has sub-companies in Dubai and within other major cities around the United Arab Emirates.

Mention something about the competition and how you believe the company competes (relating this to their operations) Nokia UAE is facing stiff competition in the Middle East as well as across the world because companies like Samsung, Apple, and Huawei have come up with unique models of phones in terms of hardware, operating systems, and applications that meet diverse needs of customers. However, I believe that Nokia UAE is increasingly becoming competitive in various markets because it is expanding its operations to reach many customers.

Nokia UAE has made sure that it provides customers in the UAE with all models of Nokia phones and applications in Ovi Stores. Moreover, Nokia UAE has an extensive support system that allows customers to optimize the use of phones. The advent of smartphones has compelled mobile operators to offer high-speed networks and business solutions. Hence, the operations of Nokia UAE are very competitive in the markets.

Nokia Corporation performed very well during the last few years with a market share of approximately 18%, which currently seems to have downsized to about 3%. Although still earning a somewhat good market reputation, its market value is diminishing. Nokia is in fact currently facing financial disaster and has lost over 40% of its cell phone revenues.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Strategy of the Company Nokia UAE Corporation has an articulated mission indicated as, to become the dominating communication products manufacturer and distributor of the world.

Nokia Corporation serves under a strategic plan that focuses on cost-effectiveness and differentiation strategies. Nokia UAE has a cost-effectiveness strategy by ensuring that it produces and distributes low-cost products that are quite affordable for the Emirati people. It also utilizes differentiation strategy by producing unique products and in varieties exceptional from its competitors.

Nokia Lumia model is a smartphone that competes with android and other models. Nokia’s first-ever Windows tablet is Nokia Asha, which is a unique model with crystal-clear design, high pixel camera, and very sensitive user interface.

Are they following their strategy or not? And why? Differentiation is a strategy that is paramount for Nokia UAE and remains unchanged. For the cost-effectiveness strategy, the strategy fluctuates depending on the market trends. Since it is a determinant in the decision-making process, the strategy relies on the consumption and other factors.

Does the company measure the productivity of their workers? Employees are important facets to Nokia UAE and their productivity is paramount to the management of the company. The company’s human resource department measures and analyses the performance of its employees and offers motivation through employee empowerment.

How do they measure productivity? Nokia UAE measures employee productivity through analyzing the potency of a single employee per the work assignment given to them on their first day. The company assumes that productivity depends on job satisfaction.

Is productivity difficult to measure in this industry or company? Why? Nokia UAE rarely faces challenges in measuring the productivity of its employees, as the company’s human resource management team is normally competent in assessing employee productivity and a strong top management with sufficient information regarding the company’s operational capabilities.

We will write a custom Assessment on Operation management – Nokia Corporation in the UAE specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More How is Nokia different from others in the industry? Differentiation as a paramount business strategy makes Nokia an exceptional company, with its assortment of portable information technology gadgets being exemplary. For instance, while many cell phone companies produce smartphones with integrated android operating system, Nokia has devised its unique approaches. Ordinary phones and smartphones of Nokia have unique shapes, colors, and features.

The features of Nokia phones are user-friendly and customized to suite customer’s tastes and preferences. Moreover, Nokia phones have the largest internal memory when compared with other phones, and thus allows them to run many applications just like android phones.

Forecasting Forecasting is a management strategy that is useful in analyzing organizational strategies and productivity. Regression, qualitative, and quantitative are the major business forecasting techniques. Regression-based forecasting model examines trends in the business costs and net income to examine their business market. Qualitative forecasting model is where a business uses actual opinions and ideas as forms of data to ascertain the situation within the market.

Quantitative forecasting model uses sales numbers and web interchange numbers and new accounts to examine market state. Quantitative approach uses statistical analysis in predicting trends in various markets. Nokia UAE uses the Mean Absolute Deviation (MAD) demand as a forecasting technique.

Nokia UAE uses the Mean Absolute Deviation (MAD) demand is a forecasting technique that calculates demand variability of the products and services in the market. Within the Nokia UAE, the Mean Absolute Deviation Percent (MADP) and the Mean Absolute Error (MAE) are forecasting techniques common in this company.

In enhancing forecasting accuracy, Nokia UAE uses certain time horizons that include short-range time forecasts where certain programs, operations, and activities follow short-term stipulated schedules to achieve its targets. This explains the reasons why their products do not serve for long in the market before other new ones emerge.

Given the rising competition in the modern-day business world, forecasting as a strategy should receive the needed attention to make Nokia UAE more successful. Regression as a business-forecasting model is becoming an effective modern approach, as it focuses on costs and net income of the company. For Nokia UAE, this approach will help the company balance costs, forecast of income and meet operational demands as anticipated.

Product and Service Design Like its international program, Nokia UAE deals with an array of telecommunication and information technology products and services as well. In terms of products, the main intent of the company is to produce affordable and portable communication and technology devices that are anticipations for the vibrant youth consumer population.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Operation management – Nokia Corporation in the UAE by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Smart phones, tablets, portable computer devices, internet-enabled phones, simple communication phones, various touch screen phones, and many other advanced technology tools. The products have been so reliable for the consumers, something that keeps Nokia Corporation on the market. In terms of services, the company offers mobile gaming services, internet applications, instant messaging, and multimedia services.

Nokia Corporation, unlike several other mobile phone companies known to the world, has at least managed to produce high-quality products characterized by durability. With high-quality assurance and quality control measures designed by the company strictly followed, the products produced by Nokia UAE and its international allies are of exceptional quality with recorded evidence of long-term durability. The life shelf of many of the Nokia products exceeds that of its direct competitor, Samsung.

Is the company managing product design according to their selected strategy (low cost/ differentiation/ response)? The concept of low pricing and differentiation as the main market triumph strategies are normally in line with the product designing strategies. Nokia UAE designs products, with consideration of the consumer preferences and the consumer ability as determined by the pre-existing market research evidence documented.

The company designs its products and offers services while considering the purchasing power of its consumers as per the market where the products intends to serve. The products designed differ, but sometimes clients have expressed their resentments over the little changes made to each advancing Nokia product, as they reflect a slight change from the previous ones.

Reverse engineering, is a business practice that involves the process of unveiling the technological ideologies pertaining to a device, system or even a business operation or program through structural analysis of its composition.

The Nokia Corporation, as aforementioned, has a weakness of relying on their previous technological designs to invent a new product. Reverse engineering will help Nokia figure out new products and make design decisions without using recurring ideas.

Capacity Planning Nokia, as a multinational company, seems to have been sailing through the market due to its initial financial capacity, though sudden twist in its economic status may undermine this fact. Capacity planning means understanding the potential of accompany to initiate and manage a business program.

Nokia UAE has the best-talented workforce with perfect skills required for high productivity of the company. However, wrangles between managers, employees, shareholders, are ruining their capacity in strengthening the company.

The company seems to have the right capacity of both human and capital resources required to make the company more effective than it seems. Nonetheless, the current situation in the management is not appealing as the conflicts arising from the company are ruining its productivity. This means that the company requires reexamination of its management capacity to perform well.

Strengthening the management and ensuring constant employee empowerment and support as motivation is one of the key employee retention techniques that seems more effective in the modern-day business environment. Over-employment of the workforce is also harmful nowadays for companies.

The company has no excess capital capacity the current resources, especially human resources are functioning optimally while the room for growth is diminishing due to lack of excess resources for development. Currently, the company’s production is currently not exceeding the consumption demands.

Cost-effectiveness in the company includes analyzing company’s capacity before investing in any business product or demanding more workforces. The capacity management of Nokia UAE is in tandem with the customer demands regarding products unveiled to the market.

Nonetheless, the internal conflicts are affecting proper utilization of the human resources and this affects the cost-effectiveness aspect as the employee productivity remains underutilized.

Process Design Process design involves determining, equipment requirements, program implementation, and workflow required to meet needs of the clients. Nokia UAE uses design for assembly line with sophisticated machinery because it reduces the assembly costs. The design for assembly line process involves the use of automated machinery in the generation of products in sequential manner.

The automated controls aid in the assembly of products continuously, and thus increasing the volume while reducing variable costs. Moreover, design for assembly line is flexible as the company can increase or decrease the volume of production while maintaining the cost of production at the same level. Thus, this process design has helped Nokia to increase production while reducing the costs of production.

Typically, the concept of cost-effectiveness in the company seems convoluted because, as the company provides cost-effective products, the process design seems sophisticated and expensive than anticipated.

The operation cost designed in the freight-designed manner is relatively higher than their market strategy demands. Sophisticated technologies employed to design products, offer services require exemplary care, and the company spends immensely to handle the machinery and maintain the processes.

Location The physical location of Nokia Corporation from its backdrop is Finland. However, its location within the UAE countries lies within places with fast-growing business premises and Dubai is one of the centers where the company operates. Dubai is the fastest-growing Muslim city with millions of investors attracted to this capital. Dubai is a strategic location within the UAE and Nokia expects to excel in this place.

In locating the headquarters in Dubai, Nokia UAE had targeted the fast-growing city as part of its strategic location planning. Technological innovation and consumption of technological communication services and its devices are on rapid growth in Dubai. Located within the Al Thuraya Tower II, also known as Dubai’s Internet City, the center is a technological zone that pulls millions of potential consumers.

In your opinion, is this a good location? Why or why not? Nothing can match the most effective decision made at the headquarters of the Nokia Company around Dubai, as it currently stands out as the most advanced Muslim city where millions of potential investors and consumer population converge. The city is a growing technological center with a vibrant youth population who anticipate for such modernized mobile technologies.

The strategy of cost-effectiveness and differentiation remains well supported by the Dubai City, as although it may deem expensive due to the city structure, a pool of consumers is enough to bring back the desired profits. Although several other companies have invested in Dubai, Nokia is still a unique technological company. The unique technological products are a potential force behind the market success.

Quality and Quality Control The reason behind a constant supply of desirable Nokia product rests upon the fact that the company has been in the forefront in strengthening the quality management system. Although somewhat poor in innovation, the products designed in quality-oriented manner where durability is a great concern, the company products are exceptional.

The quality control system of Nokia UAE entails persistent quality examination undertaken by a team of quality management experts who perform quality checks. Early test, pretests, in routine cycles throughout the production processes help Nokia UAE.

The early checks, constant reexaminations, and pretests to ascertain the quality of the phones and other technological devices is part of the inspection process that examines the quality of each product in Nokia UAE.

Failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA), Ishikawa diagram, and statistical process control (control chart) are the types of quality tools that Nokia UAE uses in its quality assurance and control procedures. FMEA is an effective control tool because it identifies faults, and thus aid quality assurance and control procedures. Ishikawa diagram is a control tool that depicts the relationships between a problem and its causes, and thus it is a cause-and-effect tool.

The Ishikawa diagram is significant because it identifies causes of problems in a process by grouping the causes of problems into machines, methods, materials, management, and human resource. Statistical process control (control chart) allows measurement of attributes over a period. The control chart is important because it monitors processes and ensures that they are performing optimally as expected.

Adding some external quality control overseers is important to help the company acknowledge the importance of producing goods in respect to reverse engineering as an important business practice involving technological companies. This enables the company to avoid reinventing technologies following their previous designs.

The company’s quality management system seems effective, especially when considered in its effectiveness in maintaining the quality of the Nokia phones and accessories. Lack of understanding of the principles of reverse engineering makes the expertise of the quality control seem questionable.

Conclusions It is slowly becoming clear that companies venturing within the Arab nations are receiving a motivating welcome and Nokia being a technological investment, the possibility of Nokia UAE becoming strong and independent in the UAE is considerably high. Of greatest concern is the growing concept of Nokia International assuming the importance of the principles of reverse engineering, something expected to influence its future survival when consumers realize this weakness.

It may remain unknown whether the company is really serving under its two aforementioned strategies, differentiation, and cost-effective techniques. This is solely because whereas the company is producing affordable devices, the sophisticated operational process consumes many finances. Inasmuch as the company is producing trendy products, the differentiation aspect remains undermined by lack of proper adherence to the reverse engineering principles.

Introducing technological devices of different shapes, colors, and design is not enough to manipulate the lively technological consumers who are becoming more technologically suave in the modern-day. Consumer’s high exposure to a series of technological devices may finally lead to discovery and design lapses in the devices produced by Nokia. It is imperative to understand the principles of reverse engineering to enhance the quality of its products in terms of innovation.

[supanova_question]

Documentary “Caves” Essay (Movie Review) essay help: essay help

Summary of the Film This documentary illustrates the formation of caves and shows the diversity of species that inhabit them. At first, the authors speak about limestone caves. They note that although these rocks can reach hundreds of feet above the sea level, many were formed under the water. For example, one can mention the famous limestone towers located in Vietnam’s Ha Long Bay (BBC, 2006).

It should be kept in mind that limestone is derived from coral and marine shells. Additionally, the film-makers examine food chains in caves. For instance, there are many species such as cockroaches that never leave the cave, and they are dependent mostly on bat droppings.

Furthermore, this film shows how people can enter the caves even despite the extreme dangers of such trips. Apart from that, this documentary depicts how stalagmites and stalactites are created as a result of calcium deposition.

Moreover, this film shows that caves have been crucial for sustainability of different societies. For instance, one can speak about the caves on the Yucatan Peninsula that acted as water wells. They enabled Maya civilization to get access to water (BBC, 2006). These caves continuously attract divers who want to map them and examine various forms of life that can be found there.

This documentary throws light on the way in which troglobites evolved; for instance, they lost their capacity for vision since they did not use it for thousands of years (BBC, 2006). Moreover, the pigmentation of their skin also changed profoundly. The film demonstrates how the organisms that live without sunlight derive energy. Very often, hydrogen sulphide gas helps them sustain themselves (BBC, 2006).

Furthermore, the authors speak about the discovery of Lechuguilla which is one of the longest caves in the world. This cave is famous for its gypsum crystals (BBC, 2006). The Chandelier Ballroom is the major attractions that can be found here. There may be undiscovered caves which can be compared to Lechuguilla.

Reference List BBC (2006). Caves [Television Broadcast]. In Planet Earth. England: British Broadcasting Corporation.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More

[supanova_question]

Slow Growth of Golfers in the Golf Equipment Industry Essay cheap essay help

The introduction of new rules that limit innovation in the Golf Equipment Industry (GEI) is a major reason for the slow growth in the number of golfers in the recent years. In addition, the global financial crisis that began in December 2007 to 2009 had a devastating effect on the number of golfers in the GEI.

Competitive rivalry force was the most affected among the Porter’s five forces (Gamble 11). This force determines the value that is created in an industry through head-to-head competition among firms. Competition within the GEI was centered on technological innovation, which was permitted initially by the United State Golf Association (USGA) and R

[supanova_question]

Indian myth and legend by Mary Fraser Essay (Book Review) online essay help: online essay help

Summary of the article in the book Mary Fraser begins by exploring Nova Scotia and its aboriginal inhabitants. From the article in the book, it is evident that the Miemac Indians were the aboriginal group that dominated Nova Scotia from very early times. The confederation of eastern Algonquins was the original homeland of this group of people.

They were also considered to be in the third place especially when it came to the ownership of land as a resource. They were given the name Souriquois by some of the earliest missionaries who visited their original land. Before the close of 1693, they were being refereed to as the Miemac. When the land was originally distributed to these Indian ethnic groups, they were given the Algonquin name known as the Migmagig.

This piece of land was made up of southwestern New-Foundland, Quebec, New Brunswick, Prince Edward Island, Cape Breton Island, and Nova Scotia. From the article, it appears that they were largely a peaceful community according to the sentiments of Father Biard. Their main source of income was fishing and hunting. They could also participate gathering of wild fruits, insects and herbs.

The sun was a major point of veneration among the Micmacs according to the historical records obtained from Leclercq. In other words, they worshipped the sun bearing in mind that they saluted the sun both in the morning and evening. Mentou was also part of the great spirits that was worshipped by this group of people. Although they clearly knew that Mentou was a rebellious spirit that had gone against the rules of the Great Spirit, they continued to worship him.

Strengths of the article From the summary of the article, it can be noticed that the author has attempted to explore the background roots of this Indian sub tribe. Fraser does not merely give an outline of the background information of the Micmacs. Instead, the author creates a detailed background of this aboriginal group beginning from the time when their history was first recorded. For instance, Fraser discusses their economic, social, political and cultural ways of life.

Second, Fraser has organized this piece of writing in the most chronological manner. The text can be read and understood quite easily by the reader. The structure of the language used is also friendly enough to the readers in this level. As a matter of fact, this is a mid 17th century history that targets tertiary or college level learners. Therefore, the language used in most suitable for this category of learners.

The author also attempts to give cause and effect of each action taken by this Indian sub tribe. This is similar to expounding the reasons why certain events take place in the piece of literature. This writing technique assists the reader to follow the plot of the historical record of the Indian sub tribe being studied.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Fraser approaches the aspect of civilization of this Indian sub tribe from a very objective point of view. This is apparently one of the strengths of the article. For example, Fraser explains how the Micmac ethnic group was at one time deeply entrenched in worshipping traditional gods and goddesses and how they eventually accepted to turn away from their deeply held traditions.

The author does not give guidance on how the reader should go about the reasoning process after reading this part of the book. This creates room for personal evaluation and promotion of critical thinking skills.

Weaknesses Fraser has apparently failed to balance the three aspects of Micmac’s development and early civilization in Nova Scotia. The author has largely concentrated on the social wellbeing of this Indian sub tribe. A lot of emphasis has been put towards the social civilization of this group of people. This has impeded the development of political, economic and political history of the Indian sub tribe.

The author has also concentrated so much on the discussion of individual missionaries and the vast amount of work they did in converting the aboriginal tribe into Christianity.

In addition, although the author has pointed out that religion was a key pillar in the cultural and social well being of the Micmac people, she has not described the various roles that were played by the same religion. Whereas we may make an assumption that readers are aware of the roles played by religion in this community, the outcomes may be completely wrong.

The political way of life among the Micmac people has not been discussed at length by the author. Although a slight mention of governance has been pointed out in the text, it is not adequate at all. It is imperative to assert that one of the factors that made the Micmac people to be remembered was their strong systems of governance and leadership structures. Perhaps, the author could have given additional attention to the political way of life of this Indian sub-tribe.

The Glooscap myth of the Indians can also be used to explore the fancies, ideals and thoughts of the Indians. Although this myth was dominant during the pre-christian times, it is also interesting to observe that it has remained fundamental in the modern world. Therefore, Fraser could have discussed the transformation phase of the Glooscap myth as well as its relevance in the contemporary Indian society.

We will write a custom Book Review on Indian myth and legend by Mary Fraser specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In recap, it is vital top reiterate that the author of this book was particular objective when presenting the historical plot of the Micmac people from the Indian aboriginals. This implies that the author avoided any possibility of bias when presenting the historical evidence of the Indian sub tribe. Therefore, the audience has been left with full choice of judging the events in the book.

As already mentioned, the article is an interesting piece to read regarding the primitive civilization of the Micmac aboriginal tribe from India. Fraser has clearly documented all the facts regarding the funny lifestyle of this group of people. This presentation technique makes the audience to remain attentive and interested to read the entire piece of writing.

Weaknesses of the article have also been discussed in this piece of critique writing. For example, the political way of life among the Micmac sub tribe was not sufficiently discussed even though the historical documentation was presented in a systematic manner. In addition, only a limited number of social myths have been explored in the article.

Since the Indian sub-tribe was a community entrenched in deep cultural practices, the author could have given more attention to the socio-cultural aspects of the Micmac people. Finally, this section of the book should have covered additional details on the political way of life of the Micmac people.

[supanova_question]

The song “Simple Gifts” Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Joseph Brackett is the composer of the song Simple Gift. He wrote and composed it in 1848 in Maine. Brackett was born in 1797 and died at the age of 85 on the 4th of July 1882. He spent his entire life in Maine where he was actively involved in writing, composing songs, and in religious activities of the Shakers community. His father supported the nuclear unit of Shakers by providing settlement for members of the sect.

His active involvement in the sect led him to be appointed an elder in the community. Brackett is widely known for his songs, particularly Simple Gifts, which are classified as dance songs, work songs, or hymns. The song Simple Gifts was only known within the Shakers community until 1944 when it was first performed at a ballet concert.

The melody was used in Appalachian Springs, a ballet performance by Martha Graham. In 1950, the song was used for the second time in an orchestra performance. Since 1950, the song has been used many times by different composers. They have either rearranged or adapted the song in different ways.

Brackett did not favor specific lyricists, song writers, or composers. He was only affiliated to the Shakers sect. It was through his strong involvement with the sect that he got inspired to write and compose his songs. He wrote dancing songs, the most famous being Simple Gifts.

He is known today because of the song which has been adapted several times. Both the adapted and original versions have an international audience. The most common adapted version is Lord of the Dance, a 1963 publication.

Brackett was active in a social and religious movement. He joined the Shakers sect at the age of 10 with his entire family. His father provided temporary settlement for the first ever nuclear group of the sect. After the death of his father, Brackett continued to rise in ranks, gaining the position of an elder.

He was appointed to lead members of the sect in Maine. By the time he became an elder the nuclear unit of the community had already expanded and occupied other areas within the south.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The song, Simple Gifts, was originally written as a dance song for the Shakers community. The song was performed during special religious events and celebrations. Members of the community used to compose songs and dances for their devotion services. According to the community, one could have several spiritual gifts. Music composition was considered among the spiritual gifts.

They composed and recorded musical inspirations as an exercise of their spiritual gifts. The composers and writers were mainly scribes and elders in the community. They did not have any formal training in music composition. However, they used a notation system called ‘letteral’ that used alphabetical letter with rhythmic notations. The dance songs were significant to the community because they formed part of their culture.

The song, Simple Gifts, has also formed part of popular culture today by being performed in movies, television series, and documentaries. An adopted version of the song was performed at the inauguration ceremony of President Obama in 2009.

Christian religious denominations have also adapted the tune into hymns sang during worship. The only difference is the name given to these hymns. However, the tune is the same. Essentially, the song has been part of larger musical performances.

[supanova_question]

WaterForPeople.org Tech Award Application Research Paper essay help site:edu

Lack of drinking water and water sanitation issues plague most third world countries. Sanitation related diseases and deaths is the number one threat to survival. The current conditions provide little or no regard to the long-term use of the land and the direct effects of dumping human waste in to the water table.

Water for People uses current land surveying technology to map the lands available, viable water sources and create routing systems for drinking and sanitation to create long-term solutions for the residents.

Water for People employs digital land surveying technology in addition to modern plumbing techniques to find viable sources of water and create irrigation for drinking and sanitation systems. Using a system called FLOW and android cell phone, Google earth mapping is used to monitor the systems. They are able to gather data to see what is working, what is in disrepair, and what needs to be changed for optimal efficiency.

Water for people uses community members, entrepreneurs, industry professionals, partners, staff, and World Water Corp volunteers to implement these systems in to the areas of need. Earlier on, Water for People tried to take on all the areas of need on a global basis, they quickly found themselves overwhelmed and the quality of the solution was not up to par.

Water for People has now committed to taking on smaller areas of need in specific regions with a 10-year follow up plan. By concentrating their efforts in selected areas at one time, they are able to implement a long-term solution that is truly effective.

The target market for this project of Water for People Involves people in regions where water is scarce and where the water used for drinking is not safe or even clean. This involves some regions of Asia like India, some regions of Africa such as Uganda and Rwanda, Central American countries such as Guatemala and Honduras, and some regions of South America such as Peru and Ecuador. In all these regions, there is no access to clean water and without the necessary help through such schemes, people would suffer from various infections and diseases.

The FLOW is used as an efficient and effective tool for examining the status of the projects on water. This is however done in a technological manner using the Android technology via a cell phone, Global Positioning System and through the Software called Google Earth.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Through the FLOW, the parties to the project, which include partners and workers, are able to collect information on the various water points. Then through such information, a project’s progress, that is whether it has failed or succeeded, or is ongoing, wrecked or even requires repair, can be monitored through a worldwide map.

FLOW has had several advantages as a technological tool in monitoring of water and sanitation projects. The information received through the FLOW can be used to come up with decisions on programming. Through FLOW, it is easier to supervise and check on the progress of the various water projects.

FLOW also helps by identifying the advancement in the projects, the overall accomplishments of the projects and its major challenges1. Another advantage of FLOW is that data collection and gathering is simple and fast, and the information can be shared by a group of people and still be easily understood.

With this technology, projects can be tracked and the efficiency process enhanced as instant reports on whether a project has failed or passed or requires repair are given immediately. This is not the case had the project’s progress was been checked by persons or supervisors who can lie on the progress. FLOW is therefore an efficient project management tool.

FLOW should be awarded the Tech Award due to its applicability in helping to solve the issue of water and sanitation among individuals in regions such as Africa, South America, and Asia among others.

The issue of water is one that is very pressing in some regions of the world and any efforts whether short term or long term like FLOW, should be recognized, and awarded accordingly. This therefore means that FLOW has helped to improve the health of individuals who are now protected from diseases that are caused due to lack of or taking dirty water.

FLOW should also be awarded for its contribution in solving this global issue of water and sanitation. This issue of water may look like it is a minor issue but due to the importance of water to human life and to all natural habitats, the issue is one that is of global concern.

We will write a custom Research Paper on WaterForPeople.org Tech Award Application specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More FLOW is an innovation that still has room for more improvement in terms of the modern technology and therefore meets the Tech Award criteria. The advantages portrayed by application of this technology are also many and thus FLOW should be awarded for its usage of the modern technology, android technology.

The business model innovations for the FLOW project include the ease of project monitoring, and the use of the Google Earth to facilitate easier passing of data immediately as it is happening. The employment of the latest technology, android, in doing business is also a business model innovation. All these have benefits to the project apart from boosting and enhancing the image of the company through the technology.

Often, many projects are started in Africa, Asia and other countries that are in dire need of clean water. What then happens is that those who are left with the responsibility of monitoring the progress of the projects, or to deal with the finances of the project escape their responsibilities and instead sue the money for their own personal gains.

This is because those who are left with such responsibilities may not be in need of the water services and so may not be passionate about what those who are at ground level go through without having water or walking for long distances to look for water. Therefore, there have been massive failures of water and sanitation projects in areas such as Africa due to this embezzlement of funds by the leaders of such projects, which has seen many projects, fail and even the donors to such projects withdraw from offering help.

The FLOW project is therefore one that can help overcome these problems since one can see the project’s progress technologically without having to receive false information from the project supervisors who sometimes lie about the progress. This technological innovation is therefore very effective and efficient2.

The major constraints and conditions that surround the implementation of this project are that the project requires adequate and unlimited internet access to be able to apply the android technology and Google Earth Software. This is because in order to be able to utilize these two, internet access must be there and it must be consistent.

This means that FLOW cannot go on without internet access, as it is dependent on it. Another issue that can be cited as a constraint to this project is that it is quite expensive to run, but at least worthy for the purpose to be achieved3.

The most likely thing about the founders of this project regarding other innovation approaches is that if in the future they would want to carry out another project, they will still employ technology that is much more advanced. This is following the success and the efficiency brought about by the usage of the android technology.

Not sure if you can write a paper on WaterForPeople.org Tech Award Application by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Even if they are not satisfied with the level of progress and the contribution of the android technology in implementing the FLOW project, I still think that a next attempt to come up with an innovation would still require modern technology, as the benefits that come with it are many.

The demographic features of the target market for the FLOW project include; a very large population that comprises of women and children who suffer a lot to walk for long distances in search of water. This is mostly done by women and children irrespective of their age whether too old or too young.

Another feature is that the areas have very harsh climates, which are characterized by lack of rainfall. The populations are also very poor with small pieces of land, and lack employment opportunities. The distances between their homes and the sources of water are often very large and therefore the people walk for long distances in search of this important commodity.

The psychographic features of the target market include very poor lifestyles. This is because the populations are generally poor and even lack most of the necessities of life. They therefore can just be considered as poor people who often receive relief food from donors around the world4.

Another attribute of psychographics is personality, and although one cannot quite state the personality of everyone, the general personality of such a population is that they are peaceful people who perceive life as unfair and who think that they cannot make it in life without help from others either through food or water. Generally, such a population comprises of people who are desperate for help, and who in most cases, do nothing about their situation unless a third party comes in.

Such people have embraced the practice of begging for help from others and believe that without it they cannot live well 5.Lack of education is also another major challenge faced by people of such populations as many of them have never gone to a classroom and do not know the value of it. Some even perceive it as a waste of money.

The FLOW project utilizes the android technology as it primary source of the innovation. With the growing challenges faced by the android technology, FLOW may end up being affected in the long term due to the current increase in the android malware.

It may take sometime after the project has succeeded or even affect the completion of the project. This means that there is some level of uncertainty regarding the usage of android technology since it is a new technology, which many software developers and technology experts are trying to face out.

For the innovation to become a success, several challenges will face it. This includes high costs of internet, hiring of experts to organize and make the project a success, and high legal costs for the innovation to be branded as a new one. Despite all these challenges, it is important to carry on with the innovation as it one that will reach out too many poor people and thus will be awarded in the Tech Awards Ceremony.

Works Cited Grant, Allen. Beginning Android 4. New York: Springer, 2012. Print.

Hammond, Allen, Koch James, and Noguera, Francisco. “The Need for Safe Water as a Market Opportunity,” Innovations—Technology, Governance, and Globalization, 4.3 (2009): 107-117. Print.

Hart, Stuart, and Clayton, Christensen. “The Great Leap: Driving Innovation from the Base of the Pyramid,” MIT Sloan Management Review, 44.1 (2002): 51-56. Print.

Koch, James. “Breaking Down Barriers to a More Equitable and Prosperous World,” STS Nexus, 8.1 (2007): 8-15. Print.

Koch, James, and Thomas, Caradonna, “Technologies and Business Models that Work in Developing Countries.” International Conference on Information and Communication Technologies and Development (ICTD 2006), University of California, Berkeley, 2006. Print.

Footnotes 1 Koch, James. “Breaking Down Barriers to a More Equitable and Prosperous World,” STS Nexus, 8.1 (2007): 8-15. Print.

2 Hart, Stuart, and Clayton, Christensen. “The Great Leap: Driving Innovation from the Base of the Pyramid,” MIT Sloan Management Review, 44.1 (2002): 51-56. Print.

3 Hammond, Allen, Koch James, and Noguera, Francisco. “The Need for Safe Water as a Market Opportunity,” Innovations—Technology, Governance, and Globalization, 4.3 (2009): 107-117. Print.

4 Grant, Allen. Beginning Android 4. New York: Springer, 2012. Print.

5 Koch, James, and Thomas, Caradonna, “Technologies and Business Models that Work in Developing Countries.” International Conference on Information and Communication Technologies and Development (ICTD 2006), University of California, Berkeley, 2006. Print.

[supanova_question]

CarMax Essay college essay help: college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

CarMax

CarMax Strengths

Challenges

Conclusion

References

Introduction It takes genius to establish a company from scratch and to turn it into a business leader within a decade. The leadership at CarMax did just that. They founded a company based on retailing concepts adopted from other sectors and successfully built a well-respected used car dealership. The company is a good case study on what focused leadership can achieve.

This paper explores how CarMax innovated on its operation by adopting strategies used in other sectors of the economy to revolutionize the sale of used cars. This chapter focuses on the role of Human Resource, Innovation and organizational culture in organizational leadership. By looking at these three elements, it is possible to decipher CarMax’s, business strategy, its challenges, and future prospects.

CarMax The success of CarMax brings to mind similar success by Wal-Mart, which revolutionized retail with innovative concepts. Wal-Mart sought to alter the customer experience when buying goods and therefore developed an ingenious system allowing for a very efficient inventory management system supported by a counterintuitive marketing model.

Wal-Mart went for rural markets that did not have the “superstore” experience. However, the rural areas could provide sufficient markets. CarMax entry into the used car market did not worry many of the used car dealers at the time. However, nineteen years later, CarMax boasts of pride of place among not just used car dealers, but amongst the very best companies to work for in the United States.

As one of the Forbes “100 best companies to work” for five years straight, CarMax indeed is testament to the place of ingenuity in business based on solid research and headed by focused leadership. Its innovative model warrants study to determine the place of leadership in an organization.

CarMax has over 15000 associates in over 100 stores spread throughout the United States (CarMax, 2011). Latest reports indicate that they have plans to open up at least ten more stores in the coming year. This expansion will seek to leverage on the emerging market for used cars because consumers have more confidence in buying used cars through CarMax compared to the traditional used car dealerships.

The cornerstone of CarMax business is customer service based on a robust business system. The founders of the company successfully defined a new way to sell used cars and made the experience of buying used cars much less frightful for buyers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More They removed the barriers that made people fear buying used cars such as haggling over prices, risk of getting poor quality cars with no clearly defined recourse for the buyer, insurance, financing among others. CarMax literally revolutionized the buying and selling of used cars.

In order to reduce the stress of pricing, CarMax uses fixed prices for all their cars. All the customers are sure that the price on the sticker is the price of the car. This relieves both the sales associates and the client of price related worries that come with ordinary used car buying experience.

CarMax pays a fixed commission on unit sales to the associates thereby eliminating the pressure on them to push the pricier cars. The associates can therefore concentrate on providing the customer with support to get the best car for their needs than on getting them to buy the most expensive cars in the yard. This ensures that the cars sold respond to real demand rather than being a reflection of the selling prowess of the sales associates.

CarMax also offers a wide inventory usually consisting of more than 500 cars in a single store (CarMax, 2011). This inventory surpasses the total annual sales of some dealerships. The decision to maintain this level of inventory makes it possible for the client to have variety at any CarMax store.

In addition, the outlets maintain an inventory showing the brands of cars available regionally hence if the client wants a car not present in a particular store, CarMax can arrange for its transfer to the client at a fee.

In addition, the company arranges financing and insurance making it possible for a client to walk in and leave with a car in a few short hours. They offer a five-day money back guarantee (CarMax, 2011). If within the five days after purchase of the car the client feels that the deal is not proper, the client can return the car and get back their money with no questions asked. In addition, the company offers a 30-day warranty on all cars sold.

The offers makes the company stand out because normally, used car dealers sell cars on ‘as-is’ basis. Many of them do not have a refund policy, unless mediated by regulators, and they do not provide any kind of guarantee on the cars. The employment policy of the company does not lean towards experienced used car sales people.

We will write a custom Essay on CarMax specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In fact, the company prefers to employ inexperienced persons whom it takes through a two-week training program to enable them sell the cars. They look out for presentable people who are apt to listen and are able to win the confidence of potential clients.

Selling cars is one-half of the operations of the company. CarMax buys cars in order to resell them. It buys them either from individuals or in bulk from organizations getting rid of their fleets. It makes an offer for a car in as little as 30 minutes and the offer stands for up to seven days, allowing prospective sellers to weigh their options.

This is similar to their stress free shopping policy it extends to buyers. The organizational culture does not support pressure tactics in any of its operations. There is however disquiet that it offers lower prices than a seller can get from other buyers.

In this case, the benefit they offer is that it is less stressful to deal with CarMax even when they are offering a lower price for the car than most other sellers are. For people who value that, CarMax is a good business partner.

The current head of CarMax is Thomas J. Folliard who has been in charge of the company since 2006 (CarMax, 2011). He is a long-term employee of the company who has worked in various departments since its inception in 1993. Folliard has a motivational leadership style crucial for a sales driven entity.

His appointment as CEO shows that the company recognizes the value of transition planning and has a robust system to allow for internal development of talent (Burns, 1979). It also shows that the company appreciates that the business is innovative hence; it requires someone familiar with its organizational history and steeped in its organizational culture to run it profitably. This increases consumer and investor confidence.

CarMax Strengths CarMax has some definite advantages in used car dealership segment. Among these, there is the national presence of the company, the strong brand image, its reputation for superior customer focus and its well-optimized business model that matches inventory with demand.

A national presence is an asset for the company because it increases the visibility of the company. Its nationwide operations make it work as though it were one large store, at least regionally. A client can get whatever car required provided it is available in one CarMax store within the region (CarMax, 2011).

Not sure if you can write a paper on CarMax by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This increases sales volumes and makes inventory management much easier than for individual dealerships. In addition, the size of the operations makes it easier to analyze demand trends, which influences how the company acquires new stock.

It is clear from previous analysis that the optimization of the CarMax business model covers all fronts. In particular, maintaining the critical balance between inventory and demand ensures it has healthy turnover ratios. This limits the quantity of dead stock and increases the ability of the company to respond to shifts in consumer demand at short notice.

Other elements that demonstrate this balance is the ability of the company to provide guarantees to its customers. Guarantees on products only come with a clear understanding of how the products move and the proper management of their quality. Offering guarantees without a strong quality and inventory management system, a business unit risks collapsing based on the possible costs associated with returned stock.

CarMax is a strong brand. Apart from originating a very innovative business concept, it has also managed to provide services at a level that has given it positive visibility. The accolades that contributing to the company’s strong brand image includes the recognition by Forbes magazine as “America’s Most Admired Company in Automotive Retailing” and in addition, the company has consistently been on Fortunes list of “100 Best Companies to Work For” since 2005.

This is good publicity, which speaks of the brand strength of the company and which, also enhances the brand image. Its unrivalled business system guarantees its place in the used car segment of the automotive retail industry.

Without doubt, CarMax is a customer-oriented organization. Its business system does not focus on the bottom line only but focuses on the customer experience while dealing with it. This is probably its greatest strength and its key selling point because a satisfied customer shares their experience with other people, who become potential customers.

CarMax seems to offer everything that conventional used car dealers fail to offer, except the cars. They understand that they are not just selling cars, but are providing an experience for their clients. This is revolutionary.

Unlike profit-focused, commissions-chasing conventional car salespersons, CarMax sales associates come out as trustworthy, well trained, and presentable. They have the requisite training in the business system that they form part of and in addition, they work in an environment that stresses customer satisfaction.

Challenges The most serious challenge that CarMax has is getting good quality cars to put on sale. In as much as the core business of the company is the selling of used cars, the quality of used cars bought by the company present a serious risk to the business both in terms of customer satisfaction and in terms of cost. The company cannot lax in any way when it comes to inspecting the cars bought for resale. Poor quality cars may lead to high refurbishment costs and eventually high resale prices, which may out-price the market.

The company risks turning its employees into robots acting in specific ways because of the high level of optimization so far achieved. While this works perfectly for innovative business models, it also brings about the risk of aversion to innovation. In the long term, it can kill the business because the entity must continually evolve (Murthy, 2007).

It may lead to loss of employees who no longer feel challenged and consequently, a pool of staff unsupportive to change will emerge. This means that the company must remain vigilant during promotions to ensure that the people who hold supervisory roles are supportive of change and accommodative to new ideas (Murthy, 2007). The way to ensure long-term success is to retain the most innovative people in the ranks since the CarMax business model is inherently innovative.

One of the things that may erode the brand image because of unresolved poor customer experiences is class action against the company. As a used car dealership, there is possibility that some of the cars that pass through CarMax have certain defects that the company cannot detect or solve.

If these defects are not declared in advance, a recourse action established in advance, the result can be a pool of unsatisfied customers. If they come together to sue the company, the corresponding publicity may lead to erosion of the brand’s image and subsequently loss of market share.

In light of the mission of CarMax which is ‘To provide our customers great quality cars at great prices with exceptional customer service’, CarMax must do everything in its power to ensure that the challenges it faces does not weaken its efforts to achieve the mission.

CarMax must ensure that its quality control procedures work perfectly because it is the business’ lifeline. Ignoring quality in the business processes will effectively derail the organization’s mission. On the second issue of innovation, the company stands on a foundation of innovation. Its business processes are very innovative and therefore it requires innovative people throughout the system to maintain and improve it.

The risk of class action threatens to rob the company of its brand image. In this case, the company must ensure that it communicates as clearly as possible to all its clientele on the possible defects in the cars it sells and all other business terms to reduce the risk of lawsuits. In the case that they come about, the business must handle them as amicably as possible to ensure it retains the confidence of present and future clients.

CarMax needs to devote its attention to some three areas that are likely to influence its leadership position in the automotive retail sector. They include mainstreaming innovative practices, strengthening quality control and maintaining the obvious strength it possesses in customer service.

The underlying aspect in the organization culture of CarMax is innovation. The business model is innovative blending aspects that other businesses such as Wal-Mart demonstrated. It amalgamated careful research in testing and establishing the model as viable. Its implementation was also very innovative, ensuring that all the stores offered the same standard of service.

If the company loses this innovative edge because of highly streamlined operational process, it risks losing this aspect of its organizational culture (Murthy, 2007). This recommendation requires the alignment of the HR policies of the company towards innovation.

The second recommendation is that in light of the focus on quality that the company works with, there are risks associated with deteriorating quality standards. Quality standards keep changing towards a more stringent stance by both regulators and by market forces.

The company must remain on the forefront of developing acceptable quality standards in all its operations to ensure that it remains reliable as a provider of quality products and services. A possible approach towards ensuring that quality standards remain high is adapting the kaizen practices popularized by Toyota that among other things, stresses on continuous quality improvement.

The third recommendation is that the company must do everything in its power to ensure that it maintains a good public image at all times. The Harvard Business School ( 2005) encourages every organization to leverage on the key aspects of growth to take advantage of the strategic position provided by its sources of competitive advantage.

With growth, there is always the risk of suits and claims of dissatisfaction among customers. The process used in handling complaints must have the robustness required. As the company expands, a proportional expansion of its services must be part of the company’s policy.

Conclusion The CarMax case shows that despite the success of an organization at any point, there is always a clear need to maintain an innovative edge in business practices to maintain competitive advantage. The role of innovation comes out very clearly in the case of CarMax that now boasts the pride of place in the automobile retail sector.

The challenges identified prove that despite success, it is very risky for a business to slacken because it may lead to a loss of competitive advantage. CarMax has a good standing now. It has no assurance that things will always be like that. It should achieve greater heights in its business if the management remains focused on the company’s vision.

References Burns, J. M. (1979). Leadership. New York, NY: Harper

[supanova_question]

Comparison of Religion in Australia and the United States Essay essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Significance of religion in Australia

Significance of religion in America

Conclusion

References

Introduction Religion refers to multifaceted dogmas and does that point to a set of standards and comprehension of the significance of actuality. All over the world, human beings have engaged in religion for thousands of years. In the United States and Australia, a number of their citizens cannot trace their place of origins in the last century (McDannell 2002, p. 123).

Equally, up to a quarter of them were born outside of the two countries. Surprisingly, most of the major world’s religious groups are represented in the two countries. In some other parts of the world such as in Europe and Asia, religion was practiced as early as 2000 years ago.

In both countries, the indigenous religions have vanished as the natives adopt the religions from outside the continents. This illustrates that spiritual values and forms can vary quite rapidly, whereas features of the old religion created elsewhere can also be preserved. This article seeks to compare and contrast the significance of religion in Australia and the United States.

Significance of religion in Australia In Australia, the sacred societies that have faith in religion portray a number of diverse structures of conviction, practice, and group, which determine their attitudes towards life. Two-third of the country’s populations is made up Christians (Bouma 2006, p. 79).

The other one-third comprises of the Islam, Buddhists, Jewish, and atheist. Despite its popularity, religion plays a significant role in the attentions and ordinary lives of few Australians. With respect to the research done by International Survey, 28% of the Australians consider themselves non-religious (Bouma 2006, p. 79). Among this group, religious practices and values have hardly featured in their day-to-day lives.

According to the same survey, 25% of Australians consider themselves as deeply religious (Bouma 2006, p. 80). Equally, 44% of the Australians categorize themselves spiritual. However, religion does not play a vital role in their day-to- day lives.

Forty eight percent of Australians do not participate in personal prayer. Similarly, 52% do not attend religious gatherings. In general, religious conviction scored lesser than all other parts of Australians daily life, considered that more than 50% of the population perceive religion the least significant unlike families, partners, or careers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More From mid 19th century, the state provided aid to various organizations to establish and run churches and schools across Australia. These institutions formed the basis of an ordered social existence and community life. Ever since then, churches have played major roles in civilizing Australians.

They have inculcated principles of integrity and character, which have enhanced civic accountability and admiration for others. From the 19th century, churches have collectively enhanced the democratic ideals and practices that preceded the formation of the Australian nation state. These churches were intrinsic to the success of the Australian democratic experiment.

The church missionary activities socialized and cultured ordinary people, so endowing them with the kinds of property and capital that was the requisite for the achievement of the democratic ideals of liberty, equality, and fraternity in the regional and federal governments.

Similarly, religion has had a say in the education and development of youths. Through this, religion has had an influence on their social behaviours and promoted the comradeship and civic literacy that is crucial to democratic participation.

Moreover, all through Australian history, religion has played a vital role in legitimating political power, bestowing certain leaders with supernatural powers, providing social power to governments and laws, and strengthening prospects of service and public spirit on the part of persons (Hughes

[supanova_question]

Answer the following question on 2 double-spaced pages: The movie discusses how the Prison Industrial Complex uses the free labor Essay college admissions essay help

Answer the following question on 2 double-spaced pages: The movie discusses how the Prison Industrial Complex uses the free labor of incarcerated people to fuel the production of goods for major companies and private industries like McDonalds, Boeing, Microsoft, Anderson Flooring, and even Idaho potatoes, much like the sweatshops that we denounce overseas for exploiting free labor. What role does capitalism/consumerism play in Mass incarceration and racism, and what, if anything, you think we can do as consumers to potentially impact change and help end mass incarceration?

[supanova_question]

Hertzberg Theory: Application at the Workplace Research Paper best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Critique of Herzberg theory and application at the workplace

Herzberg theory at my workplace

Recommendation

References

Critique of Herzberg theory and application at the workplace Developed and proposed by the American psychologist Frederick Herzberg in 1950s, the Herzberg Theory states that job satisfaction and job dissatisfaction at the workplace are independent of each other and are caused by two sets of distinct factors (Herzberg 2004).

The theory proposed the “two-factor” fundamentals, in which it states “job motivators” are the factors that produce satisfaction (positive), arising from intrinsic conditions at the workplace. They include recognition, personal growth and achievements (Herzberg 2004).

On the other hand, “hygiene factors” do not produce positive satisfaction, but their absence results into job dissatisfaction. According to the theory, hygiene factors are the extrinsic conditions at the workplace and include a number of aspects such as company practices, policies and remunerations to the company employees (Schultz

[supanova_question]

Planet Earth: Mountains Essay (Movie Review) online essay help

Summary The Planet Earth series are amazing in that they embrace practically all wonders that nature has to offer. One might think that Planet Earth is solely about soil, lava and the core of the planet, yet it, strangely enough, manages to capture a number of other peculiar information into the scope of a forty-minute series.

The video opens with an image of the “frozen alien world” (documentareorg, 2011, January 31, 0:41), and the next spot that it takes its audience to is one of the hottest spots in the entire world, the “other extreme” in Ethiopia (documentareorg, 2011, January 31, 01:01).

After a short introduction about how volcanoes are made and what the volcanic forces are, the narrator switches to practical examples by showing Ethiopian mountains and describing the process of their formation. As soon as the history of the Ethiopian Mountains is briefly touched upon, the local mountain dwellers are sown to the viewers.

Attractive in their own anthropomorphous way, Gelada monkeys appear to be rather well adjusted to the harsh environment of the Ethiopian Mounts. To prove his point, the narrator shifts the focus from Geladas onto the Ethiopian mountain climate, describing it as very changeable. Clearly, Ethiopia is a place where one can observe “all seasons in one day” (documentareorg, 2011, January 31, 09:35).

After the audience had learned about the herbivores that one can encounter in mountains, it was time to talk about the local carnivores. The narrator made the audience face the heat of Africa and follow a family of pumas, which he described them as the “lions of the Andes” (18:04).

Soon more dangerous dwellers of mountains were revealed to the viewers – the latter were able to observe a family of bears. Speaking of danger, the issue of avalanches was discussed as well.

Finally, the audience appears at the “roof of the world” (documentareorg, 2011, January 31,), known as the Mount Everest. The documentary ends on a relatively general and rather sad note, with a demoiselle crane hovering over the mountains in search for its nestling, which fell prey to an eagle.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Despite the depressing ending, the movie still leaves a tangible feeling of wonder about the subject matter, as it actually should. Though explored well, mountains are still very fascinating, especially taking their rather unusual nature into account. A true wonder of nature, mountains are, and will be, one of the most wonderful places on Earth.

Reference List documentareorg (2011, January 31). Planet Earth 02 – mountains. Web.

[supanova_question]

The Effects of Energy Drinks and Alcohol on Neuropsychological Functioning Essay (Critical Writing) essay help free: essay help free

The article by Curry and Stasio (2009, pp. 473-481) acts as a literary source of information when a clinician intends to gather data on a clinical trial. However, a critical review of this article reveals that there are several issues that the authors fail to adhere to. The evaluation carried out in the current paper seeks to point out these areas. According to Brody (2012), a research article is expected to provide adequate and reliable information on its subject matter.

That notwithstanding, the evaluation conducted in this paper highlights the relevant issues addressed by Curry and Stasio in this article. The article is titled The Effects of Energy Drinks alone and Alcohol on Neuropsychological Functioning (Curry

[supanova_question]

Trials and Verdicts Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me

The important result of the legal decision-making process is the verdict which can end the trial process and state the form of punishment for the convicted person.

However, to understand the details related to interpreting the cases and law and to stating the verdict, it is necessary to analyze the processes related to different courts according to their jurisdiction, and to focus on the real-life examples in order to discuss the problems of accepting a plea bargain and of being wrongly accused.

The question of the court’s jurisdiction is discussed when it is necessary to select which court can decide on the certain case appropriately. Following the Felkner v. Jackson case, it is possible to state that different courts are effective to discuss concrete issues and decide on the aspects of the case, but the process of the case resolution can be rather long and complicated.

In 2011, Steven Frank Jackson was convicted of many sexual offenses. However, Jackson referred to the Batson v. Kentucky case, and focused on the issue of racism in relation to the California jury who discussed the case.

Jackson’s petition was accepted and examined by the California Court of Appeal, and then the California Supreme Court decided according to the court’s jurisdiction to reject the necessity of the case’s review (Felkner v. Jackson, 2011). Nevertheless, the case was not unresolved even in relation to the Federal District Court.

In this situation, the Supreme Court took the jurisdiction to provide the decision, and the previous courts’ decisions were defined as unreasonable. Finally, it is stated by the Supreme Court of the United States that the petition “for certiorari and the motion for leave to proceed in forma pauperis are granted.

The judgment of the Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit is reversed, and the case is remanded for further proceedings consistent with this opinion” (Felkner v. Jackson, 2011). As a result, it is possible to note that the decision to discuss the case in the Supreme Court of the United States is appropriate because of the necessity to resolve all the controversial points of the case which cannot be resolved in the other courts.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The cases when the defendant accepts a plea bargain as an alternative to trial are also very controversial and complicated because this decision can be associated with a kind of pressure from attorneys and prosecutors. Furthermore, the defendant can change his or her decision during the process. Thus, to discuss the question in detail, it is necessary to focus on the Freeman v. United States case (2011).

William Freeman was convicted of different crimes associated with drug trafficking and drug delivery. However, Freeman decided to develop the plea agreement under Fed. R. Crim. P. 11(c)(1)(C). The agreement meant that Freeman could plead guilty depending on receiving a specific sentence.

The case was rather complicated, and it was decided in 2011 that referring to 18 U.S.C. § 3582(c)(2), the sentence could be reduced “for the offense to which the defendant pled guilty” (Freeman v. United States, 2011).

In spite of the fact that the plea agreement does not mean the alternative to the trial, the case is important to be discussed to decide whether or not justice was served. Referring to this concrete case, it is possible to state that the justice was served because the severity of crimes should be taken into account every time when the possibility of the plea agreement is discussed.

The most problematic cases are those ones in which defendants are wrongly accused and later vindicated. One of the most famous cases is the case associated with the famous sportsman Brian Banks who was convicted of raping Wanetta Gibson. Brian Banks accepted a plea bargain because of the threat to be imprisoned for more than 40 years.

However, in 2011, it became possible to state that Banks was not guilty, and he was vindicated. The most important aspect to be discussed in relation to the case is the fact that Wanetta Gibson lied during the first trial process in order to receive the significant financial compensation (Powers, 2012).

The decision of the court could be different, but the lawyers failed to prove or not Gibson’s words. That is why, these details affected the whole trail process, and Brian Banks had to accept the plea agreement in order to avoid being imprisoned for a long period of time.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Trials and Verdicts specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In spite of the fact, the United States’ legislative system should contribute to the people’s welfare and protection, there are many controversial verdicts and trials which can influence the statement of the principles of justice in the country.

From this point, it is necessary to pay much attention to the controversial aspects and issues discussed during the trial processes in order to resolve cases in the appropriate courts with the focus on their jurisdiction and to avoid the ineffective decisions which can lead to the unalterable consequences. As a result, all the details of the case should be taken into consideration to decide on the person’s guilt and possible verdict.

References Felkner v. Jackson. (2011). Retrieved from https://www.supremecourt.gov/opinions/10pdf/10-797.pdf

Freeman v. United States. (2011). Retrieved from https://www.supremecourt.gov/opinions/10pdf/09-10245.pdf

Powers, A. (2012). A 10-year nightmare over rape conviction is over. Retrieved from https://www.latimes.com/local/la-xpm-2012-may-25-la-me-rape-dismiss-20120525-story.html

[supanova_question]

E-Marketing: Mobile Development Essay (Article) cheap essay help

Table of Contents Email Marketing

Social Media Strategies

Search Engine Optimization

Online Reputation Management

References

The past years witnessed the growing importance of mobile technologies in e-marketing and e-commerce. As more consumers start to use mobile devices for daily communication, online and brick-and-mortar companies seek to use these technologies in their marketing strategies.

According to Hovancakova (2011), the current trends and patterns in global marketing justify the importance of mobile development as a tool of marketing, but with the growing intensity of business competition, organizations and marketing professionals will have to be aware of the new mobile technology developments, in order to be the first to use their advantages in the short and long run.

Hovancakova (2011) writes that mobile marketing is a relatively new term, which is used to define messages that are distributed with the help of mobile technologies, including SMS, MMS, and others. For many organizations, mobile technologies have become a real salvation in the field of marketing.

With the help of wireless communication media, organizations can reach broader audiences and reduce the costs of their marketing efforts. In the meantime, potential and real customers can use these messages to keep in touch with their suppliers and be aware of the most attractive product and service propositions that may be available within a limited period of time.

For instance, it has become quite common for large and small stores to inform their customers of new discount propositions, by sending an MMS or an SMS. As a result, the company knows that its customers are informed, whereas customers are not afraid of missing an attractive product opportunity.

Mobile development in e-marketing has become so important that some governments develop new legal frameworks to be applied in the field of mobile marketing (Hovancakova, 2011). At the same time, due to the rapid development of the mobile technologies field and the lack universal criteria of use, cases of misuse in mobile marketing are not uncommon (Hovancakova, 2011).

Nevertheless, mobile development offers immense advantages to organizations and marketing professionals. A piece of technology as small as mobile phone can empower the largest organizations to reach each and every customer with a simple and attractive product or service message.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The success of mobile development in e-marketing depends mostly on the quality and consistency of the technologies used by firms. Given the growing diversity of mobile applications, only organizations that are aware of the latest technology developments will be able to use their benefits in their marketing strategies.

For instance, as more customers start to use smartphones for daily communications, marketing executives and researchers should focus on the analysis of marketing opportunities that become available with this kind of technology (Persaud

[supanova_question]

The Challenge of Constructing a Bridge over the Chacao Channel Case Study college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Torben Forsberg and Anton Petersen are two renowned civil engineers with qualifications from the Technical University of Denmark. In their article The Challenge of Constructing a Bridge over the Chacao Channel, the authors describe possibilities of improving the design of a new bridge. The authors’ arguments on alternative possibilities are based on the fact that the construction of the new bridge has many challenges.

The challenges mentioned in the article include large tides and currents, strong seismic loads, wind and unstable ground conditions. According to the authors, the proposed design is compromised and requires technical review to ensure that the bridge is aesthetically pleasant and cost-effective.

However, the article provides a solution by proposing new bridge alternatives. The authors review new bridge alternatives in relation to existing challenges. In each of the new bridge alternatives, a clear discussion with technical details is outlined. In this regard, the reader detects advantages of using various design alternatives in respect to technical demands and cost-efficiency.

The article describes the construction project, its geographical location, as well as environmental challenges associated with the new bridge. Examples of such conditions include possible earthquakes, wind and strong currents. The authors’ description of the Chacao channel as extremely challenging is effective. This description justifies the need to initiate technical competency in construction of the new bridge.

The authors also estimate the depth, tidal variation and the speed of water. Besides, they mention the possible magnitude of earthquakes expected in the region. Moreover, a description of the climatic conditions such as wind speed provides insight into the technical demands of the project.

The authors’ description of bridge alternatives follows technical logic by providing specifications of each design. In this regard, the authors explain why each design is only effective in prevailing environmental conditions. For example, the authors give details and advantages of using a continuous two-main-span suspension bridge.

The article evaluates alternative bridge designs that can withstand the existing environmental challenges. In this regard, the authors evaluate both classical and conventional bridge solutions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The main strength of the article is the focus on a factual project that exists in a geographically known territory. This is important to the reader who may decide to research further about the project and on the engineering design used to build the bridge. The authors’ credibility as civil engineers from a reputable engineering school is additional strength of the article’s content.

The article’s weakness that can be highlighted is that the article does not entirely solve the challenges of building the bridge. In fact, the authors offer a detailed research of other alternatives that could improve the construction of the bridge, but do not provide details of how the construction of the bridge was completed. Moreover, the authors fail to give examples of replicas of bridge designs in other regions.

The credibility of the authors as civil engineers is effectively felt in the article, though it is not emphasized. In my opinion, the article content is clear, accurate and insightful. The authors have been able to engage the reader’s mind using simple terms and graphics.

For example, the authors have used graphs and maps to emphasize on their arguments. Another important aspect of the article’s strength is the use of Chacao channel topography. In addition, the article is useful in providing future research material.

[supanova_question]

Understanding the Mind Report college admission essay help

Abstract The aim of this study was to investigate whether early alertness on misinformation reduces chances of creating false memories in humans, and whether there was any relationship between DRM false memories and misinformation. As noticed from the study, initial perceptions on certain issues or events created after receiving the first information always affects human memory.

As evident from the findings of this study, there is a relatively positive correlation between early alertness about the occurrence of misinformation and chances of creating false memories about certain events in human beings.

Children filled with misconstrued information about certain aspects of their childhood will eventually build false memories due to receiving misleading information earlier. Alerting or warning people about incoming information increases their alertness, and thus, reduces chances of building false memories. The DRM technique of identifying false memories in humans is practicable in human cognitive psychology.

Understanding the Mind The impact of misleading information on people’s perception of certain life events, issues, or experiences is still unknown. How people communicate and interpret information during conversation is imperative in determining the final perception of the content delivered (Blair, Lenton,

[supanova_question]

Sportswear Merchandise in UK Essay essay help site:edu

Introduction Businesses operate in industries characterised by unique attributes, which emanate from interaction between internal and external forces. These forces interact in both predictable and unpredictable ways. Silber and Kearny (2010, p.110) argue that the ‘interactions are both complex and uncontrollable’. Action oriented business executives have an obligation to understand the industry in which their organisations operate.

Subsequently, business executives should put sufficient efforts to understand and utilise the complex interactions between businesses for the success of the organisation. Gaining insight on the prevailing industry dynamics gives business executives perceptivity on the business model and strategies to implement.

The retail industry is among the most dynamic industries in the world. According to the Euro Monitor (2013), the retail industry is characterised by inconsistent consumer preferences, intense competition, and short product life. This paper analyses the retail industry. The analysis mainly focuses on sportswear merchandise. Considering the large size of the global sportswear industry, the paper focuses on the UK market.

Industry analysis Industry structure

The sportswear industry is comprised of the apparels and the athletic footwear industry. The industry is labour intensive; consequently, firms in the industry undertake their production activities in low-wage countries. According to a Press Release by PRLOG, the UK fashion industry is very price-competitive.

Moreover, the industry is characterised by high market demand. It is estimated that approximately 90% of UK citizens under the age of 35 years, which covers 75% of the total population, purchase from the fashion industry. This high market potential has led to remarkable increment in the intensity of competition (Euro Monitor 2013).

Campbell and Craig (2005, p.72) accentuate that understanding ‘the underlying structures of a company’s industry, now and in the future is a core discipline in strategy formation’. Understanding the prevailing level of competition is one of the ways through which CEOs can gain insight on the most effective strategy to adopt.

CEOs should take into account the Porter’s five forces. The five forces assist in organisations’ efforts to determine the long-term profitability of the industry. Below is an analysis of the forces that shape competition in the UK sportswear industry.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Threat of entry: (high)

The major industry players include Nike, Puma, Adidas, Under Amour, and K-Swiss. Currently, Nike ranks as the leading industry player in the global sportswear industry. Nike has gained substantial market dominance over the past years. In 2011, the firm’s revenue amounted to $ 23 billion. Moreover, the firm’s global market share increased to 4.6% in 2011 to 3.7% in 2006.

The firm’s market share is expected to increase to 6.3% by 2017. The firms’ growth illustrates the industry’s potentiality (FashionMag 2011). The threat of new entrants in the industry is relatively high due to the low manufacturing cost. Most sportswear products in the UK are imported from emerging economies such as China. Subsequently, the barriers to entry into the industry are relatively low.

New firms are increasingly entering the industry in their pursuit to exploit the prevailing market potential. It is projected that the sportswear market value will grow to 8.6% by the end of 2015 (FashionMag 2011). The high threat of entry has significantly reduced switching cost.

Supplier bargaining power: (low)

There are a large number of suppliers in the sportswear industry. Moreover, the suppliers have not differentiated their raw materials. Consequently, their bargaining power is relatively low. Lack of differentiation enables the firms to switch between suppliers at a minimal cost.

The main raw materials for the industry include rubber, cotton, and leather, which are readily available in the market. Despite the low supplier bargaining power, the leading conglomerates such as Adidas and Nike have a distinct bargaining power (British Fashion Council 2011).

Buyer bargaining power: (high)

The industry is characterised by high buyer bargaining power emanating from the large number of sportswear consumers. Consequently, the industry players such as Nike and Adidas must differentiate their products in order to attain the desired market share and sales revenue.

The high buyer bargaining power has stimulated the industry players to implement mechanisms aimed at nurturing a high level of customer loyalty. For example, Nike Incorporation has developed nikeid.com, hence providing consumers with an opportunity to customise their footwear and apparel designs.

We will write a custom Essay on Sportswear Merchandise in UK specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Threat of substitute: (Low)

According to the British Fashion Council (2011), the buyers’ propensity to substitute sportswear is relatively low due to the little alternatives that consumers can switch to in their purchasing trends. The products and performance specification of each brand makes the threat of a substitute to be low. For example, football players cannot wear boots when playing football.

Rivalry: (high)

The large number of industry players has led to an increment in the degree of rivalry. Large firms such as Adidas AG, Callaway Golf Co., Amer Sports, and Nike Incorporation dominate the industry. As aforementioned, Nike Incorporation is ranked as the largest sportswear company in the industry; on the other hand, Adidas has gained substantial market position as it has been in existence for over 60 years.

These firms have undergone remarkable growth over the past two decades. The firms have attained substantial market recognition by integrating effective marketing strategies such as Internet marketing and electronic commerce. The use of emerging technologies has enabled the large firms to maximise their sales revenue.

Nike Incorporation plans to increase its market dominance in the European region by exploiting the Winter Olympics, the Super Bowl, and the World Cup (Marketing Week 2013). Below is a summary of the competitiveness of the sportswear industry in the UK.

Competitive analysis The sportswear industry is characterised by intense competition emanating from the adoption of effective strategic management practices. The industry has experienced a high level of consolidation over the past few years. In 2013, Nike sold Umbro, which is one of its brands, to Iconix. Subsequently, Nike positioned itself as the official sponsor of international renowned international football clubs.

The Adidas-Reebok merger is another example of the strategic changes in the industry (Euro Monitor 2013). The collapse of JJB, which was a sportswear retailer in the UK, led to the entry of new firms such as Matalan. Other major retailers include Sports Direct and Sporting Pro.

Sports Direct ranks as the leading sportswear retailer in the UK. On the other hand, Sports Pro has attained an optimal market position by carrying other brands such as New Balance, Adidas, Reebok, Nike, and Asics. Moreover, the firm has established over 5,400 stores.

The high market potential in the industry will stimulate market growth significantly. For example, Nike and Adidas announced their plan to expand their store network over the next few years (Joseph 2013).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Sportswear Merchandise in UK by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Goldfingle (2013, par. 12) argues that with ‘the brands’ interest in becoming retailers, the sportswear market could look very different and more competitive in five years’ time’. Appendix 1 illustrates the brand positioning in the UK sportswear industry. The positioning map has been based on the age of the respective brands and their affluent amongst the consumers.

Macro environmental forces

The competitiveness of the sportswear industry is also influenced by external forces, which emanate from political, social, technological, social, economic, and environmental factors. Consequently, business managers should evaluate the environment in which their businesses operate. Below is an analysis of the major external forces.

Political structure and trends

Expansion of firms in the retail sector is subject to the land system policies adopted in the UK. The UK government influences operations of firms in the retail sector through the land-planning system. The UK government has instituted tight restrictions on green-field and off-centre development.

The policy has made it extremely difficult for retailers intending to expand in other areas of the UK by establishing retail outlets. The UK government also controls operations of the retail sector through the Competition Commission, whose objective is to safeguard the consumers’ interests.

Economic structures

The prevailing economic structures in a country have a remarkable impact on the success of a particular industry. The UK has experienced a significant economic growth over the past decades. The 2008 global economic crisis adversely affected the country’s economic performance.

However, the government has been very committed to improving the country’s economic performance. In 2011, the country’s Gross Domestic Product (GDP) averaged £329.1 billion. Moreover, the country’s GDP increased with a margin of 1.5% during its 2009/2010 fiscal year. This trend shows that the economy is undergoing an upwards spiral economic growth, which is predicted to be sustained in the future.

Social environment

There is a significant change in the consumers’ purchasing patterns in the UK. This trend has arisen from the increment in the consumers’ disposable income (Pahl

[supanova_question]

Examining a Sector in Travel Industry Essay writing essay help: writing essay help

Introduction The travel industry is one of the most lucrative service sectors in the UK. The industry accommodates various companies that offer different travel services such as vacation reservation via the Internet, tour operations, and travel agency professional services.

Other sectors in the industry are cruise lines, airlines, food service companies, car renting, rail travel companies, meeting and conventions, parks, sporting and entertainment companies, publication organisations, marketing research organisations, and regulatory agencies. Each of these sectors has various organisations, which operate under competition.

For instance, in the marketing sector, there are different organisations that offer marketing research services to various organisations that deal with travel services in the bid to help them analyse their industry trends to derive better strategies to retain and increase their market share.

Competition also occurs between organisations in different sectors. For example, the airlines sector competes with companies that offer alternative means of travel such as the rail travel.

The vast and the sheer number of organisations operating in the entire travel industry in the UK makes it impossible to conduct an overhaul examination of the services offered in the industry. This paper focuses only on the cruise lines sector.

Operational cruise lines in the UK include Cruise and Maritime Voyages, European Water Ways, Fred Olsen Cruise Lines, Cunard Line, P

[supanova_question]

The Role of the Brain in Cognition Essay cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Role of the brain in cognition

The case of Phineas Gage

Conclusion

References

Introduction Cognition refers to the process through which information is processed, stored, and recovered for use (Glees, 2005). This process involves several mental processes that play different roles in order to enhance functions such as memory, comprehension, learning, problem solving, thinking, and decision making. The brain plays a pivotal role in cognition.

It is a faculty that helps to process sensory information, apply knowledge, and make important decisions (Glees, 2005). Cognition comprises mental functions and processes, as well as intelligent entities. The brain uses its various parts to process information.

For example, certain parts are concerned with memory while other parts deal with learning. The case of Phineas Gage is widely used to demonstrate the role of the brain in cognition. His brain injury is used in the field of psychology to understand and explain the functioning of the human brain with regard to cognition.

Role of the brain in cognition The brain plays a pivotal role in supporting cognitive functions. Examples of cognitive functions include learning, memory, and perception (Glees, 2005). The brain has several parts that play different roles in the execution of cognitive functions. Parts of the brain involved in cognition include prefrontal cortex, frontal and parietal lobes, temporal lobes, and occipital lobe (Roizman, 2010).

The prefrontal cortex is the latest part of the brain to be discovered in the field of psychology. It executes high-priority cognitive functions that include planning, assessment of the outcomes of actions, and expression of personality traits (Roizman, 2010). In addition, this area expresses the aptness of various behaviors in different social contexts.

The frontal lobes deal with two main cognitive functions that include language comprehension and memory (Roizman, 2010). The left and right frontal lobes perform different functions. The left lobe deals with language comprehension while the right lobe processes information. Damage to these lobes is characterized by poor decisions and inability to make good plans.

Parietal lobes aid in the processing of sensory information. For example, it converts and consolidates sensory input into memories that are stored in the brain. Temporal lobes serve the role of processing auditory sensory information mainly for speech recognition (Glees, 2005).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In addition, they aid in memory and recognition of physical objects. For example, the brain’s role of identifying sounds and odors is executed by the temporal lobes. Finally, the occipital lobe plays the role of processing visual information (Roizman, 2010). Damage to the occipital lobe causes a condition that is characterized by reduced functionality of sight, and inability to recognize apparent deficits.

The case of Phineas Gage Phineas Gage was a railroad construction worker who is an important figure in psychology. Gage survived an accident in which his brain’s frontal lobe was damaged by an iron bar that passed through his head (Flesichman, 2004). The injury had far-reaching effects on his behavior and personality for the 12 years that he lived after the accident.

This incident is widely used in the field of psychology to explain how certain brain areas support cognitive functions. After the injury, Gage showed certain changes in behavior that characterized changes in behavior due to damage to certain brain areas. The frontal lobe plays roles such as problem solving, planning, and decision-making. The prefrontal cortex expresses personality.

After the accident, studies of Gage’s behavior revealed several changes. For example, he could make plans and fail to execute them to completion (Flesichman, 2004). His friends also reported that his personality had changed significantly. Before the accident, Gage was a shrewd, persistent, and energetic businessperson. However, after the accident, these traits were replaced by destructive qualities that affected his life negatively.

He neither made good plans nor completed his projects due to lack of persistence. His personality traits after the accident included irreverence, impatience, and irresponsibility. Other behaviors that resulted from the injury included irresponsible sexual behavior, domestic violence against his wife and children, lying, gambling, bullying, and lack of foresight (Flesichman, 2004).

These behaviors mainly resulted from poor judgment and planning. One of the most common signs of frontal lobe damage is change in behavior. An individual who suffers damage to their frontal lobes does not behave as they used to before the damage.

People who are close to the individual can observe these changes in behavior. After the accident, Gage showed a decrease in the efficiency of functions that included planning, judgment, inhibition, and decision making (Flesichman, 2004).

We will write a custom Essay on The Role of the Brain in Cognition specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion The brain serves several roles, one of which is supporting cognitive functions. Parts of the brain that support cognition include prefrontal cortex, frontal and parietal lobes, temporal lobes, and occipital lobe. Each of these parts performs a different role. Examples of cognitive functions performed by these parts include judgment, memory, and decision-making, problem solving, and planning.

The brain injury of Phineas Gage is used by psychologists to demonstrate the role of the brain with regard to cognition. After the accident, Gage’s personality changed tremendously after damage to his brain’s frontal lobe. Behavioral changes included irresponsible sexual behavior, domestic violence against his wife and children, lying, gambling, bullying, and lack of foresight.

References Flesichman, J. (2004). Phineas Gage: A Gruesome but True Story about Brain Science. New York: Houghton Mifflin Harcourt.

Glees, P. (2005). The Human Brain. London: Cambridge University Press.

Roizman, T. (2010). The Brain Functions Involved in Cognitive Functions. Retrieved from https://howtoadult.com/177861-the-brain-functions-involved-in-cognitive-functions.html

[supanova_question]

Communication Perspectives Essay online essay help: online essay help

Table of Contents Definition

Discussion

Examples

Conclusion

References

Definition Interpersonal interactions occur through symbols or gestures. During communication, the sender is often unconscious of the subtle symbols he or she is communicates to the receiver. These symbols form the unconscious communication that develops into language.

Thus, ‘language as communication’ is the “communication through significant symbols” (Márkova

[supanova_question]

Screw Compressor Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Screw compressors are some type of gas compressors that use two interlocking screws to capture and compress gas. Screw compressors are of two types, the dry running screw compressor, and the oil-flooded screw compressor. Lubricating oil is used in the oil-flooded compressor to facilitate the screwing process. The oil also provides a hydraulic seal that passes energy between the screws.

In the dry running compressor, male and the female rotors maintain a special alignment in a timely manner, such that, one screw drives the other to form a continuous rotation of the screws (Bloch and Soares 76). The interaction of the male-female thread traps air, compresses it, and converts it into energy.

In both types of screw compressors, the air enters through the suction point; the rotors compress it while they rotate, and it finally gets its way out through the outlet as energy. Unlike other compressors that are somewhat noisy, screw compressors are noiseless and they compress air continuously.

The first step in operating a dry running screw compressor is ensuring the power unit has a strong cooling system. Two-screw gear units inside the chambers are shaped differently, but in a manner that they interlock perfectly. While rotating, the screws suck and trap air as they rotate from one end.

The rotation of the screws reduces the size of the chamber and this facilitates the compression process. As the screws rotate, they push the compressed air forward to the next screw to allow the sucking of new uncompressed air. The highly compressed air forces itself out at the discharge point. Compressors work differently depending on whether they are oil free or oil flooded.

There is no oil lubrication in the oil free compressors; thus, the movement of the screws compresses the air without necessarily depending on the oil seal. Such compressors do not give high-pressured power. However, there are multistage compressors that give high-pressured power by compressing air at several screw sets. In the first stage, air is compressed into a few bars to become light and extremely hot.

The light air will thus moves to the succeeding screw bars easily. Every move of the air makes it extremely hot, and this continues until the air reaches the outlet point. In most case, oil-free compressors are made up of about seven bars. For the oil-flooded compressors, users inject oil into the screws. As the screws rotate, the oil finds its way onto the sealing of the cavities to provide some cooling effect.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The oil is also useful in capturing particles in the air during the air sanction process. When the compressed gas gets its way into the discharge end, any oil that is present in the air is filtered and recycled. However, this is not an assurance that the compressed air is free from oil traces.

The applications of screw compressors vary from construction to industrial applications. Oil-injected screw compressors are used in industries that require large volumes of compressed air. Moreover, industries that operate high-powered tools would find it worthwhile to use screw compressors to generate the required volumes of compressed air instead of using piston compressors.

Contractors can also use oil-injected screw compressors to operate the construction machineries, whereas, the wastewater treatment machineries also find it worthwhile to use such compressors in their process because they consume low power. In the case of medical researches, dry running screw compressors would be of great use.

Lobe Compressor A lobe compressor has some similarities with the screw compressors, only that the screws in the screw compressors are replaced with lobes. A lobe compressor has two 8-shaped profiled lobe blowers. The 8-shaped lobes rotate inside some somewhat oval casings. The lobes are always 900 apart at any instance whenever they are in operation. The distance between the two lobes allows them to hold as much air as possible.

During operation, one of the lobes acts as the driver. It obtains is power from external sources while the other lobe relies on it to rotate. The oval casings and the system pressure do not allow the discharged air to came back unless under very small spillages.

However, the spillages are negligible, as only small amounts of air would be allowed in case of a slip. With the air coming and going out, there is no change in the volume of the air within the machine. The system’s pressure at a particular time draws in air, compresses it, and lets it out as compressed power.

The air across the machinery determines the temperature levels of the discharged air. It is noteworthy that lobe compressors do not require oil lubrications within the lobes. The lobes run for restricted clearances to deliver compressed air that is free from oil spillages.

We will write a custom Essay on Screw Compressor specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More As discussed, lobe compressors discharge compressed air that is oil free (Stosic, Smith and Kovacevic 69). Therefore, lobe compressors are used in fish hatcheries and aquacultures to support life.

They are also useful in meat processing systems as they produce compressed air that is free from harmful chemicals. People have also found lobe compressors useful in the printing and paper converting industries, wastewater treatment industries, and in the environmental remediation systems.

Works Cited Bloch, Heinz. A Practical Guide to Compressor Technology. Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Ecosystem Report (Geelong Botanic Garden) Report best essay help

Introduction Ecosystem comprises of biotic and biotic factors that are present in a given environment. The biotic factors are the living organism such as microbes, plants, and animals, while the abiotic factors are nonliving components like water, air, rocks, soil, sunlight, and topography. The interaction of biotic and abiotic factors in a certain environment occurs in a form of a system due to the flow of nutrient and energy.

In essence, ecosystem examines how biotic and abiotic factors interact as a self-sustaining system (Chapin, Matson,

[supanova_question]

Begin by researching Shamrock Foods company (https://www.shamrockfoodservice.com/). In 250-500 words, address the following: Describe the company and its sustainability model.How has sustainability he argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

shamrockfoodservice.com/). In 250-500 words, address the following:
Describe the company and its sustainability model.
How has sustainability helped to achieve the company’s goals and competitiveness with other supply chains?
What are the financial impacts of sustainability on the company?
What are the benefits and challenges associated with sustainability efforts?
Are there any federal mandates in the United States on sustainability? Make sure to include current and future mandates.

[supanova_question]

Women Entrepreneurs in the UAE Report online essay help

Overview Introduction

Entrepreneurs, regardless of their inherent location or gender, share similar problems in relation to properly accessing sufficient capital to start their business, developing a sufficient cash flow to sustain their venture and a variety of other distinctions that are connected to the process of developing a business.

With the development of new internal policies within the UAE comes an era where women have become more empowered, both in the workforce and in entrepreneurship. This is evidenced by the fact that nearly 54% of all university graduates within the UAE are women and that a growing percentage of them focus on furthering their own careers and the development of their family business or their own business [1].

This is not to imply that women themselves cannot be entrepreneurs within the country, far from it:, women are actually actively encouraged to take part in business and several have become successful entrepreneurs.

However, due to various types of cultural restrictions which are a part of social traditions in the UAE, this creates demonstrates a low rate of female entrepreneurship with only 3 out of 10 entrepreneurial businesses being started by a woman [2], [3]. These restrictions come in the form of:Women needing permission from a male to start a business,insufficient support from the government, Lack of collaboration with other women.

In this research what will be analyzed are the inherent difficulties experienced by female entrepreneurs within the U.AE from 10 year back to now. It is expected that through the various facts and arguments presented in this research, a clearer picture can be developed regarding what difficulties female entrepreneurs experience within the UAE and what processes have been put in place by the government in order to address such issues.

It is expected that through proper investigation and analysis, this research will create effective suggestions as to how female entrepreneurs within the region can best respond to the financial opportunities and challenges they are currently experiencing.

Problem Definition

Ten years ago, female entrepreneurs within the UAE suffered from a string of limiting factors that prevented their expansive growth. This came in the form of traditional cultural practices, insufficient government support and lack of proper access to financial institutions.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Since these factors were in place ten years ago, this research will thus seek to determine whether these problems continue to exist at the present, how female entrepreneurs view such problems and what solutions may be needed in order to effectively address them.

It is based on this discovery that in the following section an investigation will be conducted regarding the current perception of female entrepreneurs involving the problems they face and what possible means of addressing them could be developed. The fact remains that the current policy system within the region suffers from significant gender specific biases.

This creates barriers towards the creation of a better business environment for female entrepreneurs. What is necessary is the development of better policy initiatives in not only removing gender barriers in entrepreneurial activity but also in developing the necessary networks for female entrepreneurs to thrive.

Another necessary examination is to elaborate on the current status of female entrepreneurial funding within the country and how this has affected the success/ failure rates of entrepreneurs. Another question that must be explored into is whether all the recent programs aimed at creating better conditions for female entrepreneurs have been effective or have things remained the same despite their implementation?

The end result of such an analysis is to understand what methods of female entrepreneurial funding would the entrepreneurs like to see implemented so as to create a better business environment that is more conducive towards entrepreneurial activity.

The question of the research is: What are the key obstacles that women entrepreneurs in the UAE believe they faced 10 years ago, and still stands now?

Women entrepreneurs in the UAE face a lot of challenges [3]. Studies indicate that despite the rapid growth of women entrepreneurs in both developed and developing countries as the UAE. The issue of gender equality, particularly within the UAE cultural context, stands not efficiently resolved [4], [5], [6]. Entrepreneurship plays a significant role in boosting economic growth.

We will write a custom Report on Women Entrepreneurs in the UAE specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The UAE happens to be among the country that shows impressive progress in economic growth, through encouraging entrepreneurship projects. Most of the women entrepreneurs in the United Arab Emirates participate in small-scale businesses, and hence receive socially little support [7]. However, women in the UAE go through lots of challenges running their own businesses [5], [6].

There are several factors against women entrepreneurship in this region. These include cultural factors, religion restriction, opportunity recognition, work-family balance, motivation, gender discrimination, financial support, and performance among others [6].

Recognizing opportunities is a bit hard for the Emirates women, considering that gender differences are linked to the varying variables of human capital. The differences primarily revolve around work experiences and education. In the UAE, men receive more advantagesd than women, considering that their experience in entrepreneurship experience and management of employees is a bit higher.

Researchers indicate that women have less human capital to invest in businesses compared to men [8], [9], [10]. This makes it hard for women to identify opportunities and utilize their potential skills, experience, and power.

The restricted structure in labor markets of the UAE, demotivate women entrepreneurs on grounds of gender inequality. The cultural and religious factors to some extend play a significant role in denying women right to own businesses without the support of their male partners.

On the contrary, the women’s entrepreneurship experience in other countries such as Jordan and Kuwait is quite different. The recognition of women’s entrepreneurship’s contribution to economic growth is higher in these Arab countries compared to that of UAE. For instance, the Kuwait Economic Society implements projects that empower women.

These projects enhance trade and investment [11], [12]. They also focus on creating a business environment that supports women entrepreneurship. For instance, an already established KES program in Kuwait provides women with opportunities such as training, sharing of experience, business networking, and growth among others.

In Jordan, there are numerous funded projects that create awareness of issues surrounding business environments. Here, women receive training concerning entrepreneur issues such as performance and decision making processes [12]. This promotes their entrepreneur projects. Jordan and Kuwait also strengthen legal awareness of issues surrounding women entrepreneurs.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Women Entrepreneurs in the UAE by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More This increases the depth of their skills, techniques and offer capital to women for starting new businesses. This all in the long run contributes a lot to the economic growth of the country [14]. For instance, Saudi Arabia offers them 3,000 Saudi Riyals every month to start new businesses [15].

There are several measures that should be put in place to help women entrepreneurs in UAE to overcome challenges in businesses. These include education, training, and support of the UAE governmental funds among others [15]. The UAE should copy some practices from countries like Kuwait, Jordan KSA, and other developed Arab countries, which encourage women entrepreneurship [16], [17].

These countries understand the importance of women entrepreneurs in economic growth, and employs strategies that influence them to become entrepreneurs. However it cannot be denied is clear that the UAE has made a progress in addressing issues associated with the Emiratis women.

For instance, the Mohammed bin Rashid Al-Maktoum Foundation in collaboration with the American University of Beirut came up with a plan supporting women innovation and entrepreneurship in 2008.

New programs have also been introduced in the country enabling the emergence of many partnerships of women entrepreneurs and large corporations. In 2009, the chamber of commerce and industry registered more than 4,160 women as members [18].

Motivation and Relevance to Masdar/UAE

Since Masdar City is a clean, green and sustainable city, this atmosphere requires innovational yet responsible business ideas. The UAE Women entrepreneurs could try translating, their creative business ideas to sustainable technologies, producing useful products, providing environmentally friendly services or maybe help with creating new jobs in Masdar.

Objectives

The primary objective of this paper is to compare the situation of female entrepreneurs within the UAE 10 years ago with their current situation in 2013. Through this analysis, this research will be able to show whether sufficiently positive developments have been enacted that would be conducive towards developing a better environment to encourage female entrepreneurship within the UAE or not.

In this research what will be examined is the current state of SME’s within the UAE and the situation of female entrepreneurs in 2014 as compared to how they were ten years ago. This paper will be able to determine whether sufficiently positive changes have been implemented resulting in a better overall situation for the growth of female entrepreneurship within the UAE.

Through this section, a greater understanding will be developed regarding the various factors that restricted the growth of female entrepreneurship within the region and if such factors continue to take a dominating role in gender based entrepreneurial growth.

So far, what this section has shown is that the problems female entrepreneurs currently face within the country come in the form of traditional cultural practices, insufficient government support and lack of proper access to financial institutions.

When comparing the data from the article “Small Enterprises: Women Entrepreneurs in the UAE” by Hans Christian Haan with current academic articles examining the state of female entrepreneurship within the country, it was shown that the issues have remained roughly unchanged from the time that the Haan article was written.

It is based on this that the primary objective of this paper is to expound on such issues and determine how they can be resolved.

In conclusion the main objective of this research would be to attempt a 10-year review of Haan’s study results to see whether the same conclusions apply today – after many innovational attempts nationwide were formed or not. What factors faced women in the past get improved, and which still stand and needs further investigation, action or regulation.

Some ways to inspire and assist woman entrepreneurs in the UAE would be:

Empowering UAE’s woman entrepreneurs to seek collaborations with educational and research institutes that promote development of novel innovative and practical business ideas.

Educating enterprising entrepreneurs on development and creation of creative innovations that have high chances of legalization, with potentially big impacts on the economy where ready market is available.

Empowering woman entrepreneurs with knowledge of identifying the processes and procedures those innovative ideas must pass through in order to be socially accepted as viable and worth investing in.

Educating entrepreneurs on ways of getting government funding and reaching out to non-governmental organizations to fund their innovations and noble ideas; entrepreneurs fail to venture into markets due to inadequacy or complete lack of funds and under-informed on available sources of funds.

Literature Review

Entrepreneurs in the developed countries (USA, Sweden and Finland)

Although government policies, infrastructure and large markets provide vast investment opportunities in developed countries, young entrepreneurs continue to face challenges [8]. [15] Point out that the decline in economic growth has resulted in decline in entrepreneurship opportunities and constant increase in business’ start-up costs.

Young entrepreneur’s sale their ideas to capital ventures and find themselves exploited as capital ventures benefit and leave them with nothing [19]. Other scholars argue that the content of entrepreneurship in the local education especially in Finland is so wide; the methods of teaching entrepreneurship in schools are poor and the goals of the entrepreneurial education conflict with the local business environment [7], [18], [19].

According to MoniaLougui, young entrepreneurs in Sweden and in the developed countries face entry barriers; these are obstacles that promote existing firms to make constructive economic proceeds while making it difficult for new firms to make impacts in the market. They also face financial barriers and cultural and value barriers [17], [20], [21].

Entrepreneurs in Gulf Countries

The Gulf region has attracted a lot of attention in the recent past due to its rapidly growing economy, especially Abu Dhabi and Dubai. Researchers suggest that the main obstacles facing young entrepreneurs in the Arab world is having access to capital [21], [22], [23].

Saifur Rahman [24] further says that despite Small and medium enterprises (SMEs) contributing greater percentages in national GDP, they are highly neglected and Lending for SMEs in the Gulf Coast Countries is very low and access to finance is the Greatest Challenge.

Khalid Al Ameri argues that that the Middle East education system has not shifted to meet the needs of the current technology and young entrepreneurs may not have enough knowledge about the business environment [23], [25].

HanifaItani, Yusuf M. Sidani and ImadBaalbaki [17] support Khalid Al Ameri saying that insufficient managerial and financial information and lack of government support are major obstacles to UAE SMEs and entrepreneurs. Bruhn et al point out that lacks of managerial capital is the key restriction for young entrepreneurs in most developing countries [26], [27], [28].

Entrepreneurship Development in the UAE

The main measures of entrepreneurship skills are scores on motivation, personal attitude and aptitude. Action planning in entrepreneurship is of importance to create solution oriented task and strategy implementation function for quantifying task orientation levels [30], [31], [32].

Thus, a budding entrepreneur must possess task orientation leadership skills at an individual task management level in reviewing actual and expected outcome of any business opportunity [33], [34], [35].

With the number of entrepreneurs supplying or dealing with similar products and services on the rise, it is imperative for entrepreneurs or businesspersons in UAE to understand factors influencing the consumer purchase decision in order to design the best strategy for meeting consumer demands [32], [37] [36].

Elements of Entrepreneurship Development in UAE

Scholars in the field of economics have approached entrepreneurship from different perspectives with numerous views regarding entrepreneurships and innovation. Peter suggests that entrepreneurship goes in hand with innovation, changes and opportunities for innovation [38].

On the other hand, Steve Blank, a business school professor avers that entrepreneurship is about getting out into the world and doing and not basically researching and writing [24]. These scholars do agree that entrepreneurs face difficulties of finding the right opportunities and the needed innovation, creating competitive brands using strong products and finding the right markets [39].

Rob and Marry postulate that innovation involves doing things differently or doing different thing in order to arrive at large gains in performance at micro and macro level of entrepreneurship [36], [37], [38].

The two authors further recognize that lack of capital and funding is the main obstacle for innovation. Others however contrast with Rob and Marry by associating innovations with the rise of technical inventions such as the computers and steam engines [10], [34].

As opined by Schawbel [35], [36], [37] an excellent entrepreneur should possess transformational leadership skills that identify a range of problematic situations that an individual faces in his or her social environment, and generates multiple alternative solutions to those problems.

Besides, he/she should lay a series of procedures that are necessary to achieve desired results rather than postponing response strategies [38], [39]. The three building blocks of situational management skills include learning intra personal performance, supportive learning environment, concrete learning processes, and practice leadership that reinforces performance [40], [41], [42], [43].

Consumer Behavior in UAE and Entrepreneurship Development

Consumers in UAE exhibit a particular sequence of purchases or proportion of purchases that may be predictive of consumer behaviors such a brand loyalty due to their unique Islamic culture. Consumer behavior can be determined through listening carefully to what the customers say about a product or service.

The focus here is to consumers feeling through assessment of her voice and comments about a product or service [44]. Understanding of consumer behavior facilitates effective entrepreneurship and promotion resources through ensuring that such activities are well planned in order to yield the desired result in the most efficient and effective way possible [45], [46], [47].

Consumer behavior in UAE is not only of great importance to entrepreneurs but also crucial to consumer protection agencies, ethicists, public policy makers and regulators and consumer advocacy groups who protect consumers from any unsafe offerings or decisions by marketers [46].

Understanding consumer behavior in UAE enables entrepreneurs to strategize on the best way to reach out to the clients. It also assists in establishing ways of changing unfavorable consumer behaviors as well as reinforcing positive behavior patterns [48], [49].

Challenges Facing Swedish Entrepreneurs

Rojewski [34] shows that entrepreneurship and small firms play a significant role in economic growth. Entrepreneurship is considered as innovation. It drives people to create their own jobs, and hence improves their living standards [11]. The author identifies the obstacles that entrepreneurs go through, when starting businesses.

Most of the Swedish entrepreneurs, particularly the women, find impediments and challenges when starting businesses [21]. Through the use of a multinomiallogitmodel regression, the author confirms that administrative costs and financial problems are the primary barriers to success of new businesses in Sweden [29].

In addition, the self-employed individuals who invest in manufacturing industries face many obstacles during the early stages of product development. In relation to the Emirates women entrepreneurs, it can be confirmed that women entrepreneurs in most parts of the world, particularly those in the developing world face lots of problems when starting their businesses.

Considering that the link between entrepreneurship and economic growth is positive, countries all over the world should modulate entrepreneurship. The UAE, for instance, needs to call off the cultural and religious barriers that restrict women from starting their own businesses.

Economic growth enhances high living standards, and hence improves the lives of women who would have otherwise been left to depend on their husband for everything [30].

Factors Undermining Entrepreneurship Development in UAE

The detrimental of insourcing to entrepreneurship attitude in UAE is often negative. The outsourcing UAE government has lost considerable taxes when only the foreign entrepreneurs carry out insourcing services. The outsourcing government cannot claim revenue on taxation because this benefit ends up with the foreign country that insources [51].

In addition, there is great concern regarding the rate of unemployment of local countries that outsourcing some activities to the insourcing countries. The situation became even more critical when developed countries compose the insourcing team as is the case in UAE. As a result, the rate of entrepreneurship development in UAE has been slow [51].

UAE has a reputation of setting high legal expectations of a business which is a repellent to internal and external entrepreneurship investors. Federal law of 1975 no. 5 on commercial registration makes verification of a business difficult since it has to pass many a lot before approval [4], [5].

Federal law drafted in 1992, no. 37 defines the provision of patent and trademark rights in UAE has helped eliminate the chances of fraudulent attempts on a company’s product to ensure that the company is not disadvantaged.

Besides, federal law no. 13 drafted in 2007 defines the legality of import and export business to ensure that entrepreneurs are protected [4], [5]. We could take up this as an assurance of the protection to be offered to their products against illegal dealers though the registration process is very expensive in time and cost.

For the social dimension of the evaluation of the UAE market for entrepreneurship products, it is necessary to tailor such products to suit the acceptable cultural norms. This way, it is necessary for the entrepreneurs who are carrying out the research to evaluate the literacy levels of the UAE people.

Specifically, it is recorded in the World Fact book of the CIA that literacy level by 2003 was at an average of 97% among young generation who are the target of entrepreneurship activities. [50], [51], [52]. This will include the evaluation of the education system and levels. Most importantly is to link the findings to the target market of entrepreneurship products.

By doing this, entrepreneurs in UAE will establish the level of awareness of the people of UAE. Several questions may pop up during this feasibility study. Comprehensively, it would be necessary to establish how conversant the people of UAE are to technological advancements constantly changing a cross the global arena [53], [54], 55].

The answers to this question could be relative as it depends on the country’s technological advancement. Research has it that UAE though very populous, have a high percentage of the literate in its population [56]. UAE has a high number of literate young who would be the target consumers for entrepreneurship products [57]. This is as a viable business opportunity.

Women Entrepreneurs in the UAE

Haan [58] gives a clear explanation concerning the UAE women entrepreneurs, their experiences in the field, and the roles played by public and private agencies in modulating entrepreneurship [59]. The author provides an analysis and a survey of 30 UAE women entrepreneurs.

The survey involves in-depth interviews concerning how they run their businesses, the challenges they face, and the support they get to pursue or continue running their enterprises. The Haan’s article provides a study about two different segments namely, the modern and traditional activities in the UAE women-managed enterprises. The latter is engaged in the most recent economic activities.

In incorporates advanced information and communication technologies and updated practices of businesses [60]. It is in most cases run by young UAE women, educated and business-oriented [57]. On the other hand, the traditional activities segment consists of simple manufacturing and trading [56].

The study in Haan’s article analyses the constraints faced by the UAE women entrepreneurs, and gives suggestions for the most appropriate recommendations. For instance, there is a need to formulate policies and create institutional capacity that promotes women entrepreneurship. There is also a need for pursuing specific support services for segments, as well as the government support and other agencies in the UAE [51].

Entrepreneurship, Emirati perspective

[26], [55] narrate that globalization, technological advances, and innovations among others are instrumental in the transformation of societies in the world [32]. However, there are challenges and opportunities associated with the aforementioned shifts particularly in women entrepreneurship. According to the authors, for the UAE to become a fully transformed entrepreneurial nation, it has to inculcate entrepreneurship at an early stage.

This should include teaching children at their early age about it, incorporating it in the education system, and using awareness platforms to inform, educate and influence people, particularly women, on the need to pursue entrepreneurship [33].

There is also a need to formulate policy insights to give policy makers a direction to assist them formulate efficient policies and programs to support the UAE women entrepreneurs. As mentioned earlier, the UAE has shown an impressive progress in the recent past with regards to social development and economic growth sustainability [38].

For instance, in 2011, the GEM study survey in 54 economies confirmed the UAE as one of the most innovation-driven country in the world. However, the nation needs to continue making immense progress in strengthening entrepreneurship, particularly women entrepreneurship [39].

This will not only help them become creative and create new jobs, but also enable them to empower others to do the same. This will ensure that the future generations of the UAE will be vibrant both in entrepreneurship and in growing the country’s economy [40].

Women business owners in the UAE

In the article “Women business owners in the United Arab Emirates” it is clear that the UAE women entrepreneurs are more educated than those from Jordan, Tunisia, and Kuwait among other countries [37].

According to the survey conducted in UAE, more than 89% of women entrepreneurs have an optimistic outlook towards their businesses and the country’s economy at large [38] [39], [40].

More than 73% of the women surveyed focused on growth and expansion, but needed financial opportunities. Only 8% felt that running a business was disadvantageous for them. This confirms that most of them love managing their own businesses compared to those from other Arab nations [39].

Female business students in the Middle East

Hossan, Parakandi, and Saber suggest that there are several barriers that restrict female students in the Middle East from pursuing entrepreneurship interests [23]. The authors analyze the strengths/opportunities, weaknesses/issues and challenges that these students get exposed to in the country.

From their research, it is evident that despite having potential to start ventures, these students lack enough knowledge about the organizations that support ventures [68]. Prior work experience and different entrepreneurship barriers, which are based on gender discrimination, deny women opportunities to participate in business ventures [23].

Current Attitudes Regarding Business Financing

Based on the article “Small Enterprises: Women Entrepreneurs in the UAE” by Hans Christian Haan, it was noted that women within the UAE rely on their own personal savings as their primary method of creating startup capital [4]. This is an incredibly laborious and time consuming process which would of course slow down the process of entrepreneurial activity within any country that utilizes such a system [5].

Such a situation is in stark contrast to the way in which the entrepreneurial sector in other countries such as China, the U.S., the UK and even in certain sectors in the Middle East work since it is often seen that investing in entrepreneurs creates numerous beneficial actions, such as a: A better local economy, gGreater amount of bank deposits and hHelping out what could potentially develop into a larger enterprise [13].

Banks generally think of entrepreneurs as “safe bets” when it comes to loans due to the attitude of entrepreneurs in paying back what they owe even if a particular business did not turn out as successful as expected [4].

Thus, startup capital in such situations often comes about through bank loans resulting in a far quicker level of business creation. After conducting an analysis of the Erogul (2011) article which examined the current situation of women entrepreneurs within the UAE, it was revealed that female entrepreneurs still continue to rely on their own slowly accumulated capital as compared to merely taking out a bank loan [3].

This shows that from 2004 till the present, there has been little change in the cultural attitude regarding entrepreneurial financing among women [8]. One of the potential reasons behind such a state of affairs has been connected to the currently arduous process of taking out a loan within a bank wherein a male sponsor is needed in order to sign and guarantee all aspects of the loan [13].

Since female entrepreneurs have to rely on a sponsor who may not always be there, this further impedes the process of business development which actually discourages women from relying on banks as a source of capital 10]. It was seen that in the article “Small Enterprises:

Women Entrepreneurs in the UAE” by Hans Christian Haan that in the case of the UAE, family played a crucial role in the funding and development of small to medium scale business ventures for women wherein more than 25% of local businesses started by female entrepreneurs were a result of family members contributing towards the initial starting capital of the entrepreneur and actively gave advice regarding the proper management of the business [10].

In fact, it was noted by researchers such as Mostafa (2005) that it is the strong interfamily ties within the country’s culture that limits the export market of the UAE. This is due to the development of a business culture where it has become preferable to deal with family members or friends of the family when it comes to joint business ventures and business opportunities.

This in effect severely curtails the ability of a business to expand beyond its current market due to the inherent hesitance in dealing with the unfamiliar [5]. While there is nothing inherently wrong with family based methods of capital financing, studies such as those by Mostafa (2005) stated that it often came with certain conditions related to the types of business that can be gone into by female entrepreneurs [5].

This often entailed clothing, textiles, and manufacturing that were often detailed as the “traditional domain” of female entrepreneurs within the UAE.

This conditional funding through family based methods of capital development can actually be considered a limiting factor in the capacity for female entrepreneurs to establish themselves in new types of business and, as such, can be considered a detrimental feature of the current “entrepreneurial funding” system within the UAE [13].

Analysis of Government Policy Initiatives

An analysis of government policy initiatives that were mentioned in the Haan article showed the presence of gender specific barriers in entrepreneurship wherein male sponsorship, male networking and overall male assistance was required when it came to women entering into any form of entrepreneurial activity.

The problem with the implementation of male sponsorships is that it is not needed in the case of women entrepreneurs since males basically just sign their signatures on a piece of paper [59]. They are not partners in the business nor do they take an active role in it; basically the Haan article shows that men are just there to show that there is a level of biased gender supervision occurring.

Through the work of Madsen (2010), it was revealed that at the present, there have been no government policy initiatives to address such issues with the same policies continuing to exist [60].

Contributing to this problem is the lack of sufficient government funding in the development of female support networks which are there to help women in connecting with each other and developing the necessary relationships to grow and expand their business.

While it may be true that the UAE government states that it actively promotes female entrepreneurship and even gives awards to prominent female entrepreneurs, the fact remains that the current policy system within the region suffers from significant gender specific biases. This creates barriers towards the creation of a better business environment for female entrepreneurs [6].

In a presentation, a number of things have changed over these ten years, yet the issue concerning women in business somehow remains just as unsolved as it used to be, mostly because the basic initiatives still revolve around introducing agencies that will help regulate the issue within the market.

However, certain changes are definitely worth being mentioned. While the issue regarding women in the UAE business still leaves much to be desired, considerable concessions have been made over the past decade.

To start with, the formation of the Khalifa Fund can be considered the stepping stone of female empowerment in business in the UAE. Khalifa Fund was created in 2007 in Abu Dhabi, UAE. The fund was originally intended to help SMEs and encourage the development of small businesses across the country.

Offering to invest in new and promising industrial and service sectors within the Abu Dhabi area, the fund allowed for small business growth. Funded by the government, the organization reflects the attempts of the latter to change the UAE business landscape. In 2012, the organization announced its determination to invest in microbusinesses [61], [62], [63], [64].

In fact, the given organization can be considered by far the most supportive and efficient of all; being one-of-a-kind project, it provides “venture capital, training, development, data and consulting services, and even marketing support” [3], which is very impressive.

However, financial assistance does not have a tangible impact on the Emirati society and its concept of women in business: “However, unlike other countries, there is a lack of support targeting female entrepreneurs in UAE” [4].

Recently, the organization has been paying special attention to women in business. In 2013, nearly 30% of $14 m was provided to allow for more options for UAE women in SME. At present, the Khalifa Fund is tackling the issue quite efficiently.

However, there is still a long way for the Khalifa Fund to go in order to provide UAE women with the same options as men have in business.What is necessary is the development of better policy initiatives in not only removing gender barriers in entrepreneurial activity, but also in developing the necessary networks for female entrepreneurs to thrive [65], [66], [67], [68].

Research Plan Methodology

The methodology that will be utilized within this particular research will be, a serial of questions sent to a variety of female entrepreneurs within the UAE. In order to determine the various difficulties they experience on a daily basis when it comes to entrepreneurial activities. To achieve statistical significance results and conclusions, we chose the initial number of surveys distributed to be 200 with the goal of obtaining 100 useful responses.

Survey

In wWomen business owners in the United Arab Emirates, 2007 paper, a44 survey questions were analyzeds in their study [21]. Haan conducted a survey of 30 questions in his UAE women entrepreneurs’ paper [13]. In this research a similar set of questions will be incorporatedin the survey.

To provide solid and statistically useful data, around 200 candidates will be asked to answer these questions. Then an analysis of the results obtained in this step will be made. This all will help us perform a sampling campaign for candidates of the next step.

Personal Interviews

Thenwe will narrow down the number of candidates, to a reasonable number of candidates from UAE women business owners, to conduct personal interviews with them in order to obtain qualitative assessments of the factors explored in the survey. We will be choosing candidates who follow a certain pattern, to better measure the problem in hand.

The candidates will be sharing their experiences before and after they started their businesses. For instance they will talk about the challenges, opportunities, and the support they needed to make their businesses a success. Mentioning strategies that helped them succeed as entrepreneurs, despite the constraints that acted as barriers. Again all information gathered will be analyzed for the in depth interviews.

In Depth Interviews

This will be the last step on the methodology, and the number of candidates will get even smaller than step 2, because the questions in this stage will get more specific and detailed and more personal. All information that will be obtained via any method of the data gathering will be kept strictly confidential.. Their feedback would give a huge impact on the recommendation section of this research.

The Gantt chart demonstrates the monthly milestones of the research for spring semester.

Gantt Chart

Spring Plan Jan 2014 Feb 2014 Mar 2014 Apr 2014 May 2014 Gathering Information Review literature

Conduct surveys

Conduct interviews

In Depth Interviews

Integrating findings Analyzing Results

Giving Conclusions

Giving Recommendations

Thesis Defense Thesis Writing References Y. Itani, S. Yusuf, and I. Baalbaki. “United Arab Emirates Female Entrepreneurs: Motivations and Frustrations.” Equality, Diversity

[supanova_question]